Home

Display - Service, Support

1. Knife shaft with inkremental encoder Measuring wheel with 3 4096 pulses revolution incremental encoder 2048 pulses revolution Start of web detection Light barrier Driving roll vmax 200 T v R vy Material Distance material i Panel length FORMAT rog mm 4 00 mm gt Fig 4 7 Drum type shears typical system Table 4 11 System specific data H100 X_Shear Norm Normalization value for knife coordinates AX AY are re in degrees H104 200 sm Reference Speed Reference SE is the material velocity Hoe o0 epson krite and material have the same direcion of mation LEJ 700 mm Distance material Distance sie the light barrier for start of detection and center of the knife 48 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description The drive motor for the knife is directly mounted on the knife without a gearbox The knife and motor can therefore use the same incremental encoder This is electrically connected to the CU The position tracks and the zero pulse are transferred from the encoder emulation pulse encoder module of the CU to the T400 via the backplane bus Error correction The knife position when cutting is a function of the reference position reference position Thus all of the errors when sensing the reference position flow directly into the cutting accuracy Although the precise reference
2. 16 7F02 11429 Max PulsesEnc_2 0 na B0424 H430 S set Pos_2 H423 0208 B 180 7 H425 0317 B 120 2 S Pos corr Val2 S Pos Set Value2 H426 3204 KR 180 7 H427 3630 KR 220 7 S vRef simul H455 3219 S EnableVrefSim H454 0000 Em TR e a N a N AN H V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram l Pulses Speed and position reference drive Pulses per revolution Reference speed Reference pulses Speed Position Synchronization Position set for synchronization Mode Synchronization pulse Maximum position Correct position Position at Synchronization Set position Enable synchronization Position set value Position correct value Error code Enable speed simulation Simulated speed Group error 1 Position sensing Reference position material 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Tfilt Speed2 4 8 ms H436 Speed2 d435 KR3436 Position2 act value KR3435 J Speed2 smoothed Comparator BO435 n Ref gt 0 BO436 n Ref 0 BO437 n Ref lt 0 x X gt Y T x y 0 0 Y X lt Y KR3434 Speed2 32 ms p B0432 Position2 set for synchr T_LongPulse 32 ms H418 B0434 Sync2 pulse 32ms S Long Pulse H419 0431 0 T Long Pulse B 130 8 BO431 Synchronization pulse 2 Actual Format S actForm Norm d447 H441 3114 KR 60 6 KR3447 actual format KR3440 Synchron position Error code Enc2 d434 Attent
3. B0647 Shear standing in start position KR 120 7 B0644 Shear in start position S Start Position H641 3161 KR 200 8 special shear position Generate a pulse for calculation at B0649 Passed calculation position S Pos CalcPos i iti Gormparaicr Y B0648 fall below calculation position H648 3414 KR 120 7 B0640 Pos gt calculation position Pos CalcPuls 0 75 B0641 Pos lt calculation position H649 Is the material position bigger than start length After passing the start length the shear starts accelerating to web speed true with big sheets or linear systems Comparator Reference position RefPos limited 200 2 Ref pos gt start length Start length 200 8 Ref pos lt start length IN EE EK EEN EN ee Control logic V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Range monitoring 2 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Watching or limitation of the shear position T3 S optRange1_max L215 3001 KR 70 2 S optRange1 L216 3413 KR 120 7 S optRange1_min L217 3000 KR 70 2 Range monitoring with variable limits in T3 e g speed depending Rng3_Factor_Max Range3_max 1 0 1000 mm L223 L224 S Range3ShiftMax L220 3000 KR 70 2 S optRange3 L221 3413 KR 120 7 S Range3ShiftMin L222 3000 L225 L226 0 0 0 0 mm Rng3_Factor_Min Range3_min Range1_limited Range1 Underflow S optRange2 min Watching or limiting an actual val
4. 95 1 0 l 95 1 0 ms SD 95 2 R 95 4 0 0 R 95 4 1 0 R 95 5 3100 70 7 0 mm 70 6 BO 110 3 BO 110 7 BO 110 7 BO 100 3 BO 100 3 BO 100 7 BO 100 7 1 BO 100 2 1 BO 100 2 1 BO 100 6 Parameter H268 Enable BiDir4 Initialization par H269 S Bin Output 1 H270 S Bin Output 2 H271 S BiDir Out 1 H272 S BiDir Out 2 H273 S BiDir Out 3 H274 S BiDir Out 4 H276 AI3 Scale Factor H277 Al3 Offset H278 AI3 Time Constant d279 AI3 smoothed H280 Al4 Scale Factor H281 Al4 Offset H282 Al4 Time Constant d283 Al4 smoothed H284 Al5 Scale Factor H285 Al5 Offset H286 Al5 Time Constant d287 AI5 smoothed Parameters and Connectors Description Defines the driver direction for the bi directional digital terminal 49 0 Input 1 Output Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 51 Default Raise knife saw Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 52 Default Lower knife saw Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 46 Default Fault Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 47 Default Open brake Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 48 Default Fan control Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 49 Scaling factor SF for analog input 3 setting refer to d279 Offset value for analog input 3 setting refer to d279 Smoothing time
5. H491 S POSRG clear H492 S PosRG_freeze_ H493 Tfilt X POSRG H494 S PosRG_PosSetp H495 S PosRG_Vmax H496 PosRG_VLimit H497 PosRG Acc_norm Parameters and Connectors Description Maximum mechanical motor acceleration in 1 s Source for the position normalization for the positioning block The position normalization is valid for the starting and target position and for the calculated reference position when positioning Positioning requires the position in units revolutions Thus the following is valid for the normalization Position normalization position in revolutions position normalized Source for the speed normalization for the positioning block The speed normalization is valid for the initial and maximum speed and for the calculated reference speed when positioning Positioning requires the speed in units revolutions s Thus the following is valid for the normalization Speed normalization speed in revolutions s speed normalized Source of the starting position for positioning actual knife position in the normalization selected with H482 Source of the initial speed velocity for positioning actual knife speed in the normalization selected with H483 Source for the Accept setting value when positioning function this involves the starting position starting speed As long as the start values are accepted they are passed on to the positioning which outputs them
6. Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 450 5 460 5 460 5 180 1 3098 180 3 0000 180 1 3000 180 1 3629 180 1 3162 180 1 3000 180 1 3006 180 6 180 7 3123 180 1 BO 180 4 BO 180 6 3099 180 6 0000 180 1 0511 180 2 0577 180 1 0250 180 1 0573 180 1 107 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L215 S optRange1_max L216 S optRange1 L217 S optRange1_min c218 range1 OVF c219 Range1_UF L220 S Range3ShiftMax L221 S optRange3 L222 S Range3ShiftMin L223 Rng3_Factor_Max L224 Range3_max L225 Range3_Factor_Min L226 Range3_min C227 Range3_OVF C228 Range3 UF L229 S optRange 2 max L230 S optRange2 L231 S optRange2_min C232 Range OVF C233 Range UF c234 Out of Range3 L236 S S RS FlipFlop1 L237 S R RS FlipFlop1 108 Description Source for the upper range limit of the 1 range monitoring of the knife position Source for the knife position 1 range monitoring of the knife position Source for the lower range limit of the 1 range monitoring knife position Display Knife position has exceeded the upper range limit of the 1 range monitoring Display Knife position has fallen below the lower range limit of the 1 range monitoring Source for the offset guantity
7. Value Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 1000 ms 470 7 BO 470 7 BO 470 7 1000 ms 470 7 l 470 5 0342 l 470 5 20 0 R 480 1 390 0 R 480 1 10 0 480 2 0600 R 480 5 l 640 6 W 640 7 l 630 1 2 l 630 5 6 3023 l 640 1 3474 l 640 1 1347 l 640 1 R 640 3 1 0 R 640 4 l 640 5 3025 l 640 1 3498 l 640 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter H784 S Setp2_CU_sel d785 Setpoint2 CU H786 Setpoint2 CU Norm d787 Setpoint2 CU N2 H788 S Setpoint3 CU d789 Setpoint3 CU H790 Setpoint3 CU Norm H791 S Setpoint4 CU d792 Setpoint4 CU H793 Setpoint4 CU Norm H794 S Setpoints CU d795 Setpoint5 high CU d796 Setpoint5 low CU H797 Setpoints CU Norm d801 d810 PZD1 CB inp PZD10 CB inp H811 S DW1 low CB H812 S DW1 high CB H813 CB DW1 Norm d814 CB Setpoint DW1 H816 S Setpoint CB H817 CB Setpoint Norm d818 CB Setpoint Parameters and Connectors Description Source for the signal to select setpoint1 at the CU alternatives refer to H782 and
8. 6 DD1801 4DA2 STEP7 CFC and D7 SYS on CD ROM Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 5 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Overview 13 Adapting the standard software package The purpose of offering a standard software package is to provide a pre configured control related solution for a specific application where it is only necessary to make a few application specific adaptations Further a high degree of flexibility is demanded in order to be able to cover as many customer requirements as possible The procedure for adapting the software for this particular case will now be explained using the rough structure as shown in Fig 1 1 Material position Knife position transmitter transmitter CU Position and speed CU drive converter sensing drive converter et CB Closed loop shears CB communications control communications Digital and analog inputs Auxiliary application specific control functions Digital and analog outputs Fig 1 1 Rough structure of the standard software package The following have to be adapted e Defining the sources for the control signals from CB or local input or from the basic drive SIMOLINK e Defining the setpoint channels format entries setpoints for the drive converter e Normalization of setpoints and actual values e Specifying the plant system geometry e Specifying the position transmitters This adaptation essentially involves the interfaces
9. Function diagram EA Ref pos offset KR3441 135 5 Position shear norm KR3414 120 8 Start length KR3162 200 8 AREF for AZ KR3163 200 8 Format setpoint KR3629 190 8 Long format norm KR3098 60 5 Actual format setpoint KR3630 220 7 Shear in start position B0644 340 4 n_shear 0 BO460 330 3 n_Ref 0 B0436 130 8 Cutting active BO576 320 5 OM local B0599 290 8 S SV LightGate L213 180 1 S ReqManualCut H370 0000 S EnablManualCut H371 0000 S start of cut H372 0000 B 70 2 S enf of cut H373 0000 S RefCorrPulse H374 0424 B 130 2 Tmax manual cut 5000 ms H375 Timeout for the cutting duration Pos correction value Reference pos FGEN Manual cut pulse Shear position Start length Correction pulse Stop length Set pulse Format setpoint Long format Pos setpoint start pos Format setpoint FGEN Manual cut pulse Shear in start position Shear standing still Material standing still Automatic manual mode Jogging or referencing Material detection Request manual cut Enable manual cut Start of cutting pulse End of cutting pulse Pulse reference position corrected Use this function only for test and only for systems with linear axis Connect to KR3370 Reference correct value B0376 Manual cut pulse H427 130 2 Cutting logic application specific Correct reference position H369 130 1 Set reference position L212
10. H193 600 ms H190 T Int CutCurve 0 0 CutCurve_min EE NN Ee EEN se EE EEN EEN N Shear control FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Cut curve and overspeed 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Manual mode Simulation 0 0 H518 H519 Maski LocMode 16 FFFF H516 B0518 Manual mode B0519 Simulation mode S SCTW1_simul H537 2621 K 810 6 Shear CTW1 d536 Mask1 AutoMode 16 FFFF H517 isa K2536 Shear CTW1 i Shear control word 1 S ShearCTW1 Bito Bit15 via PLC 0860 B 680 8 Shear control word 1 T a fo Oo SCTW1 0 a 501 0861 B 680 8 SCTW1 Bit 1 Continous cutting ee Bit 1 Continous cutting 502 0862 B 680 8 Bit 2 Test cut SCTW1 I 503 0863 B 680 8 Bit 3 Single cut SCTWI d539 504 0864 SCTW1_PLC B 680 8 Bit 4 Format setpoint valid SCTW1 505 0865 B 680 8 Bit 5 Light gate web start SCTW1 506 0866 B 680 8 Bit 6 Referencing SCTW1 507 0867 B 680 8 Bit 7 SCTW1 I 508 0868 B 680 8 Bit 8 Approach start position SCTW1 509 0869 B 680 8 SCTW1 510 0870 B 680 8 Bit 10 Enable cut program SCTW1 gt 511 0871 B 680 8 Bit 11 Crop cut SCTW1 512 0872 B 680 8 Bit 12 End cut SCTW1 513 0873 B 680 8 Bit 13 SCTW1 514 0874 SCTW1 B 680 8 Bit 14 Approach knife change pos 515 0875 B 680 8 Bit 15 Option special sheet Steuerung
11. H555 0000 B 70 2 Status shear Bit 0 Shear calibrated Bit 1 in synchronous range Bit 2 in format range Bit 3 in starting position Bit 4 In knife change position Bit 5 End cut program Bit 6 Zero pulse shear Bit 7 Mode positioning Bit 8 Raise shear Bit 9 Lower shear Bit 10 Shear top position Bit11 Shear bottom position Bit 12 Synchr pulse reference Bit 13 Light barrier Bit 14 Bit 15 Status shear d017 7 Status shear S Cut Error L840 3196 KR 220 3 StatisticLimit1 0 1 StatisticLimit3 0 5 L843 StatisticLimit4 0 75 L844 Statistic 1 0 L845 StatisticLimit6 1 5 L846 StatisticLimit7 2 0 L847 StatisticLimit8 5 0 L848 StatisticNumber Statistic Absolut 100 1 L849 L850 Normalized results Use absolute values e g 0 23 23 Actual value cutting error Portion lt Limit1 c851 LV1 Portion LV1 lt L Cutting error rs statistic Portion LV2 amp C853 Portion LV3 lt L c854 8 limits Portion LV4 lt LV1 LV8 c855 Portion LV5 lt c856 Portion LV6 lt L c857 Portion LV7 lt c858 LV8 Portion gt Limit8 Sample new data e852 Counter Reset Count pulses 0 B0579 H577 Sheet counter d022 S CutPulses Cutting active 320 5 Clear 2 wo N 3 an Count pulses K2022 Sheet counter S CutPulsDelay H574 0168 B 200 8 Sheet counter B0554 Cut Pulse a S Counter Set H578 0000 B 70
12. L040 3038 KR 380 2 S Speed Cam L041 3411 KR 120 7 S SpeedNorm Cam L042 3040 KR 380 3 Position Cam1_XB 0 6 Cam2_XA 0 5 Cam2_XB 0 6 S CamEnable pos S CamEnable neg L043 0001 B 70 2 R L044 0000 Cam oo B 70 2 L036 Separate enable inputs for Actual value positive and negative speed position Actual value speed Cam Pos Max Cam Pos Min 100 0 360 0 0 0 L037 L045 L046 Treatment of position overflows Cam deltaPos Max Cam active Logical OR of all cams Cam controller general settings and inputs Normalization speed Cam3_XA 0 5 Cam3_XB 0 6 Cam not active B0048 inverted Position Cam4_QN Cam4_XA 0 5 Cam4_XB 0 6 V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Control logic Cam group Boolean inputs Logic for MS2 see MS1 Logic for MS3 see MS1 Logic for MS4 see MS1 Selection Logic for MR1 masks see MS1 MS1 MS Logic for MR2 see MS1 MS3 MS4 Logic for MR3 see MS1 MR1 MR2 MR3 MR Note Bit XS1 is set to 1 if all bits of the Input quantity masked by MS1 are set 1 corresponding input Example MS1 16 3080 0011 0000 1000 0000b Corresponding logic function XS1 16 15 18 Free function blocks FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Definition of the logic function bl
13. Normalization factor for the double word 1 DW 1 from COMBOARD Calculation rule CB setpoint DW1 H813 process data 32 bit 16 40000000 1 double word setpoint from COMBOARD as floating point quantity 1 source to convert a 16 bit process data to REAL floating point Default PZD2 from CB Normalization factor for the 1 setpoint from COMBOARD Calculation rule CB setpoint H817 process data 16 bit 16384 1 setpoint from COMBOARD as floating point quantity Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 1347 640 1 640 3 1 0 640 4 640 5 3490 640 1 640 3 1 0 640 2 3000 640 1 640 3 1 0 640 2 3000 640 1 640 4 640 4 1 0 640 2 670 2 2807 670 4 2808 670 4 1 0 670 6 670 7 2802 670 5 1 0 610 6 610 7 97 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H819 S Setpoint2 CB H820 CB Setpoint2 Norm d821 CB Setpoint2 H822 S Setpoint3 CB H823 CB Setpoint3 Norm d824 CB Setpoint3 H825 S ActValue1 CB d826 ActValue1 CB
14. Param vawe sonne OOS O L700 0218 Connect 1st input from AND1 with range1_overflow saw is in the rear cutting range L701 0254 Connect 2nd input from AND1 with digital input 4 inverse saw is not in the upper position L720 940 0 Fixed value1 130 mm 810 mm 940 mm end of the cutting range Fig 4 18 L721 960 0 Fixed value2 wait position until the saw was raised 68 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Appendix 5 Appendix 5 1 Abbreviations AA AE AENC AX AY AZ Calib CB CTW CU DW EPC FC FGEN KP M_max M_soll N2 N4 PC PosRG PZD Q SCTW T TD TR V Ref V_soll Word Doubleword Analog output Analog input Absolute value encoder processing Angle where the knife looses contact to the web Angle where the knife get in contact with the web Symmetry of speed transitions between two cuts Calibrating the knife position define the absolute position Communications module Control word Processor module of the basic drive Double word 32bit word Enable position controller Format controller Format generator setpoint generator for motion sequences Proportional gain Maximum torque Reference torque 16 bit fixed point format 0x4000 corresponds to 100 32 bit fixed point format 0x40000000 corresponds to 100 Position controller Positioning setpoint generator Process data Source for a signal Shears control word also shear SCTW Smooth
15. Pos SyncDelay Parameters and Connectors Description Data Setting the synchronization type of the knife speed sensing The value has several Value functions The values in bold represent the factory setting Type Chart Bit s Value Significance 0 0 Synchronizing via the zero pulse 1 Synchronizing via the trigger input not for T400 1 0 When synchronizing the pos is set to the setting value 1 When synchronizing the setting value is subtracted from the position 2 0 Direction of rotation dependent evaluation of the synchronizing signal 1 Synchronizing with the leading edge of the synchronous pulse H428 bit 2 and H408 bit2 must be identical Not assigned 6 4 XYZ Number of the coarse pulse version refer to Fig 3 7 011 e g No 3 mode 3 zero pulse is always available if the coarse and fine pulse have a high signal level 15 7 Not evaluated Automatic position overflow generation For more than H409 pulse edges 4x pulses Value in one direction of rotation the knife position is reduced by the value H409 reference Type pulses and the Maximum position exceeded output is set to 1 for a processing Chart cycle The function is enabled for H409 gt 0 Group error message of the knife speed sensing When a fault develops d410 1 Type evaluate d410 Chart Normalized and smoothed H417 knife speed The speed value 1 0 is obtained if the Type material web is running with the reference speed and a sy
16. Table 3 23 The structure of control word 1 is identical with the first PZD which is received from CB However this control word is not completely transferred from the CB to the CU The enable signals setpoint ramp function generator are generated from the closed loop cut to length e 2 shears control words data inputs for the closed loop cut to lengths Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 37 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 5 Shears control word 1 chart 270 Er Name Gewese Fonetiese Fo scemo Nee 5 SCTW1 5 Light barrier start of the Light barrier identifies the material material web Le l scris Referencing Request ifecalbrafon SSCS Pz sem nooi OOOO e Serwi Approach siar positon Request approach siar postor o T scrwis 10 SCTW1 10 EE cut program SEER program is enabled the length setpoint is transferred with the 0 1 edge 11 SCTW1 11 Crop cut enable At the start of the material web the first cut is with the crop length Special format refer to Chart 60 14 SCTW1 14 Approach knife change Request that the knife moves into the knife change position position 15 SCTW1 15 Option special test After the cut program has been completed a sheet is cut with a special length Table 4 6 Shears control word 2 Chart 280 ait Name Gewese Fonetiese r To scrwa0 Mass Ps sewes Nagte Ps scrwas nodi O OOOO e scrwae Notdeines OOOO o Serw
17. gt 45 mm corresponds to 921 6 pulses Select Fsymech H105 922 0 04883 45 019 mm End of the general settings for linear systems 148 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Setting the speed controller basic drive Generate a speed step short Settings and wiring changes re establish the original settings after the adjustment has been made L896 0 to use pulse_3 Chart 436 to generate a pulse L897 100 ms pulse duration L660 0 1 fixed value 11 as speed setpoint start with 10 H777 2660 fixed value 11 as alternative speed setpoint chart 640 1 H778 896 enter alternative speed setpoint with pulse_3 H146 0 1 test with a low P gain of the position controller J Monitor the setpoint and actual value using an oscilloscope H220 3412 output the speed actual value knife as first analog value factory setting H226 3779 output the speed setpoint as 2nd analog value y Power up the system reference traverse to starting position y Initiate pulse L896 1 L896 0 Step response OK yes AA Correct KP Tn of the speed controller in the basic drive Test with rated speed L660 1 0 A no L660 1 0 Speed dependent KP gain in this case e g for SIMOVERT MC P235 KP value for L660 0 1 P236 KP value for L660 1 0 P232 150 adapt KP as
18. 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 0625 0626 0627 0628 0629 0630 0631 0632 0633 0635 0636 0640 0641 0644 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 0665 0666 132 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0680 0681 0682 0683 0684 0687 0688 0689 0691 0693 0694 0695 0696 0699 Free FBSORTG Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 133 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0771 0772 0773 0774 0775 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 0785 0786 0787 134 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0835 680 8 input CB INV SHEAR CB O16 CB CTW2 15 inv 0836 425 3 Free_FBs andOR3 Q Output 3 AND OR logic 0972 600 5 output SD1200 QTS CU send initialized 0973 600 5 input CU R1000 OT CU timeout 135 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 1822 440 3 Free FBs Free W B 2 013 FreeWord2 12 outputs word gt binary converter 1823 440 3 Free FBs Free W B 2 014 FreeW ord2_13 outputs word gt binary converter 136 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors FreeW ord2_14 outputs word gt binary converter FreeW ord2_15 outputs word gt binary converter d F 2400 120 4 Constant Pulse
19. 180 1 Shear pos setpoint start position B0380 Manual cut pulse H130 210 1 and L535 260 6 Timing diagram for manual cutting Request manual cutting Manual cut pulse Start of cut pulse End of cut pulse Note Logic for adapting the reference position after switching between local modes and continous cutting respectively for manual cutting This logic enables to continue the automatic cutting as long as the line has not been moved too far condition material position lt start length Manual cuts are allowed only for systems when cutting is possible even with standing line true for the most linear systems In automatic cutting mode the shear has to be positioned to the start position after manual cutting This is true even if the shear is allready in this position The logic for starting the positioning has to be changed in this way For rotary systems set H440 3000 135 4 Ee EN Si ee EN E Position sensing Correction of the reference position after manual cut or disabling cutting modes 10 01 01 7 V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Ed Sheet cutter Cut to Length S AENC Offset L173 3000 KR 70 2 S AENC Reset AENC resolution AENC Frequency AENC EncoderType AENC Parity AENC NumberTurns 0 2 0 0 L164 L165 L167 L161 AENC Zero Bits AENC PosAlarmbit AENC DataCode 8192 0 0 0 L160 L162 L163 L166 se Erorr code hardware General error code Position
20. 340 470 500 Chart 530 State machine for simple stand alone application Enabling Status Words Chart 810 Chart 360 370 Chart 620 Control words for inverter control unit CU Chart 630 680 EE S 2 S s S a ENE y e EE EEN EEN EG General FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Block diagram control Sheet cutter Cut to Length Referencing shear Chart 170 Pulse encoder shear fo Position controller Chart 230 Shear drive position gt and speed Setpoint speed Chart 120 positioning mode Pre control torque position mode Normalization of position and speed Chart 60 80 position shear Additional torque Pre control torque components format mode Chart 240 Set reference position Enable Chart 180 synchronization Cutting curve Chart 120 140 Chart 265 450 Pulse encoder measuring wheel Pass mark counter Setpoint speed Reference drive Chart 135 ae eg position and speed Position controller PC Displacement Chart 210 Chart 130 correction Chart 135 Reference speed Actual sheet size Chart 130 220 Local modes Setpoint speed Format controller Jogging referencing doc ihodes Chart 220 Setpoint sheet size Chart 260 Chart 190 ee eis ee 8 General FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Block diagram shear controller Sheet cutter Cut to Length Technology parameters Symbol Parameter name factory setting Hxyz Parameter name dxyz 7 Parameter name H
21. 9 Oo 5020 KR 265 5 FGEN Curve Type 0 H154 BO172 Update format constants Update format constants Format generator Format constants AX Actual format Reference position Reference speed Factor overspeed Curve type Position setpoint Speed setpoint sinus angle Electrical format Start position Start length Reference pos for AZ Acceleration Phase 1 Acceleration Phase 2 Diagnostics_1 Diagnostics_2 Shear within cut region Shear within format region Hardlock missing Group error Error code v1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length FGEN Xsetp FGEN Vsetp FGEN_sin sin d157 d158 ElectricFormat d160 StartPosition d161 Ref pos offset 135 5 AREF for AZ Acc Phase1 di63 d164 FGEN Diagnostic1 d166 FG in CutReg d168 Hardlock missing FGEN Error d170 d171 d159 Start length d162 Acc Phase2 d165 FGEN Diagnostic2 d167 FG in FormatReg d169 KR3157 FGEN _Xsetp KR3158 FGEN_Vsetp KR3159 FGEN sin KR3160 Electric format KR3161_ Start position KR3162 Start length Start length KR3168 offset KR3163 AREF for AZ KR3164 Acc Phase1 KR3165 Acc Phase2 KR3166 FGEN Diagn 1 KR3167 FGEN Diagn 2 FGEN in B0168 cut region FGEN in B0169 format region FGEN Error code d155 B0170 Hardlock missing B0171 FGEN error FGEN REISS error code Function diagram 200 S SetpPosition
22. CU status2 0 inv p B0315 gt CU status1 15 inv p B0335 CU status2 15 inv Et Ni Ri e a e RR es ee ee ee Inverter interface V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Inverter status words 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Control Word1 CU do12 Control word 1 Control word 2 EE CU S ControlW1 Bito Bit15 for inverter S ControlW2 Bit0 Bit15 for inverter 0840 0000 B 680 4 0 OFF1 Control word1 CU B 70 2 x N A 3 Control word2 CU y J Q 6 I T 741 0841 B 680 4 761 0000 0 OFF2 pulse disable B 70 2 I 742 0527 B 280 8 762 0000 0 OFF3 quick stop B 70 2 743 0662 B 360 5 763 0000 1 Inverter enable B 70 2 744 0664 B 360 7 764 0000 Ramp funct gen enable B 70 2 745 0664 B 360 7 765 0000 B 70 2 oa Start ramp funct gen 746 0664 B 360 7 766 0000 Setpoint enable B 70 2 I I 747 0584 B 530 6 767 0001 Bit 7 768 0001 B 70 2 ogging 1 B 70 2 Bit 8 769 0666 B 360 7 0 gt 1 Fault acknowledge 748 0848 B 680 4 q I I 749 0849 B 680 4 qj logging 2 Bit 9 Enable speed controller X I 750 0001 B 70 2 770 0001 B 70 2 o Control requested Bit 10 751 0851 B 680 4 771 0000 B 702 Bit 11 Clockwise seq enable 752 0852 B 680 4 772 0007 B 70 2 Bit 12 N Counter clockw enable ns
23. Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 1 0 160 5 0 0 160 4 150 4 R 150 4 R 160 6 R 160 4 1311 l 150 2 3292 l 150 2 16 FFFF w 160 2 16 FFFF w 160 2 0976 l 150 2 0147 l 170 1 0594 l 170 1 0415 l 170 1 0684 14 170 1 0682 l 170 1 0529 l 170 4 0593 l 170 4 0000 l 170 6 3183 l 170 6 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L309 Calibrate Delay c310 Shear calibrated L311 Synchr Pos neg L312 Synchr Pos pos c313 Set Val Shear Pos L314 L316 S Enable Synchr1 S Enable Synchr3 L317 CoarseRef pos L318 CoarseRef neg L319 S SynchrShearPos L321 L322 S OR4 1 S OR4 2 L323 L324 S OR5_1 S OR5_2 L325 L326 S NX_Cut Polygon S NY_Cut Polygon L327 Set Cut Curve L328 Typ Cut Curve L329 L330 LM1 Cut Curve LM2 Cut Curve L331 L338 S ModeSwitch I1 S ModeSwitch_18 L339 L342 ModeSwitch_MS1 ModeSwitch_MS4 L343 L345 ModeSwitch_MR1 ModeSwitch_MR3 Parameters and Connectors Description Delay which is effective when referencing the knife position after the position sensin
24. Description Source for the normalization of L041 The normalization is given by change in the position L040 time for the position change for a velocity 1 0 at L041 Enable the cams for position velocities Enable the cams for negative velocities Maximum position actual value of the cam controller for drum type shears e g 360 If the position overflow processing is required e g if the cam is shifted with respect to time and therefore enters the range of the discontinuous position location Minimum position actual value of the cam controller for drum type shears e g 0 refer to L045 Position and time offset of the 1 cam XA Switch on threshold for a negative speed switch off threshold XB Shutdown threshold for a negative speed switch on threshold DT Time offset in ms positive values 2 premature switch on negative values gt late switch on Position and time offset of the 2 cam refer to L047 Position and time offset of the 3 cam refer to L047 Position and time offset of the 4 cam refer to L047 Baud rate of the peer to peer interface Permissible values 9600 19200 38400 93750 187500 5 process data from the peer to peer interface Enables the peer to peer interface Enabling will initiate an error state and becomes valid after the next power on Do not enable while cutting is active Time limit to receive data via the peer to peer interface in cyclic operation Valid data must
25. Fiexd pos 4 d241 d248 KL53 Binlnput1 KL60 BinInput8 d249 KL84 Coarse Pulse 1 d250 KL65 Coarse Pulse 2 d261 KL46 Input d262 KL47 Input d263 KL48 Input d264 KL49 Input H265 Enable BiDir1 Initialization par H266 Enable BiDir2 Initialization par H267 Enable BiDir3 Initialization par 80 Description Smoothing time constant for analog output 1 Displays the output quantity for analog output 1 The output is realized in the fastest time sector T1 Offset value of analog output 1 Scaling for analog output 1 Source for quantity X which is output at analog output 1 The voltage at terminal 98 is obtained as V_terminal98 5 V X H230 H231 Source for the control signal to set the analog output 2 to 0 0 Default The output is not set to 0 0 Smoothing time constant for analog output 2 Displays the output quantity for analog output 2 The output is realized in the fastest time sector T1 Offset value of analog output 2 Scaling for analog output 2 Source for the normalization factor for 4 position fixed values 4 fixed values interpreted as a position These values are available as original and as normalized positions nomalization factor see H233 Actual signal level of digital inputs 1 to 8 terminals 53 60 Logic signal level at terminal 84 This input can be used as coarse pulse input for encoder knife Logic signal level at terminal 65 This input can
26. H827 ActValue1 CB Norm H828 S ActValue2 CB d829 ActValue2 CB H830 ActValue2 CB Norm H831 S ActValue3 CB d832 ActValue3 CB H833 ActValue3 CB Norm H834 S ActValue4 CB d835 ActValue4 CB H836 ActValue4 CB Norm H837 S ActValue5 CB d838 ActValue5 high CB d839 ActValue5 low CB H840 ActValue5 CB Norm 98 Description 2 source to convert a 16 bit process data to REAL floating point Default PZD3 from CB Normalization factor for the 27 setpoint from COMBOARD Calculation rule CB setpoint2 H817 process data 16 bit 16384 on setpoint from COMBOARD as floating point quantity 3 source to convert a 16 bit process data to REAL floating point Default PZD7 from CB Normalization factor for the 3 setpoint from COMBOARD Calculation rule CB setpoint3 H817 process data 16 bit 16384 3 setpoint from COMBOARD as floating point quantity Source of the 1 actual value which is sent via the COMBOARD Factory setting Material velocity 1 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization Normalization for the 1 actual value at the COMBOARD Conversion Actual value CB 16384 value of the _source H825 H827 Source of the 2 actual value which is sent via the COMBOARD Factory setting Knife speed 2 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization Normalization for the 2 actual value at the COMBOARD Conversion Actual value2 CB 16384 value of the_
27. L115 Shear Blocking c116 L105 3411 f ar KR 120 7 speed lt n_Blocking Shear blocking S Blocking speed S Blocking nsetp Blocking nsetp i B0111 n_setp gt n_Blocking c241 L108 3023 KR 260 8 B0110 n_setp lt n_Blocking KR3241 gt Abs_nsetp L110 0 01 n_setp BlockLim 0 05 S Blocking act Torque L112 3325 KR 610 7 Blocking act Torque ae Bo112 Torque gt BlockLim c242 H KRZA Abs_actTorque B0109 Torque lt BlockLim L113 0 8 actTorq BlockLim Diagnostics V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Blocking protection 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length EncoderFaultUser c117 User fault incorrect parameter set Breath enon 120 8 gt Encoder fault user Encoder error2 130 8 Comparison of measured speed on T400 with speed from CU Delta_n Delay 10 0 s L124 In case of differences check pulse encoder parameters S Enable Delta_n check pulse encoder simulation board CU L123 0150 B 165 8 Delta_n Fault c125 BO125 Delta n fault S actSpeed CU L118 3319 Speed error KR 610 7 c120 Delta n gt Limit Comparator c122 S actSpeed T400 BO122 Delta n Limit L119 3411 KR 120 7 B0121 _ Delta n lt Limit L121 0 1 Limit Delta_n pO e e e sa ad TB N GT S e e Diagnostics FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Pulse encoder fault detection Sheet cutter Cut to Length SystemErrorMask 16 FFFF H970 System error TR load
28. L584 S Reduced Torque L585 S Speed_dvCut L586 F_over_max 116 Description Source for the supplementary speed setpoint This is connected as standard to the position controller output Source for the control signal to transfer the Factor overspeed It is not permissible to change the factor while cutting 1 Accept Factor overspeed Source for the control signal to enable the setpoint speed in cutting operation Control signal logic 0 Setpoint speed 0 1 Speed setpoint limiting according to L575 L576 Lowest permissible value for the Factor overspeed Source for the material velocity to determine the knife velocity setpoint Optional weighting factor for the Factor overspeed refer to Chart 265 This is also used as upper limit of the cutting velocity Lower limit value of the cutting velocity Constant weighting factor for the supplementary velocity which is generated from the cutting curve Source of the maximum speed for cutting operation modes Upper limit value of the velocity for cutting operation Lower limit value of the velocity for cutting operation The velocity components resulting from the cutting curve and evaluation with Factor overspeed Maximum positive torque referred to the reference torque This limit value is used to evaluate as to whether more torque is demanded than is actually available It can also be transferred to the basic drive as torque limit PZD7 in Chart 640 Maxi
29. Position sensing Synchronization Position Pos at synchronization Synchronization pulse Maximum position Position set for synchr pulse Reference pulses Maximum position overflow Reset position Set position Enable synchronization Error code Position set value Group error KR3410 Abs speed shear V Tfilt n Shear 20 ms H417 KR3412 Speed shear Speed Shear d411 KR3411 n Shear smoothed Pos Shear d413 KR3413 Position shear KR3414 Position shear norm X_Shear norm 60 4 Pos at synchronization Synchronization pulse 1 Th Position ot synchr Position synchronized Sync_OR_Overflow Shear max pos ovf S PosSyncPuls H414 0413 B 120 7 Pos Sync32ms Error code Enc1 d412 Error Enc1 H416 d410 100 ms Pos Sync Delay BO410 Error encoder 1 ER sensing V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd OE diagram Shear drive 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Pulses Encoder2 1024 H420 Measuring wheel here RS422 encoder Terminal A 62 o Em B 687 64 Synchroni N zation pulse N o 88 65 Coarse pulse o S Pos_2 correct H424 1345 B 410 5 S En Pos_2 corr H415 0576 B 320 5 S XrefCorrection H369 0000 S Enable Synchr2 K2420 Pulses encoder2 S Refer Speed_2 H421 3421 KR 80 4 S Refer pulses_2 H422 5422 KK 80 4 Coarse pulse handling H428 Bit 4 6 000 SyncMode Encoder2 Mode Encoder2
30. Source for the speed velocity actual value to the position actual value of the cam controller Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart BO 600 4 0666 l 600 2 1000 ms SD 600 4 10s SD 600 3 30s SD 510 4 0 BO 50 2 0 BO 50 2 BO 50 2 50 2 BO 50 4 540 2 50 4 690 1 2 690 4 5 BO 380 6 100 0 380 7 380 1 3038 380 3 3411 380 3 101 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L042 S Speed Norm Cam L043 S Cam Enable pos L044 S Cam enable neg L045 Cam Pos Max L046 Cam Pos Min L047 L049 Cam1 XA Cam1 XB Cam1 DT L050 L052 Cam2_XA Cam2_XB Cam2_DT L053 L055 Cam3_XA Cam3_XB Cam3_DT L056 L058 Cam4_XA Cam4_XB Cam4_DT L060 Peer Baud Rate Initialization par c061 c065 PZD1 Peer PZD5 Peer L066 Peer Enable Initialization par L067 tmax Peer Run C068 Peer Receive init C069 Peer Receive Status C070 Peer Transmit init L071 L075 S Peer PZD1 S Peer PZD5 L076 Mask Peer Status 102
31. Status Shear d020 Factor Overspeed d021 SpeedSetp Cut d022 Sheet Counter d023 Speed setp d024 d_Absolut Pos d025 Torque Setp d026 TorqAcceleration d027 Oscill Torque d028 Cutting Torque d029 Friction d040 d047 Display R1 Display R8 d048 d051 Display W1 Display W4 Parameters and Connectors Description Status word of the control Assignment BitO Position input of the TR encoder Bit1 Not assigned Bit2 Position controller enable Bit3 Knife at the start position Bit4 Fast stop from CU basic drive status word1 5 Bit5 Knife stationary Bit6 Drive converter ready Bit7 Fault TR encoder at start read the absolute position Bit8 Fault TR encoder no position pulses Bit9 Fault TR encoder timeout Bit10 Setpoint enable Bit11 Knife is calibrated Bit 12 Fault Bit13 Brake open Bit 14 Knife moving Bit 15 Inverter enabled Status word of the shears Assignment BitO Knife is calibrated Bit1 Knife in the synchronous range Bit2 Knife in the format range Bit3 Knife at the start position Bit4 Knife at the change position Bit5 Cutting program completed Bit6 Synchronizing pulse of the knife transmitter extended to 100 ms Bit 7 Bit15 Freely assignable source selected using H547 H555 The knife velocity when in synchronism is obtained from the material speed multiplied by the overspeed factor Setpoint of the knife speed for cutting Normalized quantity
32. T Q N D 0548 0000 B 240 8 B 70 2 T Q M 0000 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 T a 0000 B 70 2 T Q N CO 0000 B 70 2 T J 8 8 N 0000 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 T 2 a 0000 B 70 2 T o 0000 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 T co Go Go 0000 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 T O Go oa 0000 B 70 2 aS a a EP FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length i COMBOARD Status words S ActValue1 CB H825 3435 KR 130 6 H827 1 0 ActValue1 CB Norm S ActValue2 CB H828 3411 KR 120 7 H830 1 0 ActValue2 CB Norm S ActValue3 CB H831 3445 KR 135 5 H833 1 0 ActValue3 CB Norm S ActValue4 CB H834 3000 H836 1 0 ActValue4 CB Norm S ActValue5 CB H837 3000 KR 70 2 H840 1 0 ActValue5 CB Norm ActValue1 CB d826 K2826 ActValue1 CB ActValue2 CB d829 K2829 ActValue2 CB ActValue3 CB d832 K2832 ActValue3 CB ActValue4 CB d835 K2835 ActValue4 CB ActValue5 high CB Conversion to double word d838 LJ d839 ActValue5 low CB PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 C PZD4 C PZD5 PZD6 C PZD7 PZD8 C PZD9 S PZD10 CB ActValue5 high CB ActValue5 low CB H901 2846 K 690 4 H902 2826 K 700 3 H903 2829 K 700 3 H904 2847 K 690 8 H905 2307 K 610
33. Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart BO 100 6 1259 100 1 1279 100 1 0014 100 1 0676 100 1 0978 100 5 100 5 1 0 90 3 0 0 90 4 100 ms SD 90 5 90 5 1 0 90 3 0 0 90 4 100 ms 90 5 90 5 1 0 90 3 0 0 90 4 100 ms 90 5 90 5 81 Parameters and Connectors Parameter d301 d316 PZD1 from CU PZD16 from CU H317 S ActValue1 CU H318 CU ActValue1 Norm d319 CU Act Value 1 H320 S ActValue2 CU H321 CU ActValue2 Norm d322 CU ActValue2 H323 S ActValue3 CU H324 CU ActValue3 Norm d325 CU AviValue3 H326 S ActValue4 CU H327 CU ActValue4 Norm d328 CU ActValue4 H329 S DW1 low CU H330 S DW1 high CU H333 CU DW1 Norm d334 CU ActValue DW 1 H335 S Store Value 1 H336 H337 S EnStoreVal_1A S EnStoreVal_1B H338 S Store Value 2 82 Description Process data received from the basic drive The following are default values d301 PZD1 Status word 1 d302 PZD2 Speed actual value d304 PZD4 Status word 2 d305 PZD5 Torque actual value d307 PZD7 Current actual value 1 source to re normalize a 16 bit process data in REAL floating point Default PZD2 from CU Normalization factor for the 1 actual value from the basic drive Calculation rule CU actual value1 H318 process data 16 bit 16768 1 actual value from the basic drive converter as floating point quantity 2 source
34. When starting the positioning operation the actual sheet length is subtracted from the material position position correction function of the material position H424 H427 The time to lower and raise the knife determines for a specific material velocity the distance where the material and knife must run in synchronism The following information is required digital inputs for the sequence control knife position at the start of the range front limit switch knife position at the end of the range rear limit switch knife position at the start position knife position 0 knife is at the top knife is at the bottom p E ___ EE EE AE E s _ _ FORMAT Fig 4 13 Flying knife timing Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 57 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 7 1 1 Sequence control The sequence control for the flying knife includes 3 functions 1 Raising the knife 2 Lowering the knife 3 Changeover between format and positioning operation Table 4 20 Logical equations for the open loop control functions flying knife e AND v OR Function Status No Logical equations example Start to raise knife No cutting operation e manual operation UP lt 2 gt v cutting operation e knife bottom lt 3 gt v cutting operation e knife outside the lowering range Stop raise knife Knife top v no enable dominant lt 5 gt
35. ee a sh cee eee e S 753 0853 B 680 4 773 0007 B 70 2 Raise motor potentiom Bit 13 754 0854 B 680 4 774 0000 Lower motor potentiom B 70 2 Bit 14 775 0000 B 70 2 A 755 0001 B 70 4 ot 5 0 External fault Bit 15 ENE NE NEE EN eee EE eee EEN NG Inverter interface V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Control words 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Setpoint CU Setpoint CU N2 S Setpoint1A CU H776 3023 d781 KR 260 8 S SetpointiB CU H777 3474 KR 230 8 KR3779 H780 S Setp1_CU_sel H778 1347 1 0 B 410 5 Setpoint CU Norm Setpoint CU N2 S Setpoint2A CU H782 3025 Sepals cu Seipoin eu N2 KR 240 7 8 S Setpoint2B CU H783 6498 Spons CUNS KR 230 7 KR3785 S Setp CU sel H784 1347 t1786 PZD1toCU PZzD8tocu Process data 1 0 d731 d738 transmission to the B 410 5 Setpoint2CU Norm inverter l H721 2012 PZD 1 S Setpoint3 CU art a K 630 4 Control word 1 H788 3490 KR 450 5 d Setpoint3 CU PZD 2 Speed setpoint H723 2000 H790 K 70 2 1 0 Setpoint3CU Norm 3 H724 2013 d792 H725 2787 H791 3000 K 640 6 KR 70 2 Pd Setpointd CU Torgue setpoint o i H727 2792 e Setpoint4CU Norm gt K 640 4 Setpoint5 high CU H728 2795 conversion to double word d795 gt K 640 4 S Setpoint5 CU H794 3000 Setpoint5 high CU KR 70 2 K 630 8 fe S Setpoint4
36. gt 1 edge 11 CB SCTW1 11 Crop cut enable For the start of the material web the 1st cut is made with the crop length special format refer to Chart 60 14 CB SCTW1 14 Approach knife change position Request to move the knife into the change position 15 CB SCTW1 15 Option special test After the cut program has been completed a sheet is cut with a special length 30 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 16 CB control word 1 inputs for CU refer to Chart 680 IN NN EEN ENE EEN o N o GE Gewe Win se Weeg Fs Ca Gone Wie imni sepon Enebe serpin 7 eBGenerwir frone Fa Tos conoi wis Nojonen U y Fa ca conoi wia Neieggng2 joon Table 3 17 Status word 1 status for CB refer to Chart 690 a ee o Reyer SSCS e Poweroninmiirom eg e Sepointactual value deviation Weeg By CUS Ek ER OOOO Table 3 18 Status word 2 status for CB refer to chart 690 Gl sg ere GER o 6 Torque limit reached reference torque gt maximum torque Inverter enabled from the CU Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 31 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 3 Interface to the basic drive CU The T400 and the CU communicate via a dual port RAM DPRAM Parameters and PZD are transferred In this particular application the T400 receives 16 PZD and sends 8 PZD Table 3 20 and Table 3 19 The C
37. limited e g negative values are not permitted Upper limit value to limit the reference position refer to H197 Lower limit value to limit the reference position refer to H197 Source for the signal to calculate the format controller The format controller is processed once at a positive edge of the connected signal Source for the angular constant AX for the format generator Source for the angular constant AY for the format generator Source for the angular constant AZ position of the transition point for the format generator Scaling factor for analog input 1 setting refer to d214 Offset value for analog input 1 setting refer to d214 Smoothing time constant for analog input 1 Source for the control signal to set the analog input 1 to 0 0 Default The measured value is not set to 0 0 Filtered measured value at analog input 1 Al1 This analog input is sensed in time sector T3 The measured value is obtained as d214 Terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset d214 Terminal voltage H210 5 V H211 Scaling factor for analog input 2 setting refer to d219 Offset value for analog input 2 setting refer to d219 Smoothing time constant for analog input 2 Source for the control signal to set the analog input 2 to 0 0 Default The measured value is not set to 0 0 Filtered measured value at analog input 2 Al2 This analog input is sensed in time sector T3 The measured value is obtained
38. output Y2 The X values must be parameterized in an increasing sequence This means friction X n lt friction_X n 1 20 value pairs to specify the cutting curve Input values lt X1 output Y1 Input values gt X2 output Y2 The X values must be parameterized in an increasing sequence This means n_cut_X n lt n_cut_X n 1 20 value pairs to specify the moment of inertia characteristic Input values lt X1 output Y1 Input values gt X2 gt output Y2 The X values must be parameterized in an increasing sequence This means moment of inertia X n lt moment of inertia_X n 1 20 value pairs to specify the characteristic for KP adaption proportional gain of the speed controller in the basic drive converter Input values lt X1 output Y1 Input values gt X2 output Y2 The X values must be parameterized in an increasing sequence KP_X n lt KP_X n 1 Output of the characteristic for KP adaption This means Output of the characteristic to specify the cutting curve Friction characteristic output Moment of inertia characteristic output moment of inertia f knife position Effective moment of inertia Source for the input quantity of the KP characteristic Source for the input quantity of the cutting curve Data Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type
39. possible to access via the RS232 interface Baud rate of the USS interface OP1S can only operate with 9600 baud or 19200 Value baud Address of the USS interface Type Chart Value Type Chart 0 ms 436 5 0000 436 1 100 ms 436 1 750 3 750 3 5 BO 750 3 750 5 540 4 540 4 540 6 540 6 540 6 BO 770 1 9600 770 1 770 1 125 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L993 USS 4 Wire c994 USS Status c995 c996 PZD1 USS PZD2 USS L997 L998 Q PZD1 USS Slave Q PZD2 USS Slave 126 Description Data Difference between 2 conductor half duplex and 4 conductor operation full duplex Value 0 for the USS interface Type Value Significance Necessary for Chart 770 1 0 RS485 2 conductor half duplex for OP1S 1 RS232 4 conductor full duplex for SIMOVIS The end nodes at the USS bus RS485 must terminate the bus with terminating resistors Switches S1 1 and S1 2 on the T400 switch the appropriate resistors in the ON setting Receive status word of the USS interface refer to SIMADYN D Communication Type W Error Messages 3 and CFC Online Help This value is only of significance if the Chart 770 4 T400 is operated without basic drive and parameterization is to be realized via the serial interface 1 of the T400 in the USS protocol Received process data of the USS interface Type W Chart 770 6 Sources for the two pieces of process data output at the USS
40. process data 16 bit 16384 4 setpoint from COMBOARD as floating point quantity Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart 2801 680 1 2621 680 1 680 2 2810 680 5 680 5 690 4 690 7 700 5 700 6 BO 660 3 BO 660 3 Value 0 Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart DI 50 2 BO 660 6 BO 660 1 100 ms 660 1 660 3 16 F FFF w 660 4 20s SD 660 5 2805 l 670 5 1 0 R 610 6 R 610 7 99 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H933 H936 S Logic5_I1 S Logic5_ 4 H937 H938 Logic5_MS1 Logic5 MS2 H939 Logic_MR1 H940 Logic_MR H941 H944 S Logic6_I1 S Logic6 l4 H945 H946 Logic_MS1 Logic_MS2 H947 Logic6_MR1 H948 Logic6_MR H950 H965 S Fault BitO S Fault Bit 15 H966 Fault Mask H967 Alarm Mask d968 Fault Bit H969 Fault Start Delay H970 System Error Mask d971 CU Receive init d972 CU Transmit init d973 CU Timeout 100 Description Sources for the digital input signals of the 5h parameterizable logic Masks for 4 setting functions of the 5h parameteriz
41. refer to c177 for EnDat connected to T400 Error code for the hardware fault monitoring in the EnDat encoder The significance of the individual bits can be taken from the data sheets of the encoder for EnDat connected to T400 Error code of the software error monitoring of the SSI or EnDat encoder BitO Permissible speed exceeded configured sampling time too slow Bit1 Speed limit exceeded L171 Bit2 Time overflow EnDat encoder does not respond Bit3 Communications error sporadic poor contact Bit4 Communications error too many errors protocol parity correctly selected Bit 6 11 Configuring error illegal values for L160 L167 for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Group fault message of the absolute value encoder sensing on the T400 Position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 without normalization or conditioning For multi turn encoders the most significant bits represent the number of revolutions Normalized position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 without the multi turn positions For L169 1 0 c180 lies in the range 0 lt c180 lt 1 0 revolutions This value can be used to initialize the position of drum type shears Normalized position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 including multi turn positions For L169 1 0 the position is displayed in revolutions This value can be used to initialize linear positioned shears Speed of the absolute value encode
42. ue DI6 Fixed pos 1 Fixed pos 1 norm Fixed pos 2 Fixed pos 2 norm Fixed pos 3 Fixed pos 3 norm Fixed pos 4 Fixed pos 4 norm i 7 8 Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length KR3050 Fsymech 60 7 Feed Revolution 1000 mm H117 cos_Epsilon 60 7 Pulse Encoder2 130 4 Xref_normalization 60 7 S Slip Factor H121 3001 KR 70 2 i_Meas Wheel 1 0 H116 SizeMeas Wheel 500 mm H115 dMeas Wheel_max 20 mm H142 S Meas WheelCorr H123 3000 KR 70 2 dMeas Wheel_min 20 mm H143 Constant Pulse encoder normalizations Revolutions Fsymech i_Encoder1 1 0 H118 KR3117 Feed Revolution 1000 mm m Reference Speed 100 m min H104 i_measure KR3116 wheel Circumference KR3115 Meas Wheel Reference speed 80 5 1000 mm m Pulses Encoder1 120 4 KR3218 Gear shear n_Ref Shear d119 KR3104 Reference speed 60 0 s min float reference pulses2 KK5422 gt Reference pulses2 neg reference pulses2 KR3421 Reference speed2 neg ref speed neg ref pulses 1 Refer pulses 1 inverter settings Ref Speed Refer Speed 1 Refer Speed 1 P353 with SIMOVERT MC 1 min neg ref speed1 Ref frequency1 Hz Scheme for reference position measuring without no measuring wheel Warning This reference measuring will never have the same accuracy as with measuring wheel i_Meas Wheel Encoder
43. v no cutting operation e no manual operation UP Start lower knife cutting operation e knife in the lowering range e format operation e Material still not cut lt gt v no cutting operation e manual operation DOWN e no manual operation UP Stop lower knife lt 8 gt v no cutting operation e no manual operation DOWN dominant lt 9 gt v knife_not_in the lowering range e cutting operation lt 10 gt v no_enable v knife bottom Start positioning Stop lt 11 gt Material cut e knife_top_pulse e cutting operation e mode linear axis format operation Start format operation lt 12 gt No_enable v shears_in the start position dominant lt 13 gt v positioning not active e positioning operation Material cut the status is set after cutting has been completed status is reset if the knife is in the accelerating range 4 7 1 2 Lowering and raising the knife In this case the range must be defined within which the knife should be or may be raised and lowered The limiting position Xgmax from which position the knife must be started to be raised is obtained from the time taken to raise the knife at the maximum material velocity in order to come to a standstill before the end of the operating range range gt Raising time x V rated l Top A Re ed I ag AE KA ENRE ee Vertical knife position 1 i I Bottom 1 i I l 1 1 gt x lt gt Horizontal Acceleration
44. 0 DI 135 1 3094 135 1 0453 135 1 BO 130 5 130 5 130 6 4 8 ms 130 5 135 3 135 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter H439 S Ref Pos Factor H440 S Ref Pos Offset H441 S act Form_Norm d442 Reference Error H443 Reference Min H444 Correct Increm d445 Material Position H446 ResetDisplCorr d447 Actual Format H448 S Set First Mark H449 S Reset First Mark H450 S Range Test H451 S Range Test Start H452 S Range Test End d453 in SynchrRange H454 S EnableVrefSim H455 S vRef simul H456 S n Standstill H457 Limit n_zero H458 Hyst n_zero d459 n_shear gt 0 Parameters and Connectors Description Source for the factor to calculate the reference position from the material position This is connected as standard with factor 1 0 Source of the offset value for shifting the coordinate origin of the reference position particularly for the format generator Set to 3000 for systems with rotary axis Source for the required normalization of the measured actual format Error message from the material position monitoring An error occurs if the material position falls below the minimum value H443 Lowest permissible material position in operation When the limit value is fallen below d442 is set to 1 If a material position offset has been identified the offset error is corrected in
45. 0749 JB Sync Puls AND1_Q 4 i Logic whether one mark is QANDI 12 Q S RS FlipFlop2 identified per panel L701 0735 Q AND1_13 L702 0001 B 70 2 L734 0434 Re positioning B0735 RSFF2_QN Q R RS FlipFlop2 L735 1347 B Fig 4 9 Enabling the pass mark synchronization as a function of the material position example for using free blocks in this case for a linear system Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 51 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 6 1 3 Offset correction When setting the reference position the closed loop control mustn t be influenced by step functions The value for the closed loop control Y in Fig 4 10 must be adapted in small steps H444 correction increment to the corrected measured value YP when setting The offset correction function is used to realize this Chart 135 The offset correction can also be effective for extremely large offset values e g for the first offset correction over several cutting operations A new correction operation is not started until a correction operation has been completed While the knife moves in the cutting range the offset correction can be held Thus the time derivatives of the reference position P and the corrected position Y are identical i e the knife and material are moving at the same velocity This avoids the knife being subject to various forces Y Corrected reference pos
46. 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter LO77 tmax PeerPowerON c078 Peer Timeout L080 S Peer DW1 L081 S Peer DW2 L083 S Peer Float1 L084 S Peer Float2 L085 Peer Sendtype1 L086 Peer Sendtype2 c090 Enable TR encoder c091 Enable T400 AbsEnc c092 En CU AbsEnc c093 Enable AbsEnc L094 SynchronToleranc L100 S Diagn n Shear L101 n Shear Max L102 n Shear Hyst c103 Overspeed pos c104 Overspeed neg L105 S Blocking speed L106 speed BlockLim L108 S Blocking nsetp Parameters and Connectors Description A timeout is signaled if after the power supply has been powered up no data are received from the peer to peer interface Status of the time monitoring of the peer to peer interface The monitoring times can be specified using L892 and L896 1 Timeout Source for the double word which should be output at the peer to peer interface as PZD2 and PZD3 Set L085 to 1 Source for the double word which should be output at the peer to peer interface as PZD4 and PZD5 Set L086 to 1 Source for the floating point value which should be output at the peer to peer interface as PZD2 and PZD3 Set L085 to 2 Source for the floating point value which should be output at the peer to peer interface as PZD4 and PZD5 Set L086 to 2 Selects the data for output as PZD1 and PZD2 of the peer to peer interface 0 Two 16 bit words according to L072 and L073 1 Double word according to
47. 1 H124 3157 KR 200 8 S SetpPosition 2 H125 3192 KR 265 6 S SetpPosition 3 H126 3000 KR 70 2 S SetpPosition 4 start position H127 3161 KR 200 8 S SetpPosition 5 knife change pos H128 3129 KR 60 4 S GotoKnifeChPos H129 0596 B 290 7 S GotoStartPos H130 0595 B 290 7 Set different limits for the position controller for cutting mode and local modes pa eN PosReg_Max_cut 1 0 H133 PosReg_Max_loc 0 1 H134 PosReg_Min_cut 1 0 H135 PosReg_Min_loc 0 1 H136 Ed Deviation PC d132 S ActValuePosPC H131 3414 R 120 7 EO KP Pos Ctrl 2 5 S Max Setp Pos H146 H137 3707 KR 480 2 Kp H140 S Min Setp Pos 0 0 H138 3705 PC TestSetp KR 480 2 freeze integral component Position not synchr 120 8 S PC Enable B0590 H139 0671 B 370 5 S PC_set YI 0 H141 0001 B 70 2 KR3132 Deviation PC Tn Pos Ctrl 6 ms H147 IntegratorValPC d145 KR3145 J Integrator value PC Note All position values on this chart are normalized values output PC filt d144 aq KR3144 output PC filt H148 4 8 ms Tfilt PC B0133 PC at maximum KR3143 gt output PC B0135 PC at minimum DO Wb 8 A a P a p ES o EN EE e FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Shear control Position controller PC 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S EnFormatCtrl H200 0172 The actual format setpo
48. 10 Working range 800 mm _ gt _ 10 Proximity switch start position Accelerating range Braking range RE Limit switch Rear limit switch Ge ee synchronous range e gt front Soh Br Motor Re N Measuring wheel N l Circumference 400 mm 2048 pulses revolution eas Spindle Light barrier to Knife Pitch 20 mm revolution detect material vy start i Cnet oe l Clearance light barrier knife FORMAT _ 450 mm gt x P iinet i ition arting position quiescent position and reference point for dimensioning Material movement in this example Involves Description required behavior Hardware constellation T400 in the SRT400 Speed interface 10V analog signal 100 8 V System velocity Up to 60 m min Cut duration Max 500 ms Cut monitoring There is no checkback signal for the knife position The cutting tool immediately returns to the quiescent position after the cut Cut start 50 ms after synchronism has been achieved End of cut After the max cutting duration has expired 50 ms safety margin It then immediately returns to the starting position Clamps Clamps are controlled when synchronism has been reached Duration 400 ms Format input The cut format is not changed during operation Material start 100 mm should be cut from the start of the material Manual cut automatic The cut is executed immediately after request The cut length is not defined operation The knife must be located
49. 360 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 53 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 6 2 Double saw The arrangement in Fig 4 11 is an example for a system with rotary axis where the knife coordinates are specified in mm instead of angles to make is clearer This system has 2 saws While the first cuts through the material the second is brought into the wait position The knife position is the position of the transport chain For each cut the knife position therefore changes by half of the chain length V_knife vy 70 center of the cu V_material Transport chain i 1st saw in the wait Transport chain i EE position Cut center Knife position 0 synchronizing pulse 300 mm N Y N pdg F f Vf ay EED F 6 X z i l 250 mm gt lt 500 mm gt t 500 mm gt 250 mm gt Cut AB fe 5mm l Fig 4 11 Double saw system schematic The system is in the synchronous mode if the transport chain runs with a constant velocity In this case the following is valid Material velocity knife velocity cos e A gearbox with a ratio of 10 1 is located between the motor and chain wheel The knife position is sensed using the motor encoder The position is synchronized using a proximity switch and more precisely each time that a saw reaches the center of the cutting range This setting is also decis
50. 41 BO749 Compare2 X gt Y BO750 Compare2 X Y BO751 Compare2 X lt Y Character_X1 0 0 L754 Character_Y KR3753 L756 1 0 Character_X2 S Compare_X L744 3000 KR 70 2 S Compare_Y L745 3000 KR 70 2 Comparator T1 1 Compare X Y Compare X lt Y Ramp function T3 48 Ramp up time 10000ms Ramp down time L724 10000ms L725 S Ramp max L721 3001 KR 70 2 Ramp at max S Ramp input L720 3000 KR 70 2 S Ramp Set Value L723 3000 KR 70 2 Ramp output Ramp at min S Ramp set L727 0000 B 70 2 S Ramp enable L726 0000 B 70 2 S Ramp min L722 3007 KR 70 2 Integrator LU Integrator T 1 0 1000 ms L819 L822 Integrator T3 49 B0817 Int upper limit KR3819 B0818 Int lower limit S Integrator X L818 3000 KR 70 2 S Integrator SV L821 3000 KR 70 2 L820 1 0 S Integrator set Integrator LL L823 0000 a EN ME Free function blocks Control functions 7 V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length T_OnDelay1 T_SingleShot_1 100ms 0 ms L729 L877 Low pass filter Tfilt PT1 20ms S OnDelay1 S SingleShot_1 order 1 ER L728 0000 L876 0000 B 70 2 OnDelay1_Q B 70 2 SingleShot_1 S PT1_inp L740 3000 T_OnDelay2 T_SingleShot_2 KR 70 2 100ms 0 ms L899 L879 S set_PT1_zero n L738 0000 S OnDelay2 S SingleShot_2 L738 0000 im B 70 2 L898 0000 L878 00
51. 7 FinalRoundingOff 100 0 H479 x KR3498 Torque setp PosRG 3480 Rounding Off x KR KR 230 8 500 0 H478 i PosRG_Diagn_Sel S PosRG TargetSel H477 0000 PosRG active 0 B 70 2 d499 H473 B0499 _ PosRG active J S PosRG Target H475 3161 PosRG i Eg o l Diagnostics KR3473 PosRG diagnostics S PosRG Target2 3000 d KR3485 X PosRG setpoint speed KR 70 2 KR3484 PosRG setpoint position PosRG_Vmax 1 0 KR3480 PosRG Vmax fixed value PosRG_Amax Tfilt_ X_PosRG H480 3 2 ms n BR Go S PosRG Vmax aE CO a ae aN N oO 150 0 use set values S PosRG Startpos H484 3414 H481 ee KR 120 7 S PosRG VStart H485 3412 Starting values for position and speed KR 120 7 KI KR3486 PosRG_X_smoothed S PosRG_set 1346 T BK Oo D B 410 5 Pre control with the speed KP PosRG TnPosRG Setpoint from the ramp PosRG VLimit 1 0 0 0 ms generator a 2 Vsetp PosRG H487 H488 H496 da74 S POSRG PosSetp H494 3486 S POSRG Vsetp KR 2305 dPos_PosRG H498 3485 KR3489 Kp Tn KR 230 5 S PosRG_actPos 3414 a Vsetp_PosRG S PosRG_PI enabl H490 1347 B 410 5 E BR eel CO enable S PosRG clear 1 H491 0000 clear integral component Position controller for positioning B 70 2 to start position S POSRG freeze 1 H492 0001 B 70 2 ae S 2 TEEN EEN EK MEE ENE EE EEN ER EE N EN EG Shear control FPlan SPS450evsd Function diagram Positioning
52. BinInput 3 inv BinInput 4 BinInput 4 inv BinInput 5 BinInput 5 inv BinInput 6 BinInput 6 inv BinInput 7 BinInput 7 inv BinInput 8 BinInput 8 inv KL84 CoarsePuls1 d249 CoarsePulse 1 B0259 CoarsePuls 1 inv KL65 CoarsePuls2 d250 B0250 CoarsePulse 2 B0260 CoarsePuls 2 inv Bit 0 BinInput 1 Status BinInput Bit 1 Bininput 2 d005 ER PL Status bin inputs Bit 3 BinInput 4 CA CE Bit 15 BinInput 8 inv hie 7 ee V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Pulse Encoder1 Pulse Encoder1 Z 1024 K2400 Speed and position H400 shear drive Attention 1 Rd BO412 Shear speed negative 0 Initialization parameters H400 H407 H408 become effective after next Bit 6 11 power up H407 Pulse encoder A 81 K B82 Coarse pulse J Mode Encoder1 from inverter Bit 7 1 H407 track B Zero pul es Q Enable synchronization S Enable Synchr1 L314 0599 Enable synchronization S p Mode Encoder1 S Refer Speed_1 H401 3401 KR 80 6 SyncMode Encod_1 Bit 4 6 000 H408 Mode Encoder1 Bits 0 5 8 15 H407 Coarse pulse handling MaxPulses Enc 1 0 H409 S Ref Pulses_1 H402 5402 KK 80 6 S Reset Pos 1 H403 1311 B 170 4 S Set Pos_1 H404 1306 B 170 7 S Sync1 Enable H405 0317 B 120 2 S Pos SetValue 1 H406 3313 KR 170 7 Pulses per revolution Reference speed
53. COMBOARD Sources for the 10 process data which are output via COMBOARD Actual values of the 10 process data output via COMBOARD Status of the initialization data receive from COMBOARD 1 Receive software and hardware were able to be initialized Status of the initialization of data output via COMBOARD 1 Output software and hardware were able to be initialized Defines the plant system ID d003 Status of the time monitoring from COMBOARD The monitoring times can be specified using H926 and H929 1 Timeout Enables communications with COMBOARD Time limiting for cyclic operation If no valid messages are received within this time timeout is signaled Status of the receive unit of the COMBOARD Numerical schematic refer to Lit 3 and CFC Online Help Caution The status word represents the coding of an operating status It cannot be interpreted bitwise The value does not have to be a constant 0 even in regular operation e g 1646003 if new data are not available at each cycle Mask to suppress certain bits of the CB receive status word Setting Interrupt communications remove cable and evaluate d927 If no data are received via COMBOARD within this time after the power supply has been switched in timeout is signaled 4 source to convert a 16 bit process data into REAL floating point Default PZD5 from CB Normalization factor for the 4 setpoint from COMBOARD Calculation rule CB setpoint4 H831
54. Caution This output is only valid for cutting operation Chart 200 6 d169 Format generator output shears in the format range Type BO FG in FormatReg Caution This output is only valid for cutting operation Chart 200 7 d170 Format generator output hardlock block not available The closed loop shears control Type BO Hardlock missing cannot be operated without this operating license Chart 200 6 d171 Format generator group error Internal error or illegal characteristic type was Type BO FGEN Error selected Chart 200 7 H172 3 source to enable the format controller Refer to H173 Value 0000 S Format Change 3 Default not used Type Chart 200 2 H173 1 source to enable the format controller The format controller is simultaneously Value 0413 S Format Changed1 signaled about a change in the format constants AX AY AZ format length The Type connected signal must be a short duration pulse Chart 200 2 Default Synchronizing pulse knife encoder H174 2 source to enable the format controller Refer to H173 Value 1345 S Format Changed2 Default Pulse at the start of positioning linear axis Type Chart 200 2 H175 1 source for the format setpoint of the format controller Value 3629 S FC_FormatSetp1 Default Format setpoint of the format request normalized Type Chart 220 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 77 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H176 S FC_FormatSetp2 H177 S F
55. Feeder Gear box drive optional Me IM Ed V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Hardware filter 10 V Terminal 90 0 Terminal 91 O Hardware filter 500 us 10 V Terminal 92 0 Terminal 93 o Hardware filter 500 us Terminal 940 10 V Hardware filter 500 us Terminal 95 0 10 V Hardware filter 500 us Terminal 96 o 10 V Al1 Scale Factor Al1 Offset 1 0 0 0 H210 H211 Al2 Scale Factor Al2 Offset 1 0 0 0 H215 H216 Al3 Scale Factor AI3 Offset 1 0 0 0 H276 H277 Al4 Scale Factor Ald Offset 1 0 0 0 H280 H281 Al5 Scale Factor AI5 Offset 1 0 0 0 H284 H285 yoy Al1 TimeConstant 25 ms H212 Al2 TimeConstant 25 ms H217 Al3 TimeConstant 100 ms S Disable Al1 H213 0000 Al1 smoothed d214 KR3214 Al1 smoothed S Disable Al2 H218 0000 Al2 smoothed d219 KR3219 Al2 smoothed Al3 smoothed Al4 TimeConstant 100 ms AI5 TimeConstant 100 ms H286 KR3279 Al3 smoothed Al4 smoothed AI5 smoo d287 Calculation cycle Input Cycle time All 12 8 ms Al2 12 8 ms AlS 51 2 ms Al4 51 2 ms AI5 51 2 ms thed KR3287 AI5 smoothed E A AM SA AE MR FPlan_SPS450e vsd GE diagram T400 Analog inputs 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length EA AO1 TimeConst 0 ms H222 Analog Output 1 S AnalogOutput 1 d223 i Sf o Terminal 97 ES Terminal 99 S Disable AO1 H224
56. Fig 3 6 Incremental encoder connection circuit Table 3 5 Incremental encoder inputs of the T400 Terminal assignment and switch settings for various encoder types HTL TTL HTL 3V 62 RS422 mare O N N Oo N Track A or track A Track A Track B or track B N vlojl o g pd EAEAEAFG Co co Q oo NX Go A A O O Synchronizing pulse N Synchronizing pulse N P15 output to the encoder power supply 15 V Ground Switch S2 1 Switch S2 2 Switch 2 3 Switch 2 4 Switch S2 5 oO O O n O n T O O n O T T O Z olololo 5 OJO OJO m T 2 9 9 3 O O mn T O n T O Z O O O ainin 24 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 6 Parameters to set the incremental encoder Param chant siontan ooms OO H400 120 Encoder pulses revolution for the knife position encoder 1 H407 Mode encoder 1 e Source of the encoder tracks refer to Table 3 7 e Encoder type e Filtering the track signals e Defining the standstill limit e Behavior when setting the position H408 120 Synchronization settings for encoder 1 e Position correction for a zero pulse e Coarse pulse evaluation H409 120 Max pulses encoder 1 if this value is not equal to 0 then the position is reset after H409 position pulses H420 Encoder pulses revolution for the knife position encoder 2 H429 Mode encoder 2 EE ES
57. H225 0 0 1 0 AO1 Offset AO1 ScaleFactor AO2 TimeConst 0 ms H228 Analog Output 2 S AnalogOutput 2 d229 H226 3414 WA o Terminal 98 KR 120 7 ES Terminal 99 S Disable AO2 H230 H231 H227 0000 0 0 1 0 B 70 2 AO2 Offset AO ScaleFactor Ee GN ET 5 y EE EEN EEN T400 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Analog outputs Sheet cutter Cut to Length KL46 input KL48 input d261 d263 S BiDir Out 1 S BiDir Out 3 H271 0014 H273 0978 Term 46 Term 48 Enable BiDir2 1 KL47 input KL48 input H266 d262 d264 S BiDir Out 2 S BiDir Out 4 H272 0676 H274 0000 B 70 2 Term 47 Term 49 i l Term 45 Supply voltage for output Warming l 24V drivers H265 H268 are initialization parameters Modification S Bin Output 1 takes place after the next power on H269 1259 If bidirectional outputs are enabled as output the corresponding input value is inverted E g H269 1 d264 displays a level inverse to terminal 49 S Bin Output 2 H270 1279 EE ea eee ae NN NE NEE EG EE EEN EEN ee FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Binary outputs and bidirectional VO 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Binary inputs KL53 BinInput1 d241 KL54 BinInput2 d242 KL55 Binlnputa d243 KL56 BinInput4 d244 KL57 Binlnput5 d245 KL58 Bininput6 d246 KL59 BinInput7 d247 KL60 BinInput8 d248 BinInput 1 BinInput 1 inv BinInput 2 BinInput 2 inv BinInput 3
58. H225 0 625 Scaling analog output 1 to output 1 0 as 8 V 95 5 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 159 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning 7 4 2 Par H619 H621 H110 H511 H111 L198 L199 7 4 3 Par H400 H407 H408 H428 H405 H420 H425 7 4 4 Par L519 L521 L525 L530 L531 L532 160 Format setpoint Value 2004 OOR MM 100 mm 1 25m 0436 3414 Function Select fixed format 1 as format request Enter the required cut format Crop length this is cut from the start of the material Set crop cut enable Select the longitudinal format so that for this cut format the knife remains stationary for approx 1 s in the starting position between two cuts H122 450 mm If the material is stationary in the shears and for a manual cut the material position is set to the value of the actual knife position refer above L198 Incremental encoders Value 1024 Ox7F02 0x0004 0x0004 0599 2048 0000 Function Motor for knife feed pulses per revolution factory setting Source of the encoder tracks from terminals 81 82 and synchronizing pulse from terminal 83 Direction of rotation independent of the front edge of the proximity switch signal starting position is used for synchronization this is only effective if identical to H428 Synchronization only enabled for jogging or referencing Measuring wheel pulses per revolution The material position may n
59. H783 This means that the torque setpoint for format and positioning modes are changed over as standard Actual setpoint 2 for the basic drive Normalization for setpoint2 at the CU This is the floating point value which is transferred as 100 at the basic drive Setpoint2 at the CU after normalization as N2 type 16384 100 Source for the 3 setpoint at the basic drive Setpoint3 at the CU after normalization as N2 type 16384 100 Normalization for setpoint3 at the CU This is the floating point value which is transferred as 100 at the basic drive Source for the 4 setpoint at the basic drive Setpoint4 at the CU after normalization as N2 type 16384 100 Normalization for setpoint4 at the CU This is the floating point value which is transferred as 100 at the basic drive Source for the 5 setpoint at the basic drive This setpoint is transferred as_32 bit value at the CU High word of the 32 bit setpoint at the CU after normalization Low word of the 32 bit setpoint at the CU after normalization Normalization for the setpoint at the CU This is the floating point value which is transferred as 100 32 bit at the basic drive The 10 process data which are received via COMBOARD Source for the low word of a 32 bit process data to convert to REAL floating point Default PZD7 from CB Source for the high word of a 32 bit process data to convert to REAL floating point Default PZD8 from CB
60. H923 0 RS485 OP1S 1 RS232 SIMOVIS 1 8 on Changeover from online operation CFC basic commissioning T400 to USS This only becomes effective after power down reset of the T400 It is not possible to simultaneously use USS and online operation USS Caution operation is not possible if parameterization was incorrect This means that the error can only be reversed if online operation is selected and e g the fault is reversed using the basic commissioning function Operation with OP1S is only possible from the OP1S version V2 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 27 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 1 4 3 Diagnostics interface A PC can be connected to the serial interface 1 RS232 The interface can be used with the service commissioning TELEMASTER of the CFC in the test mode This allows values and interconnections to be changed The baud rate is 19200 baud Table 3 11 Terminals of interface X01 on the T400 RS232 T400 3 1 5 Cycle times tasks The sheet cutter software is cyclically processed 5 different cycle times are available in each one of which a processing sequence occurs task The individual functions are depending on the priority from a control perspective embedded in faster or slower tasks In the following text no timing data is specified but instead a reference is only made to the processing task Table 3 12 Software cycle times Task Sheet
61. Jogging 1 The knife is moved forwards slowly For example Steady state function a coarse reference position can be approached The knife calibrated status is changed Jogging 2 The knife is moved backwards slowly For Steady state function example a fine reference position can be The knife calibrated approached status is changed Approach knife change The knife is moved to the knife change position e Calibrated Steady state function position Approach starting point The knife is moved to the quiescent position e Calibrated Steady state function Cutting operating modes Continuous cutting Continuous cutting of sheets e Calibrated Steady state function e starting position Cut program To cut a specific number of sheets When required Calibrated Steady state function when completed a test sheet with a specific length in starting can be automatically cut position Test cut Cutting an individual sheet Calibrated Latching function in starting position Single cut A cut is made at any position along the material Calibrated Latching function in starting position End cut A cut is made at the end of the material web Calibrated Latching function smooth cutting edge at the end of the material in starting position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 13 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction 2 3 1 Referencing 2 3 2 Continuous Steady state operating mode 14 For all cutting modes it is assumed tha
62. L080 2 Floating point value according to L083 Selects the data for output as PZD3 and PZD4 of the peer to peer interface 0 Two 16 bit words according to L074 and L075 1 Double word according to L081 2 Floating point value according to L084 Status of the enable for TR encoder processing Status of the enable for the absolute value encoder evaluation on T400 Status of the enable for the absolute value encoder evaluation from the basic drive Status absolute value encoder available Maximum deviation between shear speed and material speed which is still regarded as synchronous operation relation to reference speed Source for the speed signal which is used for overspeed monitoring Maximum permissible knife speed normalized to the reference speed Hysteresis of the knife speed monitoring normalized to the reference speed Status display Overspeed positive knife Status display Overspeed negative knife Source for the speed signal which is used as actual speed for the knife blockage protection monitoring As long as the knife speed is less than this value the knife could be blocked Source for the speed signal which is to be used as reference speed for the knife blockage protection monitoring Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart
63. L284 Abs Pos Norm C285 Abs Pos CU L286 AbsPos Limit Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual Edition 09 00 6DD1903 0DBO Parameters and Connectors Description Data Absolute value of the speed setpoint for the knife blockage protection Type Chart Absolute value of the actual torgue for the blockage protection of the knife Type Chart Sources for the digital input signals of the 1 parameterizable logic Type Chart Masks for 4 setting functions of the 1 parameterizable logic refer to Chart 400 Type The inputs are selected using the bits of a mask which are set to 1 the inputs are Chart then ANDed The low word of the mask selects the non inverted and the high word the inverted inputs Example Logic1_MS1 16 300F 0011 0000 0000 1111b AND logic operation 1 setting condition IG e l5e 14 13 e12 e I1 Masks for 3 reset functions of the 1 parameterizable logic evaluation refer toL251 Type and Chart 400 Chart Mask to select the inputs which reset the 1 parameterizable block The low word of Type the mask selects the non inverted and the high word the inverted inputs refer to Chart L251 The selected inputs or inverted inputs are ORed If the result of the OR logic operation is 1 then the outputs Q 0 ON 1 The output Q then changes from 1 to 0 and a pulse is output at QEN Status output of the 1 parameterizable logic The status is inverse to
64. L428 4J 4 KP_Diagr_Outp c490 output KP polygon set CutCurve Type CutCurve LM1 CutCurve LM2 CutCurve 0 1 16 0000 16 0000 L327 L328 L329 L330 Masks for linear section K Validate changes Type definition Cut Polygon Outp c491 KR3491 gt Output cut polygon S NY_CutPolygon L326 3001 KR 70 2 S V_CutPolygon L189 3000 YV cut polygon KR 70 2 KR3497 gt S NV_CutPolygon L190 3001 KR 70 2 EE GEN Ee EE GEN ENE NEE Ed EE ee Polygons Function diagram KP_Adaption and cut polygon 10 01 01 Friction polygon Friction_X1 20 points 0 0 Parameter number L350 L389 L350 even X values odd Y values Friction_Y1 0 0 L351 S FrictionPolyg L498 3023 KR 260 8 S NX_Friction L505 3001 KR 70 2 Friction_Y20 0 0 L389 Inertia f shear position F Inertia_X1 20 points 0 0 Parameter number L430 L469 L430 even X values odd Y values 1 Inertia_Y1 1 0 L431 S InertiaPolygon L499 3413 KR 120 7 S NX Inertia L511 3001 KR 70 2 Inertia_Y20 1 0 L469 Friction X20 SetFriction Type Friction LM1 Friction LM2 Friction 1 0 0 1 16 0000 16 0000 L388 L507 L508 L509 L510 5 Masks for linear section K Validate changes Type definition OutpFrictionDiag tout ash 492 outpu S Friction friction diagram L555 3492 KR3492 gt KR 460 5 L506 3001 S Offset Friction KR 70 2 L5
65. L700 0001 L710 0000 L321 0000 425 to 445 can be read beside each block B 70 2 S AND1_2 E g T3 9 means 9 free block in task T3 E L701 0001 L711 0000 L322 0000 SE B 70 2 B 70 2 SAND OR1 1 SAND1 8 L830 0000 13 9 ede AND OR 02 0001 L712 0000 B 70 2 L323 0000 YB 702 S AND2 1 L831 0000 L703 0001 Ed ae L713 0000 L324 0000 B 70 2 SANDEE B 70 2 L832 0000 L704 0001 L714 0000 S AND2_3 B 70 2 L833 0000 L705 0001 AND_OR2 GE GED YB 702 L834 0000 eco ag L834 0000 H631 0001 SU H631 0001 B 70 2 si L806 0000 AND3 B 70 2 L835 0000 H632 0001 B 70 2 B 70 2 L807 0000 S AND4_1 L836 0000 AND_OR3 L837 0000 B 70 2 L838 0000 B 70 2 S AND5_1 S AND6_1 S AND7_1 L689 0001 L691 0001 L693 0001 B 70 2 B 70 2 S AND5_2 S AND6_2 S AND7_2 L690 0001 L692 0001 L694 0001 B 70 2 B 702 Ss NN NE NE ENE NE EE EE EE GE EE EE EE GEE ee Free function blocks FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram AND OR gates 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length eli Parameter setting for S Not1 S S RSFEIPRIOp1 material cut S S RS FlipFlop4 iia L732 0000 1236 1277 L695 0000 B 415 8 B 70 2 Th RSFF1_Q E S Not2 S R RS FlipFlop1 a RSFF1_QN S R RS FlipFlop4 Te T 733 0000 T3419 L237 0454 L696 0000 B 70 2 1 p B0733_ Note B 330 5 B072 Nou S Not3 L543 0000 3 52 S S RS
66. Manual and product labels Danger indicates result if proper precautions are not taken WARNING For the purpose of this Manual and product labels Warning indicates death severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION For the purpose of this Manual and product labels Caution indicates that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 3 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Warning information NOTE For the purpose of this Manual Note indicates information about the product or the respective part of the Manual which is essential to highlight CAUTION This board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Prior to touching any electronics board your body must be electrically discharged This can be simply done by touching a conductive grounded object immediately beforehand e g bare metal cabinet components socket protective conductor contact Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Overview 1 Overview 1 1 Validity and how the software is supplied This Manual is valid for Version 1 0 of the standard Sheet Cutter Shears Control software package NOTE This documentation refers to software generated using the graphic CFC configuring tool for 32 bit SIMADYN D processor modules Hard
67. O Control logic FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Operation modes 1 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Starting condition Pulse single cut 290 8 State switching Passed calculation position 340 4 Stopping conditions Shear standing in start position 340 7 Request local mode 290 8 Shear not calibrated 170 5 Controller disabled 360 7 Starting condition Pulse test cut 290 8 State switching Passed calculation position 340 4 Stopping conditions Shear standing in start position 340 7 Request local mode 290 8 Shear not calibrated 1 70 5 Controller disabled 360 7 Operation modes 2 OM Single cut d568 B0568 OM single cut no single cut Single cut OM Test cut d570 BO570 OM test cut no test cut Test cut B0572 Test with standard size Control oa v1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd OE diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Starting condition S Light OM_EndCut 7 E OM End cut SCTW1 5 Light gate 270 8 Material detected H572 0555 d573 Coarse pulse 2 110 8 Enable end cut 290 8 State switching Passed calculation position 340 4 End cut Stopping conditions Shear standing in start position 340 7 Request local mode 290 8 Shear not calibrated 170 5 Controller disabled 360 7 Cutting active d576 OM Continous cutting 300 6 OM Single cut 310 6 Cutting active OM Test cut 310 6 OM End cut 320 7 Cutting disabled Start cutting mode End cutti
68. Priority evaluation local operation modes Activation of cutting operation modes automatic modes Pulse continous cutting Pulse test cut Pulse single cut Enable end cut The value 1 at the input with the highest priority is switched through Ef IE RE Oe OE BE Funcion diagram Control logic Priority handling 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length End Cut Prog1 d562 Req Cut Prog Special Sheet d561 d563 S NumberOfSheets H560 2809 K 670 3 Request cont cutting by cut program 1 SCTW1 10 Enable cut program 270 8 Cut program t End cut program 1 SCTW1 15 Option special sheet 270 8 Request special sheet Request cont cutting SCTW1 1 Cont cutting 270 8 OM cont cutting Starting condition d565 Pulse cont cutting 290 8 B0565 OM continous cutting State switching Passed calculation position 340 4 B0566 no cont cutting For the first and the lastcut the output Stopping conditions Standard sheet size is set to 0 Shear standing in start position 340 7 Continous Request local mode 290 8 cutting Shear not calibrated 1 70 5 ial sh Controller disabled 360 7 Spena i size AND 1 S _CutStop_ El BO575 Use special sheet size H566 0000 S Stop cutting Test with standard size 310 6 B 70 2 Stop cutting H564 0560 SAND CutStop 2 B 300 2 H567 0001 BO567 Standard sheet size Request cont cutting 300 5 ee S 2 GENE ENE es EEN es EE EEN EN 8
69. This is connected as standard to the speed output of the format generator Source for the overvelocity factor to evaluate the setpoint knife speed This is connected as standard to the Factor overspeed d020 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 3495 240 1 BO 240 7 BO 240 4 3824 240 1 3413 240 1 0250 240 1 3021 240 1 3493 460 7 3492 460 7 3435 240 1 0576 240 6 250 ms 240 2 500 ms SD 240 2 3000 265 1 3491 265 1 0576 265 6 3435 265 5 3158 250 1 3020 250 1 115 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L566 S Speed_PosCtrl L567 S Speed_Set_OVS L568 S Cut Speed Limits L569 F_over_min L570 S Speed_Vref L571 Overspeed_Max L572 n_Cut_min L573 Factor Cut Curve L574 S Max Speed_Cut L575 Cut Speed_Max L576 Cut Speed_Min c577 v_setp Cut Curve L578 max_Torque Cut L579 min_Torque Cut L580 TorqueMax_Local c581 act Max Torque c582 act Min Torque L583 S Speed_dVsetp
70. Type Chart Mask to select the bits of control word 2 which the automation uses in the Manual Value mode refer to H518 Type Chart Mask to select the bits of control word 2 which the automation uses in the Automatic Value mode refer to H518 Type Chart Source for the simulation value for shears control word 2 Value Type Chart Shears control word 2 from the automation Assignment refer to d544 Type Chart 3485 230 4 BO 230 5 s Chart l 270 1 16 FFFF w 270 1 16 F FFF w 270 1 0 BO 270 2 0 BO 270 5 s Chart l 270 1 W 270 5 2621 l 270 4 W 270 4 16 FFFF w 280 1 16 FFFF w 280 1 2623 l 280 4 W 280 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter d544 Shear CTW2 H547 H555 S Shear Status B7 S Shear Status B 15 H560 S Number Of Sheets d561 Req Cut Prog1 d562 End Cut Prog1 d563 Special sheet H564 S Stop Cutting d565 OM cont Cut H566 H567 S AND_CutStop_1 S AND_CutStop_2 d568 OM Single Cut d570 OM Test Cut H572 S Light OM EndCut d573 OM End Cut H574 S Cut Pulse Delay d575 Special Sheet Size d576 Cutting active H577 Counter Reset Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual Description Shears control word 2 Bito Not used Biti External fault alarm 1 Bit2 External fault alarm 2 Bit3 Jogging 1 Bit4 Jogging 2 Bit5 Not used Bit6 Not used Bi
71. VC Sizes A to D Order No 6SE7080 0Ad20 1995 2 Instruction Manual for SIMOVERT Master Drives Communications modules CB1 Order No 6SE7087 6CX84 0AKO 1994 3 Communications configuring D7 SYS SIMADYN D Manual Order No 6DD1987 1AA1 Oct 1997 4 Hardware SIMADYN D Manual Order No 6DD1987 1BA1 1997 5 SIMADYN D Function Block Library Reference Manual Order No 6DD1987 1CA1 October 97 5 4 Changes Edition 06 99 First Edition 70 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Parameters and Connectors 6 Parameters and Connectors 6 1 Important information The parameter name displayed at the OP1S is a maximum of 16 characters long You can toggle between German and English using the initialization parameter HOOO reset is required after a change has been made For several parameter types rounding off errors can be expected due to the limited resolution at data input or as a result of conversion operations Further in some instances more decimal points are offered than can actually be set All of the parameters used for the closed loop cut to length are listed on the following pages The listing is realized in the following form Table 6 36 Listing type for input or display parameters Parameter Description Data Hxyz Lxyz Parameter description for a selectable technology parameter Value factory setting type Parameter Parameters with the initialization parameter
72. Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart 0 1 240 5 240 5 3000 350 6 3000 350 6 3001 350 6 0 0 350 7 3437 140 2 3204 140 2 3366 140 2 0 0 140 3 0091 50 5 0090 50 5 0092 50 5 0168 50 4 5000 440 4 2000 445 1 2000 445 1 BO 50 6 BO 50 6 BO 50 6 117 Parameters and Connectors Parameter C613 Task cut curve L614 Off delay cut L615 L616 S MUL3 X1 S MUL3 X2 L617 L619 S SORT 1 S SORT 3 L620 S ON StateMach L621 S CU ready SM L622 S Web ready SM L623 S Fault SM L624 CTW1 CU OFF L625 CTW1 CU ON L626 S CU run SM L627 S Web run SM L628 S Calibrated SM L629 S in Startpos SM L630 SCTW1 OFF SM L631 SCTW1 Refer SM L632 SCTW1 Startp SM L633 SCTW1 Cut SM L634 State Cut MS1 L635 State Cut MR 118 Description Status of the processing of the cutting curve 0 The cutting curve is not processed no supplementary speed setpoint 1 Cutting curve processing is active The cutting curve is processed as standard as long as the knife is with
73. as d219 Terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset d215 Terminal voltage H215 5V H216 Source for quantity X which is output at analog output 1 The voltage at terminal 97 is obtained as V_terminal97 5 V X H224 H225 Source for the control signal to set the analog output 1 to 0 0 Default The output is not set to 0 0 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Type Chart Value Chart Value Chart Value Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart R 220 3 3438 200 1 100000 0 200 2 0 0 200 2 0172 l 220 2 3118 l 200 3 3119 l 200 3 3103 l 200 3 1 0 R 90 4 0 0 R 90 4 25 ms SD 90 5 0 l 90 6 R 90 7 1 0 90 3 0 0 90 4 25 ms 90 5 90 6 90 7 3412 95 1 95 1 79 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H222 AO1 Time Constant d223 Analog Output 1 H224 AO1 Offset H225 AO1 Scale Factor H226 S Analog Output 2 H227 S Disable AO2 H228 AO2 Time Constant d229 Analog Output 2 H230 AO2 Offset H231 AO2 Scale Factor H232 S Norm Fixed Pos H233 H236 Fixed pos 1
74. as reference values If the setpoint transfer takes several processing cycles the acceleration is also determined from the speed change Positioning starts as soon as the setting function becomes inactive 0 Proportional gain for the position controller of the positioning function Integral action time for the position controller of the positioning function Source for the actual position for the positioning function Source to enable the position controller when positioning Source to delete the integral component of the position controller when positioning Source to hold the integral component of the position controller when positioning Smoothing time constant for the knife drive speed setpoint Source of the setpoint of the position controller for the positioning Source of the maximum speed for the positioning Limit value for the position controller output when positioning this corresponds to the maximum normalized knife speed Normalization factor to convert the acceleration setpoint in 1 s into the normalized torque input for the drive converter torque setpoint The effective moment of inertia Ji and the reference torque Mret must be taken into account PosRG Acc_Norm 1000 27 Jiot Mret Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Char
75. be observed that the parameters are selected by entering the number e g at the operator control panel of the drive converter However for the display the most significant digit is replaced by a letter which is intended to symbolize as to whether it involves a quantity which can be changed or not changed 1956 is entered in order to select technology parameter H956 Table 1 2 Parameter number specification Value Significance Parameter display example range can be changed cannot be changed 0 999 Lower parameter range of the drive P123 r123 converter 1000 1999 Lower parameter range of the T400 H123 d123 2000 2999 Upper parameter range of the drive U123 n123 converter 3000 3999 Upper parameter range of the T400 L123 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Overview 1 3 2 BICO parameters Contrary to value parameters the BICO parameters define the interconnections This means parameters specify a fixed value at an input whereby BICO parameters select the signal source which is connected using the input This signal source must be defined in the form of a connector The BICO parameter appears as parameter in the symbol of a BICO input Fig 1 3 The source and destination of a BICO interconnection must have the same data type Thus digital quantities BOOL can for example not be connected with floating point inputs Thus for each data type used differ
76. constant for analog input 3 Actual measured value at analog input 3 AI3 This analog input is sensed in time sector T4 The measured value is obtained as d279 Terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset d279 Terminal voltage H275 5V H276 Scaling factor SF for analog input 4 setting refer to d283 Offset value for analog input 4 setting refer to d283 Smoothing time constant for analog input 4 Actual measured value at analog input 4 Ald This analog input is sensed in time sector T4 The measured value is obtained as d283 Terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset d283 Terminal voltage H280 5 V H281 Scaling factor SF for analog input 5 setting refer to d287 Offset value for analog input 5 setting refer to d287 Smoothing time constant for analog input 5 Actual measured value at analog input 5 Al5 This analog input is sensed in time sector T4 The measured value is obtained as d287 Terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset d287 Terminal voltage H284 5 V H285 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value
77. d968 H950ff Status of the fault error sources selected using parameters H950 H965 Delays when signaling faults and alarms after the module has been powered up The fault bits are ignored during this time Mask to suppress system fault bits Assignment Dit bit15 Bit3 Task administration Bit5 Hardware fault Bit6 Communications error Bit 10 User error Status of the receive channel from the basic drive 1 Receive channel was correctly initialized Status of the send channel to the basic drive 1 Send channel was correctly initialized Status of the process data receive from the basic drive 1 No data were received for longer than 100 ms Data Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart 421 1 421 2 421 2 421 2 421 4 421 5 421 5 421 5 530 1 2 16 33E2 W 530 4 16 F FFF w 530 4 W 530 4 10s SD 530 4 16 F FFF w 510 2 BO 600 4 BO 600 4 BO 600 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter d974 CU in Operation H975 S Disable Resynch H976 Resynchr Delay H977 T Resynchr T400 H978 Fan off Delay H980 TechBoardParaType H981 COMBOARD ParaType H982 T400 Baseboard H984 Ke
78. ee ee ee ekke 40 4 4 2 Systems with linear Knife MOTION ee RA RA ee eke ee 43 4 4 3 Absolute knife position ee AA RA AA RA ee ee ee ee eke ee 44 4 4 4 Typical system Configurations iese RA AA RA ee ee ee ee ekke ee 45 4 5 Closed loop control structure ese ed RA AR AA ee ke ee eke 46 4 5 1 Types of characteristiCS iese RA ee de ee Re ee ee ee ee eke ee 47 4 6 Systems with rotary AXiS ccc cece Re ed Re ee dee dd ee ek ee ee ee ee eke 48 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 1 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Contents 4 6 1 Drum type shears basic settings iii ee RR RR ee ee ee ee 48 4 6 1 1 Pass mark synchronizatiON iii ee Re Re ee 49 4 6 1 2 Suppressing pass marKS iis RA ee ee ed ed ee 51 4 6 1 3 Offset correction seinnaa N kase EER ER EL Ee kas os 52 4 6 1 4 Offset synchronization of the knife position 53 4 6 2 DOUDIe SAW iss ss be EED a ESE ER REG Re GE EE bbe ek Ee Rage EER eke Ee Ee os 54 MAER EE 56 4 7 1 Flying KA E ss sees iese ESE ER ER Re GE Gee ER RR ER GN GE bbe ek EL Rage EER ek EL EN Ee oe 56 AE N Selde eed AR OR EE AE EE 58 4 7 1 2 Lowering and raising the knife sees Re 58 4 7 1 3 Parameterizable STATE logic iese ees see ke ee ee ed ee 59 4 7 1 4 Changeover between format operation and positiONING ee 61 4 7 1 5 Positioning setpoint generator POSRG ee ee 62 4 7 1 6 Clamping the knife to the material RA 63 4 7 1 7 Referencing to a
79. for a free real to integer converter Source for a reserve variable which is normalized with Xref_normalization 16 floating point fixed values 5 fixed values word type 16 bit When parameterizing using OP 1S word parameters are entered bit by bit Word parameters can be connected to integer destinations 8 fixed values integer type 16 bit When parameterizing using OP1S integer parameters are treated as signed integer number Integer parameters can be connected to word destinations 6 fixed values double integer type 32 bit When parameterizing using OP1S integer parameters are treated as signed integer number Sources for 2 floating point values which are to be distributed to several locations The function can also be used to delay the transfer of a value as it is processed in the slowest time sector time delay achieved approx 200 ms 500 ms Sources for 2 digital values which should be distributed at several locations The function can also be used to delay the transfer of a value as it is processed in the slowest time sector possible time delay approx 200 ms 500 ms 2 sources for the inputs of the 5 free AND block 2 sources for the inputs of the 6 free AND block Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 16 0017 l 810 3 16 1008 l 810 4 262
80. for the inputs of a free integer divider X1 X2 Source for the inputs of a free integer multiplier Source for a free word to double word converter Source for the input quantity of the freely available integrator Upper limit value of the freely available integrator Lower limit value of the freely available integrator Source for the setting value of the freely available integrator Integration time constant of the freely available integrator Source for the setting signal of the freely available integrator 2 sources for the inputs of the 3 free changeover switch The output is selected using L826 Source for the signal to select the input at changeover switch 3 0 Source L824 1 Source L825 2 sources for the inputs of the 4 free changeover switch The output is selected with L829 Source for the signal to select the input at changeover switch 4 0 Source L827 1 Source L828 Sources of the 1 AND OR logic in Chart 425 B1830 is the output Sources of the 2 AND OR logic in Chart 425 B1833 is the output Sources of the 3 AND OR logic in Chart 425 B0836 is the output Source for the cutting error for statistical evaluation Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Cha
81. function of the setpoint speed reference speed y Re establish the original settings before the test y End of the speed controller setting basic drive Setting the position controller Y Power up the system reference move to the starting position Monitor the setpoint and actual value using an oscilloscope H220 3412 output the speed actual value knife as first analog value factory setting H226 3779 output the speed setpoint as 2nd analog value Start with a low P gain H146 0 1 P gain of the position control y H140 0 1 generate the supplementary setpoint for the position controller larger steps for linear systems y H140 0 withdraw the suppl setp for pos contr H146 modify the P gain Step response OK yes y Re establish the original settings before the test y C End of the position controller setting N Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 149 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning g Enter the format setpoint Source format setpoint Floating point value 16bit word 32bit word Fixed value y y y y H614 source double word H621 fixed value format H612 normalization digit H619 2004 H619 2002 H617 source float H614 source word H619 2001 H615 normalization digit H619 2003 gt Adapt
82. hysteresis free block Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value encoder evaluation of a SSI or EnDat encoder connected to the T400 As long as the control signal is 0 then none of the functions shown in Chart 150 are processed Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value generator evaluation of aTR encoder connected at the T400 As long as the control signal is 0 then none of the functions shown in Chart 165 are processed Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value generator evaluation of an encoder connected to the basic drive As long as the control signal is 0 then non of the functions shown in Chart 160 are processed Source of the control signal to enable processing of the cutting curve As long as the control signal is 0 the cutting curve is not processed Source for a double word word converter free block Sources for the summands of the 1 integer adder Sources for the inputs of the 1 integer subtractor Status of the evaluation of an abs value encoder at the T400 SSI or EnDat 0 No processing 1 Processing software is active Status of the evaluation of a TR encoder at T400 0 No processing 1 Processing software is active Status of the evaluation of the absolute value encoder from the basic drive 0 No processing 1 Processing software is active Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data
83. limit values H627 max format H628 min format y with linear axis system v with rotary axis AA H173 0 format is not accepted for the knife synchronizing pulse H173 0413 format accepted for the knife synchronizing pulse v AA H172 source for an optional condition to accept the format for the next step e g when the start of the material has been detected It is not permissible to accept the format during the cut The signal edge is evaluated d End of input format setpoint Behavior at the first step in the automatic mode const cutting Present Light barrier start of the material knife position linear axis and center of the knife rotary axis Fig 4 7 H122 Clearance between the material detection and quiescent Length of the Format lengths gt lt Immediately after the Not present A L213 1 simulate material present start of cutting operation Start of the first cut 1st section Different format length H110 crop length Set the crop cut enable to 1 in the shears control word 1 After material feed by e g wait for the 1st pass mark logitudinal format Set the initial value of the material position to zero L687 0577 delay no cutting mode L198 0687 change over the setting value of the material position with a delay from 0 t
84. linear axis ii RR Re 63 EN ER AO eee a AE EEN 64 OP re AE EE DR N 69 5 1 AbbreviatiOnS issie seed ee AA de ee ee AA AR Re eee ee ee ae 69 2 2 FEMINO IVE BAAR AAR AAR ED DE ND NN 69 2 8ubliteratuie RAAR RAAR DE N N 70 MA Me EE EE EE AE RE AR IR RR RE N 70 6 Parameters and ConnecCtOrS i iese AR RE RR EER AEER A AR RR RR EER Ge ER RARR RR KERE ERG ee RARR RR RR EERS a ee 71 6 1 Impottanit info atiEr is EERS ED EE RSE EA DER KEES E EDE DADE DERE DEERE DAD ERGER GEREG DE DAE APE Eg de 71 6 2 Parameters EA Ie EER Ge ee Re De GR Ee Ee ee ee Ke EE Re ee ee eed 72 6 3 GonNectOIS n EE EE ae ER Ee RE ee ee RE GR ED ee Re Re ee ee ee Ee ca 127 7 Typical COMMISSIONING see EER RR ERK EER GEE ee RRRK KERE ERGER AAR RR RR EER E ae e RARR R RR nnmnnn 144 7 1 General Procedure iiia wai a ee N GR A 144 7 2 Parameterizing the basic drive RA ee dd ee ee de 156 1 8 Vroubl shoound EE DE DEER DE GE N AE N AA 157 1 4 Example of ut tolength EER ANN DA ER DE n 158 LAA System specifications EE EE EE OE EE RE ee Ee EE EE ER Re RE ER ee ea 159 14 2 Eormat Setpoint EO DE DE EE EA ER NE ER GAS AE 160 7 4 3 Incremental encoders niiae a a AE ek N 160 7 4 4 Jogging and referencing ee ee de ee 160 7 4 5 Controlling the cut sequence ee Re ee ke ee ed ee ee 161 1 4 6 Return POSITIONING EL RE EE DEE De OE ESSEN ya aula RE 162 7 4 7 T400 operation without external automation system ees dd 163 TASB UDIAGMOSICS ESE DERE EER E
85. lt LV4 0 34 indicates that 34 of the measured values lie between StatisticLimit3 inclusive and StatisticLimit4 exclusive Number of measured values determined via the error statistics Value 100 Type Chart 520 6 Defines whether the cutting error statistic should use signed measured values or Value 1 their absolute value Type BO 0 Sign is taken into account Chart 520 7 1 The absolute measured value is used Results of the cutting error statistics referred to the number of measured values Type R Portion lt Limit1 Component of cuts more precise than the limit in L841 Chart 520 8 Portion LV1 LV2 Portion LV2 LV3 Portion gt Limit8 Comp between limit values in L841 and L842 Comp between limit values in L842 and L843 Component of cuts less accurate than the limit in L848 Mask to select the inputs which reset the 3 parameterizable block The low word of Type W the mask selects the non inverted and the high word the inverted inputs refer to Chart 420 3 L869 The selected inputs or inverted inputs are ORed If the result of this OR logic operation is 1 then outputs Q 0 ON 1 The output Q changes from 1 to 0 and a pulse is output at QEN Sources for the digital input signals of the 3 parameterizable logic Type Chart 420 1 Mask for 4 setting functions of the 3 parameterizable logic refer to Chart 400 The Type W inputs which are ANDed with one another
86. of the rising edge of the coarse pulse Source for 2 conditions for the storing of H335 AND gate Source for the first value which should be store in the permanent memory of the T400 Factory setting position of the rising edge of the coarse pulse Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 610 2 2302 610 4 1 0 610 6 610 7 2303 610 4 1 0 610 6 610 7 2305 610 4 1 0 610 6 610 7 2306 610 4 1 0 610 6 610 7 2315 610 4 2316 610 4 1 0 610 6 610 7 3414 170 6 170 6 3414 170 6 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter H339 H340 S EnStoreVal_2A S EnStoreVal 2B H356 S Status word 1 CU d357 Status word 1 CU H358 S Status word 2 CU d359 Status word 2 CU H360 H362 S En Synchr Ref1 S En Synchr Ref3 H363 H364 S Enable Mark_1 S Enable Mark_2 H366 Window Passmark H367 H368 S RefPos modulo S Format modulo H369 S XrefCorrection H370 S ReqManualCut H371 S EnablManualCut H372 S start of cut H373 S end of cut H374 S RefCorrPulse
87. output ON If Type the status changes a pulse is generated at the outputs QE ON 0 1 and QEN Chart ON 1 0 for the duration of a processing cycle Sources for the digital input signals of the on parameterizable logic Type Chart Masks for 4 setting functions of the ond parameterizable logic refer to Chart 400 Type The inputs which are ANDed are selected with the bits of a mask which are set to Chart 1 The low word of the mask selects the non inverted the high word the inverted inputs Example Logic2_MS1 16 300F 0011 0000 0000 1111b AND logic operation 1 setting condition IG e l5e 14 e I3 e12 e I1 Masks for 3 reset functions of the 2 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to L271 Type and Chart 400 Chart Mask to select the inputs which reset the on parameterizable block The low word of Type the mask selects the non inverted and the high word the inverted inputs refer to Chart L271 The selected inputs or inverted inputs are ORed If the result of the OR logic operation is 1 then the outputs Q 0 ON 1 The output Q then changes from 1 to 0 and a pulse is output at QEN Status output of the ong parameterizable logic The status is inverse to output QN If Type the status changes a pulse is generated at the outputs QE ON 0 1 and QEN Chart ON 1 0 for the duration of a processing cycle Source f
88. position Wait position AX Material position Format t Fig 4 3 Circumferential velocity and knife position for format gt gt Fsymech principle Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description The symmetry of the characteristics is specified by the quantity AZ refer to Fig 4 2 For AZ 0 5 the transition point lies between AX and AY In this particular case the velocity characteristic is symmetrical to AZ As AZ decreases the transition point shifts increasingly towards the AX direction At AZ 0 the transition point coincides with AX Theoretically the knife velocity must make a step function Thus the torque stressing of the drive motor can be influenced using AZ Symmetrical characteristics result in lower torque stressing non symmetrical characteristics can be used for lower torques when entering the cutting range which allows the cutting accuracy to be influenced 4 4 2 Systems with linear knife motion Significance of Fsymech The motion sequence for linear knife systems is sub divided into the following sections 1 Synchronization 2 Synchronous range with cut 3 Braking 4 Return to the initial position start position by reversing the drive direction of rotation for the knife position From starting from the quiescent position up to the end of the synchronous range the characteristics of the linear and rotating systems coincide Thus bo
89. position from standstill are shown in the following diagram In this particular example the limit values for speed and acceleration are reached which is often not the case for short positioning operations mm mm GER Reference position X Reference speed v aa DAT Rounding off H478 DA2 Final rounding off H479 Reterence acceleration a Fig 4 17 Setpoint characteristics for a positioning operation from standstill Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 Function description 4 7 1 6 Clamping the knife to the material The material can also be clamped to the material when running in synchronism using a clamping device In order to avoid high cantilever forces acting on the knife the drive torque can be limited during this particular phase The clamping device is always controlled when the knife is in the cutting mode but not in the upper quiescent state A free AND block is used and its output is connected to a digital output of the T400 Terminal function Clamping function Knife_not_at the top Cutting operation Table 4 28 Parameter for the clamp knife function Knife at the top L700 0254 Digital input 4 is inversely used Chart 110 L701 0576 Cutting operation active Chart 320 Clamp knife output at H274 0700 Output of the free AND output Chart 100 425 terminal 49 Enable terminal 49 H268 Fixed value 1 Output L584 07
90. ramp function generator PosRG The position controller which is disabled is de activated which means that when changing over the integral components do not cause setpoint steps jumps In the format mode the positioning ramp function generator receives the actual speed and position values as actual values This means that changeover to the positioning mode can be realized jerk free there are no steps in the speed and torque setpoint A prerequisite is that the positioning ramp generator is operated with the same position and speed normalization as the knife position sensing H482 H483 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 61 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Fig 4 16 Format mode positioning ON Q QE A GEN Y Chart 410 Format generator EE ER GEE ER EE EE GE GR EE EE Setpoints for the drive converter Enable Position controller Chart 200 Chart 210 Changing over the closed loop control structure 4 7 1 5 Positioning setpoint generator PosRG 62 The positioning setpoint generator Chart 230 supplies normalized setpoints for the position speed and the torque taking into account the maximum speed H480 maximum acceleration H481 rounding off H478 final rounding off H479 initial values for speed H485 and acceleration The speed setpoint is used to pre control the position controller The setpoint characteristics to approach a new
91. range L247 0218 Range1 overflow Chart 350 BERGER Upper limit to fixed value 1 L215 3650 Table 4 32 Selection masks for the raise saw function refer to Table 4 30 Tho Logical equation _Wawtvane Param vale MS1 0000 0010 0100 0000b 16 0240 MR1 0100 0010 0000 0000b 16 4200 MR 0000 0000 0000 0101b 16 0005 Masks which are not MS3 MS4 MR2 MR3 0 used Table 4 33 Input assignment for the lower saw function 2nd STATE block in Chart 415 input Function Param vaie Tne torowing used 14 Saw rear cutting range L266 0218 Range1_overflow Chart 350 Upper limit to fixed value1 L215 3650 Saw in the accelerating L267 0454 In the format range Chart 330 range Manual operation UP L269 0000 Not assigned in the factory setting is Manual operation AB L270 0000 Not assigned in the factory setting Table 4 34 Selection masks for the lower saw function refer to Table 4 30 I2 5 MS1 0000 0000 0001 0010b 16 0012 L271 16 0012 J12 8 o I7 MS2 0100 0010 1000 0000b 16 4280 L272 16 4280 12 I8 MR1 1000 0010 0000 0000b 16 8200 L275 1648200 11 v13 MR 0000 0000 0000 0101b 16 0005 L278 16 0005 W Masks which are not MS2 MS3 MS4 MR1 MR2 MR3 0 how 4 used Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 67 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 35 Parameters to changeover the target position when positioning
92. set to 0 in operation inhibit The associated function chart is number 95 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 21 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces T400 D D 56 terminal T it 10nF Fig 3 5 Circuit of the analog output The outputs can be scaled For the factory setting for 1 0 5 V is output The output voltage U is obtained as follows U value offset scaling factor 5 V Table 3 3 Terminal assignment analog input T400 module Terminals Sampling Filter time Source Connector Value time constant inhibit smooth Table 3 4 Terminal assignment analog inputs T400 module Terminal Select source Output value Source for Scaling Filter time inhibit factor constant 97 99 H220 d223 H221 H161 H160 H222 98 99 H226 d229 H227 H163 H162 H228 22 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 1 3 Pulse encoders Knife position Material web position Measured value resolution Example Encoder power supply Screening Pulse encoders with two tracks offset by 90 with zero pulse are required If the pulse encoder for the knife position is connected to the basic drive CU then its track signals are transferred from the CU to the T400 via the common backplane bus Fig 2 1 In this particular case other encoder typ
93. setpoint from Jogging1 or Referencing Chart 260 5 L535 Source to select the knife velocity refer to Chart 260 signal values Value 0595 S Sel SpeedStart 0 Speed setpoint in accordance with L534 Type 1 Speed setpoint for the Approach starting position mode Chart 260 6 L536 Source for the reference speed setpoint speed in cutting operation Value 3021 S Speed Cut Type Chart 260 5 L537 Source for the reference speed setpoint speed in the local mode Value 3533 S Speed_Local Type Chart 260 5 L538 Source for the reference speed setpoint speed when approaching the starting Value 3144 S SpeedPosCtrl position Type Chart 260 5 L539 Smoothing time constant for the reference setpoint speed Value 1 2 ms Tfilt n_setp Type SD Chart 260 7 L540 Ramp steps of a simple ramp function In the factory setting the duration of the Value 5 StepsRampLocal ramping is 5 task cycle time T3 5 12 8 ms 64 ms Type Chart 260 7 L541 Source of the control signal to inhibit the speed output The speed setpoint can be Value 0000 S Disable Spdsetp set to zero using the signal Type Chart 260 7 L542 Speed setpoint normalized when referencing For applications with linear axis enter Value 0 05 Spd_Referencing negative values in order to bring the knife in the direction of the quiescent position Type R Chart 260 2 L543 L544 Source for the 2 logical inverter Type S Not3 S Not4 Chart 430 6 L545 Source of the friction torque to generate the tor
94. small steps The actual material position deviates from the reference position relevant for the control d437 during this correction phase However this deviation is reduced by the value of H444 at each processing until both of the values are identical Material position in mm Inhibiting the offset correction Measured cut length This value is only valid when the material position is synchronized with the zero pulse of the knife encoder Source to activate the status W ait for first pass mark Source to de active the status Wait for first pass mark Source for the knife position actual value for the range monitoring of the knife position The purpose of this monitoring function is to check whether the knife is in the cutting or in the format range Source for the start of the format range for the knife range monitoring Source for the end of the format range for the knife range monitoring Range of the actual knife position 0 In the format range 1 In the synchronous range Source of the signal to enable simulation operation for the reference position sensing NOTE Track A B and zero pulse of the encoder input are ignored if simulation is active Source for the simulated reference speed Normalization 1 0 reference speed Factory setting Connected to analog input 2 Al2 Source for the speed signal for standstill identification Speed actual value below which knife standstill is signaled Speed hysteresis t
95. supplement mean that when Min lower limit Max upper limit designation this parameter is changed it only becomes effective after the power supply Unit Unit Initialization voltage has been powered up again eons parameter Chart Number Sector Oxxx Cxyz Parameter description for a visualization parameter this cannot be set Type Parameter The d or c symbolize the offset values Unit Units designation 1000 d or 3000 c This must be taken into account when selecting Chart Number Sector the parameters with OP1 S Table 6 37 Data types and range when parameterizing using the OP1S Type Type Significance Example Value range En EE at OP1S BOOL Logical quantity sid quantity KIES Integer number signed 12345 32768 32767 WwW WORD Integer number unsigned hexadecimal and digital 2F03Hex 16 0000 16 FFFF displayed at OP 1 S hexadecimal representation in the documentation start with 16 0010111109000011 0 65535 DI DINT Double integer number 32 bit signed 123456789 2147483647 REAL Floating point number The entry made with OP 1 S 123456 789 2147483 647 is limited to 6 positions before and after whereby the range is limited 199999 999 SDTIME Time in ms or s 200 000 ms 0 2147483 647 ms Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 71 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Parameters and Connectors 6 2 Parameters Parameter HOOO Language select Initializa
96. th part of a revolution Required cutting accuracy 0 5mm Wheel diameter 200 mm Wheel circumference 628 mm Edges per revolution 10 628 0 5 12566 Min pulse number of the encoder 12566 4 3142 Selected encoder pulse number 4096 pulses revolution A 15 V max 100 mA is available as encoder power supply from the T400 module The pulse encoder cable and the cables for the synchronizing pulses must be screened The cable screen must be connected with ground at both ends possibly using clamps and through a low impedance connection This is especially important if these signals are received from proximity or switching contacts The electrical input circuit of the encoder is shown in Fig 3 6 If an HTL encoder is connected at encoder 2 the inverting inputs are switched to ground Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 23 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces The speed sensing is adapted at the encoder using the parameters listed in the following tables 470pF da Toe P 22K terminal e Ps e oe OnE Treshold and a hysteresis can be T400 TT 150 gt set S2 terminal 5k6 IT 4 J T400 S2 x ne terminal 33k bs e e 1 pp 22k 10k 20 470pF T Pulse encoder 1 Pulse encoder 2 tracks A B zero tracks A B zero
97. the 10 as process data from COMBOARD ype Chart Mask to select the bits of the shears control word 1 which the automation uses inthe Value Manual mode refer to H518 Type Chart Mask to select the bits of the shears control word 1 which the automation uses inthe Value Automatic mode refer to H518 Type Chart Toggles between Automatic and Manual When changing over to Manual for special Value activities the functional scope may be restricted e g for commissioning start up Type Chart Changes over to the simulation mode For the simulation mode another source is Value selected for the shears control word 1 e g fixed values This means that for Type example modes can be tested without the automation system Chart Sources for the bits of shears control word 2 Assignment refer to d544 Value 280 Type Chart Shears control word 1 essentially specifying the mode Type Bito Not used Chart Biti Continuous cut Bit2 Sample cut Bit3 Single cut Bit4 Format setpoint valid Bit5 Light barrier start of the material web for slow time sectors Bit6 Calibration mode Bit7 Not used Bit8 Approach the starting position Bit9 Not used Bit10 Enable cut program Biti1 Crop cut Biti2 End cut Biti3 Not used Biti4 Approach knife change position Biti5 Option special sample Source for the simulation value for shears control word 1 Value Type Chart Shears control word 1 from the automation Assignment refer to d536
98. the knife position is set to 0 using the zero pulse of the knife encoder Thus contrary to linear systems there is an angular overflow refer to Fig Fig 4 3 For AX the knife is no longer in contact with the material at AY it again comes into contact with the material Refer to Fig 4 1 and Table 4 9 for additional definitions Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Fig 4 1 Angular definition for rotating cutting devices drum type shears Table 4 9 Angular definitions for rotating shears H101 Angle End of the cutting range the knife is no longer in contact with the material H102 Angle The knife enters the cutting range H103 Percentage position of the transition point in the motion sequence this is not an angle lor Format range the knife velocity is not the same as the material velocity Fas Syneronous range or cuting range krite velocity matralveliy Feu Siar ofthe cutingoueimput CS Cou leeg tests seed SSS Fon dese lese teg pske nes Significance of the If the knife rotates with a constant speed whereby the circumferential mechanical velocity of the knife r is the same as the material velocity then synchronous format sheets are cut with length 2zr This size quantity is known as the Fsymech Fsymech mechanical synchronous format in the following text The associated speed is the synchronous speed If shorter material fo
99. the motor frequency Rounding off the speed when positioning for the end range up to standstill refer to DA2 in Fig 4 17 The value represents the acceleration change and is obtained as the 2 derivative of the motor frequency Maximum mechanical motor frequency for positioning If speed normalization is used 1 0 then the following must be valid PosRG_Vmax max motor frequency Hz speed normalization Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart BO 330 3 3413 330 5 2 0 330 6 1 0 330 7 BO 330 7 0420 135 5 0000 135 5 0434 135 5 0000 135 5 2000 135 5 2586 135 5 2000 135 5 3109 330 5 230 7 230 7 3161 230 1 3000 230 1 0000 230 1 500 0 230 4 100 0 230 4 1 0 230 7 Parameter H481 PosRG_Amax H482 S PosRG_Xnorm H483 S PosRG_Vnorm H484 S PosRG Startpos H485 S PosRG VStart H486 S PosRG_set H487 KP PosRG H488 Tn PosRG H489 S PosRG_actPos H490 S PosRG_PI enabl
100. to Length S ADDI1 X1 L606 2000 K 70 2 S ADDI1 X2 L607 2000 K 70 2 S SUBI1 X1 L608 2000 S SUBI1 X2 L609 2000 K 70 2 S DIVIT X1 812 2001 K 70 2 S DIVIT X2 L813 2001 S MULI1 X1 L814 2001 K 70 2 S MULI1 X2 L815 2001 L786 3000 KR 70 2 L787 3000 KR 70 2 L788 3000 KR 70 2 L789 3000 KR 70 2 L790 3000 KR 70 2 L791 3000 KR 70 2 S ADD3 X1 L808 3000 KR 70 2 S ADD3 X2 L809 3000 KR 70 2 L792 3000 KR 70 2 L793 3000 KR 70 2 L794 3000 KR 70 2 L795 3000 KR 70 2 S MUL1 X1 L796 3001 KR 70 2 S MUL1 X2 L797 3001 KR 70 2 S MUL1 X3 L798 3001 KR 70 2 SMUL X1 L799 3001 KR 70 2 S MUL2 X2 L800 3001 KR 70 2 S MUL2 X3 L801 3001 KR 70 2 SMUL3 X1 SMUL3 X2 L616 3001 S DIV1 X1 L802 3001 KR 70 2 S DIV1 X2 L803 3001 S DIV2 X1 L804 3001 S DIV2 X2 L805 3001 He N NE ee Free function blocks V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Arithmetics 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length KP Adaption 10 points Parameter number L470 L489 even X values odd Y values KP_Y1 1 0 L471 S KP_Polygon L496 3164 KR 200 8 Cut Polygon Speed f Position 20 points Parameter number L390 L429 even X values odd Y values S CutPolygon L497 3413 KR 120 7 S NX_CutPolygon L325 3001 KR 70 2 n_cut_X20 360 0
101. to offset the upper range limit of the 3 range monitoring Example Offset quantity can be the material velocity The upper range limit is then offset dependent on the velocity Source of the position actual value which is to be evaluated with the 3 range monitoring Factory setting Monitoring the knife position for linear systems Source to offset the lower range limit of the 3 range monitoring Factor to evaluate the offset quantity L220 For positive values of L223 the upper range limit is reduced with increasing offset size Upper range limit if the offset is not effective Factor to evaluate the offset quantity L222 For positive values of L225 the lower range limit is reduced with increasing offset quantity Lower range limit for an offset which is not effective Status of the 3 range monitoring 1 Monitored quantity has exceeded the upper range limit Status of the 3 range monitoring 1 Monitored quantity has exceeded the lower range limit Source for the upper range limit of the 2 range monitoring The material position is evaluated as standard Source for the position actual value of the 2 range monitoring Source for the lower range limit of the 2 range monitoring Display Monitored position has exceeded the upper range limit of the ond range monitoring Display Monitored position has exceeded the lower range limit of the 2 range monitoring Status of the 3 range monitoring 1 Monitor
102. with ramp generator POSRG Sheet cutter Cut to Length freeze integral component TD_Inertia 500 ms L559 S Dif_Inertia L547 5495 KR 460 8 S Vref_OszilTorque L556 3435 KR 130 6 TD_Acceleration S n_Acceleration L553 3021 KR 250 6 S FactorT_accel L546 3495 KR 460 8 S CutTorque L550 3824 KR 670 7 S TorqCutLight L552 0250 B 110 8 Start cut torque 60 7 S CutTorqPos L551 3413 KR 120 7 End cut torque 60 7 Shear control Torque calculation KR3559 Oscill Torque d027 S Torque_2 Oscill torque KR3027 L589 3027 KR3027 gt KR 240 4 S Torque_1 L588 3026 KR 240 4 S Torque_3 TorgAcceleration AE d026 KR 240 4 Cutting torque d028 KR3028 Cutting torque TorqueCut_Enable c549 B0549 Torque cut enable TorqueReduced 0 1 L587 Comparator TorqueMax_Local 0 4 L580 pa eN OM Local 290 8 S ReducedTorque L584 0000 S TorqueFriction L545 3029 KR 460 8 S ToruqeCutRegion L557 0576 max_Torque Cut 1 5 L578 min_Torque Cut 1 5 L579 Torque Setp d025 KR3025 Setpoint torque TorqueSetp gt max c548 Torque setpoint B0548 gt max torque act max Torque c581 Actual value KR3581 maximum torque act min Torque c582 Actual value KR3582 minimum torque ae eN ne oT 7 V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S SQRT_1 L617
103. 00 B 70 2 B0898 OnDelay2_Q B 70 2 SingleShot_2 Quality T_OffDelay1 T_SingleShot_3 ae 100ms 0 ms ilter L731 L897 S Bandstop_inp S OffDelay1 S SingleShot 3 L742 3000 L730 0000 L896 0000 KR 70 2 B 70 2 B 70 2 S StopFrequency L743 3002 T_OffDelay2 KR 70 2 100ms L759 S OffDelay2 L758 0000 B 70 2 Le N NEE ENG ENE NEG ENE GEE EEN EE EEN es ES Free function blocks FPlan SPS450evsd Function diagram Time dependent functions Sheet cutter Cut to Length S FreeWord L760 2061 FreeWord_0 K 790 3 FreeWord_1 FreeWord_2 FreeWord_3 FreeWord_4 FreeWord_5 FreeWord_6 FreeWord_7 FreeWord_8 FreeWord_9 FreeWord_10 FreeWord_11 FreeWord_12 FreeWord_13 FreeWord_14 FreeWord_15 S FreeW_B2 L810 2000 FreeWord2_0 K 70 2 FreeWord2_1 FreeWord2_2 FreeWord2_3 FreeWord2_4 FreeWord2_5 FreeWord2_6 FreeWord2_7 FreeWord2_8 FreeWord2_9 FreeWord2_10 FreeWord2_11 FreeWord2_12 FreeWord2_13 FreeWord2_14 FreeWord2_15 Free function blocks S DW high L761 2000 L762 2000 K 70 2 Word_Norm 1 0 L765 S Float L764 2000 Word Float L766 000 Float_N2 K 70 2 KR 70 2 L767 1 0 Float_Norm L605 5000 KK 70 2 S W_DW1 high L816 2000 K 70 2 S W_DW1 low L817 2000 K 70 2 L646 2000 K 70 2 L647 3000 L811 3000 KR 70 2 KK5811 a ve N EN ea ee Type conversion FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut
104. 00 Output of the free AND output Chart 425 240 Value for the reduced torque L587 Fixed value 10 of the reference torque 4 7 1 7 Referencing to a linear axis When using an incremental encoder for the knife position after the system has been powered up initially the absolute knife position is not known Thus a reference approach at a low velocity is required or absolute value encoders must be used for position sensing For rotary axes the direction of movement when referencing is irrelevant However for linear systems the knife may only move within the range between the two limit switches For this reason the closed loop cut to lengths includes an automatic reversing function when the limit switch is reached in the referencing mode Chart 260 In this case the limit switches must be connected with the reversing logic with L530 and L531 The referencing velocity and direction are set using L542 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 63 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 7 2 Flying saw 64 For the flying saw using the knife feed the knife is synchronized to the material velocity and the material cut as a comparison For flying knife the knife is moved up down using for example an independent hydraulic system Saw blade at the end of the cutting range Braking range V_knife 70 V_material Cutting range Saw blade at the start of the c
105. 02 3000 KR 70 2 S Factor2Friction S V Frietion YV Friction S Factor1 Friction S NV_Friction Inertia_X20 Setlnertia Type Inertia LM1 Inertia LM2 Inertia 360 0 0 1 16 0000 16 0000 L468 L513 L514 L515 L516 InertiaPolyOut c493 ee Y inertia polygon S Inertia L512 3001 KR 70 2 S Factor Inertia S V_Inertia YV Inertia KR 70 2 KR 70 2 S Offset Inertia S NV_Inertia L194 5007 1504 3000 KR 70 2 KR 70 2 Friction d029 KR3029 gt Inertia c495 aS ee 8 ees Polygons V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Friction and inertia 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Comboard Faults S CB Fault 1 CB FaultDelay 1000 ms H690 0920 H693 B 660 4 CB Fault S CB Fault 2 d694 H691 0919 B 660 4 S CB Fault 3 H692 0924 B 660 7 Inverter faults S CU Fault 1 CU FaultDelay 200 ms H695 0984 apes B 600 5 _ eo CU Fault S CU Fault 2 d699 H696 0973 B 600 5 S CU Fault 3 H697 0982 B 600 5 User fault 1 S User Fault 1 H700 0000 B 70 2 S User Fault 2 H701 0000 B 70 2 S User Fault 3 H702 0000 B 70 2 S UserFaultEnabl H710 0342 User fault 2 S User Fault 4 H707 0000 B 70 2 S User Fault 5 H708 0000 B 70 2 S User Fault 6 H709 0000 B 70 2 Enable user fault monitoring UserFault1 Delay 1000 ms User Fault1 d704 B0704 User Fault 1 UserFault2Delay 1000 ms H706 User Fau
106. 03 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function charts for the standard software package Sheet Cutter Cut to Length Contents General Contents Block diagram control Block diagram shear controller General symbols Control symbols Constant Configuration setting General constants Fixed values Pulse encoder normalizations T400 Analog inputs Analog outputs Binary outputs and bidirectional VO Binary inputs Position sensing Shear drive Reference position material Displacement correction and pass mark counter Suppressing pass marks position dependent Correction of reference position Absolute value encoder on T400 and normalization Absolute value encoder CU TR encoder Calibrate shear Set reference position Chart Contents Shear control Format setpoint selection Format generator FGEN Position controller PC Format controller FC Positioning with ramp generator PosRG Torque calculation Cutting speed Speed local modes and setpoint for inverter Cut curve and overspeed Control logic Shear control word 1 SCTW1 Shear control word 2 SCTW 2 Operation mode priority Operation modes 1 Operation modes 2 Operation modes 3 Range monitoring 1 Range monitoring 2 Range monitoring 3 Enable inverter setpoints controller Enable position controller brake control logic Cam group Free function blocks Definition of the logic function block STATE Mode switching positioning format mode Parameteri
107. 0s Reference speed this must be greater than 150 RPM if required P353 d119 P353 d119 H143 d119 increase H104 V_rated Bits for control word 1 P554 3100 P554 3100 P654 3100 P555 3101 P555 3101 P655 3101 P558 3102 P558 3102 P658 3102 P564 3106 P564 3106 P664 3106 P565 3107 P565 3107 P665 3107 P568 3108 P568 3108 P668 3108 P569 3109 P569 3109 P669 3109 P575 3115 P575 3115 P675 3115 P585 3409 P585 3409 P685 3409 Remove speed setpoint limiting P452 200 P452 s 200 refer to the main P453 200 P453 200 setpoint De activate smoothing for speed setpoint and actual value P221 0 ms P221 0 ms refer to the main P223 0 ms P223 0 ms setpoint Supplementary torque PZD5 from T400 optional P262 3005 P506 3005 P502 3005 P473 0 Set torque limits to maximum P263 200 P492 200 P171 200 P264 200 P498 200 P172 200 Data transmission task cycle between T400 and drive U950 11 2 U950 11 3 Prerequisite is that the basic drive has been commissioned including all of the parameters have been set which define the motor 156 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 7 3 Troubleshooting Typical commissioning Problem Possible cause Remedy Knife drive rotates in the incorrect direction 1 Encoder tracks interchanged 2 Direction revised per software observe zero pulses
108. 1 250 4 0 1 250 4 265 7 1 5 240 6 1 5 240 6 0 4 240 4 240 7 240 7 3561 265 5 0000 240 5 3577 250 1 1 1 265 2 Parameter L587 Torque Reduced L588 L590 S Torquet_1 S Torquet_3 L591 S Compare3 L592 S Compare3 Mid L593 S Compare3 Range L594 Compare Hyst L595 S Compare 4 L596 S Compare 4 Mid L597 S Compare 4 Range L598 Compare 4 Hyst L600 S Task AENC_T400 L601 S Task TR encoder L602 S Task CU endocder L603 S Task cut curve L605 S DW_W_1 L606 L607 S ADDI1 X1 S ADDI1 X2 L608 L609 S SUBI1 X1 S SUBI1 X2 C610 Task AENC C611 Task TR encoder C612 Task CU encoder Parameters and Connectors Description Alternative torque limit value The value can become effective while cutting with the control signal selected using L584 Three sources for torque components which should be effective in the cutting mode Source for the input signal of a comparator with hysteresis free block Center of the comparator range with hysteresis free block Source for the range limit of the comparator with hysteresis free block Hysteresis of the comparator with hysteresis free block Source for the input signal of a comparator with hysteresis free block Center of the comparator range with hysteresis free block Source for the range limit of the comparator with hysteresis free block Hysteresis of the comparator with
109. 1 Request Local1 H592 dX Pass mark H594 S Hold OM local d595 OM Start Pos d596 OM KnifeChgPos H597 S EnableJog d598 OM local d599 OM local2 H600 S Enable Prio2 92 Description Source for the signal to delete the cut counter set to 0 Source for the pulses to increment the cut counter cut pulses Source for the steady state signal with the Fault significance The 1 0 edge of the signal generates a pulse refer to H584 for the duration to acknowledge the fault In the factory setting it is connected to the Fault bit of status word 1 of the basic drive 1 source for a pulse to acknowledge a fault 2 source for a pulse to acknowledge a fault In the factory setting this is connected to bit 7 of control word 1 of COMBOARD Length of an automatically generated acknowledgement pulse refer to H580 Status of the signal to acknowledge a fault message Source for the number of pass marks before the first cut Source for the number of pass marks between two cuts Source for the signal to select the pass mark number Source for the cut format to calculate the pass marks between two cuts Source for the clearance of the pass marks normalized Source of the signal to enable the operating modes The signal enables the priority logic for local and cutting operating modes One of the following modes is requested Referencing Jogging or Approach start positio
110. 1 0 corresponds to the reference speed Number of cut sheets since the power supply was powered up or the counter status was reset Setpoint of the knife speed in cutting or local operation Normalized quantity 1 0 corresponds to the reference speed Position value from the absolute value encoder in the user normalization Setpoint torque for format operation Normalized to the reference torque Torque as a result of the acceleration for format operation Normalized to the reference torque Oscillating torque in the format mode Normalized to the reference torque Cutting torque in the format mode Normalized to the reference torque Friction torque in the format mode Normalized to the reference torque Monitoring parameters R type floating point Par Source selection Factory setting assignment d040 L940 3401 Reference speed of the shears d041 1941 3050 Revolutions Fsymech d042 1942 3421 Reference speed 2 d043 L943 3440 Position for synchronizing 2 d044 L944 3498 Mset when positioning d045 L945 3192 Suppl angle from the cutting curve d046 L946 3099 Light barriers clearance cut d047 L947 3094 3099 Modulo Fsymech Monitoring parameters word type 16 bit unsigned Par Source selection Factory setting assignment d048 L948 2776 Test value 1 d049 L949 2785 Simulation shears control word d050 L950 2671 Fixed value l1 d051 L951 2672 Fixed value 12 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edi
111. 123 fact KR chart Parameter name H123 fact K chart Parameter name H234 fact B chart Excample Parameter name S Setpoint speed Parameter number Data type symbol B BOOL K 16bit KK 32bit KR floating point Explanations Technology parameter e g H231 Display parameter e g d123 Connection to a floating point source fact which can be modified with H123 Connection to a integer source fact which can be modified with H123 Connection to a boolean source fact which can be modified with H123 factory setting H123 3412 KR 120 7 chart Sector for factory setting Logic and arithmetics Explanations OR operation Inputs and outputs may be of binary or vector data type AND operation Inputs and outputs may be of binary or vector data type Logical inversion Multiplication Y X1 X2 Divider X1 Y X2 Y X1 X2 Absolute value Y X Negation Y X Miscellaneous Symbol Selection Selection Miscellaneous Explanations Symbol Explanations R S Flip Flop Multiplexer here 5 inputs Sampling 1 value X storage value Y store value S storage condition et NE ENE N NEER EEN NEE MEE ENE GEN EE N EE EIE EE ES General General symbols Selcetion between 2 inputs Operational amplifier Sign determination Edge detektor generates a pulse for the rizing edge of X Inkremental encoder Here tracks A B and zero pulse N R
112. 2 Clear 1 Extending the pulse which is used as cut pulse ei ee N EE GEEN EE 8 O V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Status Status shear Delay_EndOfError 10 s Fault acknowledge H583 Acknowledge d584 S AcknEndofFault H580 0343 S Acknowledge 1 H581 0000 gt B 110 4 Acknowledge Fault status S Acknowledge_2 H582 0847 factory setting B 680 4 B 470 3 Bit 0 PAIS Apr Fault Mask CB fault H951 0699 16 33E2 at least 1 bit H B 470 3 Bit 1 Ere 966 set store x 0000 bitwise ANDed B 70 2 Bit F118 A099 og 21 Ey store X Aena Eas H953 0704 Bag F119 A100 0 o X K2014 gt Fault status word B 470 8 Bit 8 User fault 1 0705 B 470 8 Bit 4 F120 A101 Fault Bits Send to the inverter 70 8 i User fault 2 d968 H955 0682 7 F121 A102 K2968 gt B 480 4 BirS Shear pos lt Minimum at least 1 bit 0103 F122 A103 FaultStartDelay set g gt B 480 4 Bit 6 Oven 10 s 21 H969 eo ae F123 A104 480 4 Overspeed negative 21 Fault CU Status 1 3 620 4 Fault word X is stored with rizing edge n z Ole g QD o ah a 0694 I CO oa N p CO a KR 0116 F124 A105 o T B 490 7 Bit 8 Shear blocked H959 0125 F125 A106 B 80 7 El Fault speed sensing 0521 F126 A107 Alarm Mask B 280 8 Bit in B CIGEEEFE aie H961 0522 H967 bitwise ANDed F127 A108 B 280 8 Bit 11 Exter
113. 2 l 810 6 2621 l 810 6 430 6 Value 0000 Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 425 5 576 810 2 16 0A00 810 4 430 4 2000 l 440 4 3000 l 440 4 3000 l 60 6 Value 0 0 Type Chart R 70 3 Value 0 Type Chart W 70 5 Value 0 Type Chart l 70 5 Value 0 Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart DI 70 7 3000 l 430 1 0000 l 430 3 425 1 425 3 119 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L689 L690 S AND7_1 S AND7_2 L695 L695 S S RS FlipFlop4 S R RS FlipFlop4 L700 L702 S AND1_I1 S AND1_I3 L703 L705 S AND2_I1 S AND2 I3 L706 L707 S Switch1 0 S Switch1 1 L708 S Switch1 sel L709 S Edgel L710 L712 S OR1 IM S OR1 I3 L713 L715 S OR2_I1 S OR2 I3 L716 L717 S Switch2 0 S Switch2 1 L718 S Switch2 sel L720 S Ramp Input L721 L722 S Ramp max S Ramp min L723 S Ramp Setvalue L724 L725 Ramp up time Ramp down time L726 S Ramp enable L727 S Ramp set L728 S OnDelay1 L729 T_OnDelay1 L730 S OffDelay1 120 Description Data 2 sources for the inputs of the 7 free AND block Type Chart Sources for the set and reset input of the 4 RS flip flop R dominant Type free block Chart 3 sources for t
114. 270 8 S Store Value_1 H335 3414 KR 120 8 Store Stored value 1 Stored value Value Storage of 2 values non volatile S EnStoreVal_2A H339 0413 B 120 7 S EnStoreVal_2B H340 0507 B 270 8 S Store Value_2 H338 3415 KR 120 6 Store Stored value 2 Stored value Value B1307 Set to coarse ref 32 ms FIL B1308 Set to coarse reference Set shear position Tal B1306 Set shear position SetVal ShearPos c313 KR 150 8 Synchr set value S SynchrShearPos pA L319 3311 KR3313 Set value shear position KR 170 4 Position sensing Calibrate shear V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length a es Sey eee Function diagram 170 S SV_BA1 cut 210 0000 B 70 2 S SV_Format 200 3629 KR 190 7 S SV Dist Light 205 3123 KR 60 7 S SV_enTopCut L211 0511 B 270 8 TopCut size norm 60 7 Start without material in the cut region S SV_StartSel 198 0000 B 70 2 S SV_StartLength 201 3162 KR 200 8 S SV_StartVal 199 3000 KR 70 2 Start with material in the cut region S SV_Longformat L197 3098 KR 60 5 S SV End Cut 214 0573 B 320 6 S SV LightGate 213 0250 B 110 8 S SV noCutMode 212 0577 B 320 4 S SV set Ref_1 195 0000 B 70 2 1 S SV set Ref_2 L196 0000 B 70 2 1 S Dist PassMark L209 3099 KR 60 5 KR3209 Distance modulo
115. 3 H906 2305 K 610 3 H907 2832 K 700 3 H908 2835 K 700 3 H909 2838 K 700 4 H910 2017 K 520 5 COMBOARD Process data transmission PZD1 CB out d911 PZD10 CB out d920 IN a ee EE ee V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Process data send via COMBOARD PZD 1 Status word 1 PZD 2 Material velocity PZD 3 Speed act value shear PZD 4 Status word 2 PZD 5 Current act value PZD 6 Torque act value Shear status word CB Config set 1 L914 CB Address 3 L900 B Param 1 0 L901 B Param 2 2 L902 B Param 3 0 L903 B Param 4 0 L904 B Param 5 0 L905 CB Param 6 0 L906 CB Param 7 0 L907 Configuration COMBOARD Configuration valid Status of the configuration Slave bus address Parameter setting for the COMBOARD depending of the type of COMBOARD CB Config State c915 CB Param 8 0 L908 CB Param 9 0 L909 CB Param 0 L910 CB Param 0 L911 CB Param 12 0 L912 CB Param 13 0 L913 Configuration of COMBOARDs These parameters are reserved for using COMBOARDs in SRT400 applications For the configuration of a COMBOARD placed in slot G lower position of the electronic box of inverters use parameters of the inverter e g P918 for the bus address with Masterdrives MC The modifications of any parameter L900 to L913 becomes valid after settin
116. 3 d050 ay W4 L951 2672 K 70 6 Display W4 d051 S Display B1 L964 0317 S Display B2 L965 0172 S Display B3 L966 0567 S Display B4 L967 0412 S Display Dit L968 5402 S Display DI2 L969 5422 S Display Dia L970 5061 S Display Di L971 5063 V1 02 Type 16bit Integer S Display 11 L956 2302 K 610 3 S Display 12 L957 2809 K 670 3 S Display 13 L958 2802 K 670 3 S Display 14 L959 2806 K 670 3 Type BOOL Display B 170 7 ape Display B 200 4 Tes Display B 300 6 A Display B 120 7 sie Type 32bit Integer KK 80 8 KK 80 4 KK 790 3 KK 790 3 NE sw as ee FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Control and monitoring functions for the inverter interface CU Receive init d971 maximum Receiver initialized U receive init time interval between 2 CU Transmit init U receive not init telegrams d972 Transmitter initialized U transmit init CU Timeout U transmit not init d973 Timeout U timeout CU in operation U no timeout d974 Inverter in operation U in operation U not in operation ResynchrDelay 1000 ms T De ra a H976 B0976 CU operation delayed H977 Synchronization the T400 by T 0 S DisableResynch the inverter clock after a H975 0666 Disable positive edge here B 360 7 CU clock has to be 1 6 ms a EE EE NE
117. 3707 KR 480 2 S SQRT_2 L618 3414 D KR 120 8 S SQRT_3 L619 3001 KR 70 2 S Speed_dvCut L585 3577 KR 265 7 S Speed_VRef L570 3435 KR 130 6 S Speed_DV_FGEN L564 3158 KR 200 8 S Speed_FOVS L565 3020 KR 265 5 S Speed_PosCtrl L566 3144 KR 210 8 KR3617 Square root KR3619 Neg square root CutSpeed_Max 1 1 L575 pa KR3575 max cut speed 0 0 gef S CutSpeedLimits S Max Speed_Cut L568 0671 L574 3575 B 870 5 KR 250 5 SpeedSetp_Cut d021 KR3021 Speed setpoint cutting 0 0 Po r L576 0 1 CutSpeed_Min lt a oa e Shear control Cutting speed V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S JogSpeed_neg L518 3519 JogSpeed JogSpeed i KR 260 2 0 05 KR3519D ie 9 S JogSpeed1 L523 3519 KR 260 2 S JogPositiv1 L520 0593 B 290 6 S JogPositiv2 L521 0001 B 70 2 S JogPositiv3 L522 0001 B 70 2 S JogSpeed2 L527 3518 KR 260 3 S JogNegativi L524 0594 B 290 6 S JogNegativ2 L525 0001 B 70 2 S JogNegativ3 L526 0001 B 70 2 Spd_Referencing 0 05 L542 S LimSwitchStart L530 0000 B 70 2 S LimitSwitchEnd L531 0001 B 70 2 S Init_Ref_Dir ES 1312 170 4 Speed setpoint switching for automatical referencing Speed reversion when reaching the limit switches KR3518 gt JogSpeed_neg Speed setpo
118. 4 F123 Overspeed negative knife e Check limit value L101 L102 e Check speed normalization on T400 CU A105 F124 Knife drive blocked in spite of setpoint speed and torque present A106 F125 Pulse encoder fault speed Incorrect speed normalization check the measured values from T400 plant system geometry pulse number encoder and CU different for T400 and CU correct A107 F126 External fault 1 Assigned application specific A108 F127 External fault 2 Assigned application specific 12 A109 F128 Knife position gt max value Check limit value For linear axis high limit values possible 13 A110 F129 Material position lt min value Long format H111 selected too small e Check functions for setting position values e Correct position several times per sheet A111 F130 Fault TR encoder Encoder 1 from type TR absolute value encoder Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 35 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 Function description 4 1 Normalization operations Process data are generally transferred as 16 bit fixed point values If the resolution is not sufficient in certain cases a 32 bit fixed point value can be used When converting from the PZD into floating point values the normalization factor 1 0 is used in the factory setting When PZD is output the inverse conversion is made from floating point to a fixed point value The normalization operations can be indi
119. 408 0x0004 L530 inverse input proximity switch L531 input proximity switch L532 0 Only when jogging or referencing 4 When synchronized Always factory setting v gt Absolute value encoder AA to reference point id v zi H405 0 no synchronizing H405 0599 H405 0317 L542 0 0 velocity reference Ad Ad L542 velocity when referencing refer to the rated velocity no Pass mark yes y synchronization v H425 0 inhibit synchronization Connect a light barrier to terminal 64 terminal 88 to ground a yes no pass mark y H425 1360 sense the pass marks as a function of the position v H366 permissible deviation from the expected value refer to Fsymech H425 1 y v H446 offset equalization permitted H444 percentage offset equalization per processing cycle e g 0 5 of Fsymech Mark first reaches the light barrier Light barrier Mark first reaches the knife Vv position H431 3094 L202 3094 AA H431 3099 L202 3099 Power down the T400 and power up again Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 147 Typical commissioning C General settings for systems with linear axis General settings H101 0 H103 0 H154 2 Characteristi
120. 5 7 4 6 Par L331 L332 L333 L334 L336 L337 L339 L343 L346 L196 H481 H478 H479 162 Value 0728 500 ms 0878 50 ms 0730 0878 0876 Value 0576 0644 0758 0x0007 0x0104 0x0400 0935 Function Source for the cutting pulse output OnDelay1 Cut pulse duration Source switch off delay for the end of cut identification from the cut pulse Duration switch off delay for the end of cut identification Source of the edge generation at the end of cutting OffDelay1 Connect digital output terminal 52 with the clamping pulse Connect digital output terminal 51 with the cut pulse Function Initiating a manual cut l1 Cutting operation Chart 320 5 12 in the starting position Chart 340 4 I3 Manual cut request MS1 Cutting operation AND in_starting position AND manual cut request MS2 no_cutting operation AND manual cut request MR no_manual cut request Set the material position to initiate a manual cut in the automatic mode Return positioning Value 0665 0644 0576 0708 0499 1347 0x020C 0x2040 0x0001 1348 625 1 s 30000 1 s8 15000 1 s3 Function 11 Not enabled factory setting 12 in the starting position factory setting 13 Cutting operation factory setting 14 End of the cutting pulse l6 Positioning active factory setting I7 Positioning mode factory setting MS1 Cutting operation AND end of the cut pulse AND not in start position MR1 Positioning no
121. BO 165 5 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L146 TR End Delay c147 TR complete c148 TR Load input c149 TR Loading active L150 TR StartErrDelay L151 TR Timeout Delay L152 TR n_Error Delay L153 TR Start Delay c154 TR Start error c155 TR Timeout c156 TR Frequency Zero c157 TR Error L158 AbsEncoder Type L160 AENC resolution L161 AENC Number Turns L162 AENC Zero Bits L163 AENC PosAlarmbit L164 AENC Frequency L165 AENC Encoder Type Parameters and Connectors Description After the TR encoder has signaled the start of the load operation the load request is withdrawn delayed by L146 ms The signal indicates whether the absolute position of a TR encoder was read in 1 Position was read in Status of the request to transfer the absolute position of a TR encoder The signal is used to control the encoder It is withdrawn delayed after the load operation has started L146 Displays an active load operation Timeout monitoring time for the start of the TR encoder load operation The encoder must start the load operation within this time Timeout monitoring time for the duration of the TR encoder load operation The load operation must have been completed within this time Time where a Frequency 0 error must be available for a TR encoder load operation before the error is initiated It is expected that a speed no
122. C FormatSel H178 S FC actFormat H179 Integral Time FC H180 FC_max H181 FC_min H182 S freeze FC d183 Output FC Int d184 Output FC H185 S FC FormatSetp H186 S FC FormatNorm H187 S V Cut curve H188 S Cutc_Int 0 H189 Cut Curve_max H190 Cut Curve_min H191 S Sample Cut H192 S FC FormatSetp2 H193 T Int Cut Curve H194 S Phi_cut_reduce H195 S FC actFormat_l2 78 Description 2 source for the format setpoint of the format controller Default Long Format normalized Source to changeover the format setpoint for the format controller Default Special length selected signal Source for the format actual value of the format controller Default SynchrPosition material position when synchronizing the knife position encoder Integrating time of the format controller 1 controller Positive limit value of the format controller Default Format controller not active Negative limit value of the format controller Default Format controller not active Source for the signal to stop the format controller Default No cutting operation signal Output of the format current controller Format controller output This signal represents a corrected format setpoint to be entered at the format generator The correction is used to compensate cutting errors Source for the format controller format setpoint Default Actual setpoint format Source for the normalization factor t
123. CTW 11 CB SCTW 12 CB SCTW 13 CB SCTW 14 CB SCTW 15 Inverter enable Ramp funct gen enable Start ramp funct gener Bit 7 Fault acknowledge Bit 8 Jogging 1 Bit 9 Jogging 2 Bit 10 Control reguested Bit 11 Clockwise segu enable Bit 12 Counter clockwise enable Bit 13 Raise motor potentiom Bit 14 Lower motor potentiom Bit 15 1 external fault CB Contro Bit 15 Option special sheet inverted control bits inverted control bits CB CTW1 0 inv CB SCTW 0 inv CB CTW1 15 inv CB SCTW 15 inv EE RS y Ss EN e y 7 EE 8 COMBOARD FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram i Control words Sheet cutter Cut to Length Status word 1 StatusWord1 CB S Status1CB Bito Bi for COMBOARD d846 000 0340 B 620 4 A T Q 0341 B 620 4 K2846 Status word1 CB StatusWord2 CB d847 A T Q Q N 0342 B 620 4 0343 B 620 4 Status word 2 S Status2CB Bit0 Bi for COMBOARD 020 0000 B 70 2 T Q O A 0344 B 620 4 0345 B 620 4 0000 B 70 2 K2847 Status word 2 CB T Q e o 0346 B 620 4 f Q N N 0000 0347 B 70 2 B 620 4 0000 B 70 2 T Q O 0308 B 620 4 0000 0001 B 70 2 0000 B 70 2 T T T Q Q Q N N N oa Go T Q e T T T T T e Q Q Q Q Q O Oo Q CO N oa Go T Q Le A T T T T O O co Q Go a Go N A N 0459 B 330 3
124. CU Setpoint4 CU R Setpoint5 low CU H797 d796 1 0 Setpoint5 low CU Setpoint5CU Norm Ek NN NE ENE 5 EEN EE EE EEN EEN Inverter interface V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Process data transmission 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length ar Mask CB Status tmax CB PowerON Control and monitoring faults for the 16 FFFF 20s COMBOARD interface H928 H929 16 bit bitwise ANDed Ee Enable CB Receive Status at least one bit 1 Timeout CB H925 d927 d924 Receive status gt B0924 Timeout CB Timeout B0918 No timeout CB CB tmax Run maximum time 100ms interval between 2 H926 telegrams CB Receive init d921 Receiver initialized B0921 CB receive init CB Transmit init B0920 CB receive not init d922 Transmitter initialized B0922 CB transmit init B0919 CB transmit not init EE EO aa O a ee COMBOARD Funcion diagram General setings Convert 16 bit integers to floating point CB Setpoint Norm 1 0 H817 PZD1 PZD10 CB inp CB Setpoint1 Process data word S Setpoint1 CB ER 7 z H816 2802 received via COMBOARD jso1 d810 aa KRS818 Setpointi GB PZD 1 A Control word 1 PED rom GB CB Sine Norm PZD 2 H820 Ceen i point2 Master velocity PZD2 from GB S Setpoint2 CB re H819 2803 PD PZD3 from CB K 670 3 KR3821 Setpoint2 CB Factor overspeed PZD 4 f B i Control word 2 PZD4 from Cl CB aem Norm H823 A ED i CB Setpoint3 ENE DE CR d824 H822 2807 oe PZD6 from CB K 670 3 KR3824 Setpo
125. Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 410 4 BO 410 5 BO 410 7 0454 410 6 460 2 4 450 2 4 460 2 4 450 2 4 450 5 450 6 460 5 460 5 460 8 3164 450 2 3413 450 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter L498 S Friction Polyg L499 S Inertia Polygon L500 S Factor1 Friction L501 S Factor2 Friction L502 S Offset Friction L503 S Factor Inertia L504 S Offset Inertia L505 L506 S NX_Friction S NY_Friction L507 Set Friction L508 Typ Friction L509 L510 LM1 Friction LM2 Friction L511 L512 S NX Inertia S NY Inertia L513 Set Inertia L514 Typ Inertia L515 L516 LM1 Inertia LM2 Inertia L517 S Ramp Local L518 S JogSpeed neg L519 JogSpeed L520 L522 S JogPositiv1 S JogPositiv3 Parameters and Connectors Description Source for the input quantity of the friction characteristic This is connected as standard to the smoothed material velocity Source for the input quantity of the moment of inertia characteristic This is connected as standard with the knife position Source for the 1 evaluation factor of the friction characteristic refer to Chart 460 Friction torque Output_friction characteristic e f L502 f L500 e f L501 Source for the 2 evaluation factor of the friction characteristic refer to Chart 460 L500 Sour
126. Control word2 for the basic drive The error word comprises the error bits which resulted in a fault trip It is generated by masking the fault message enable H966 with the error bits d968 The assignment of the error bits is defined using parameters H950 H965 Error sources in the factory setting BitO Communications via CB Bit 1 Communications to the basic drive Bit2 Not assigned Bit3 User error 1 Bit4 User error 2 Bit5 Knife position is lower than the lower limit value Bit6 Overspeed knife positive Bit7 Overspeed knife negative Bit8 Knife drive blocked Bit9 Pulse encoder error speed actual value not plausible Bit10 External fault 1 Bit11 External fault 2 Bit 12 Knife position greater than the upper limit value Bit 13 Material position less than the lower limit value Bit 14 Fault absolute value encoder TR encoder Bit15 Not assigned The alarm word comprises the error bits which resulted in an alarm being displayed It is generated by masking the alarm enable H967 with the error bits d968 Assignment refer to d014 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart 0 50 1 50 3 50 3 DI 50 3 50 3 110 8 510 2 630 4 630 8 530 7 WwW 530 7 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter d016 Status Cntrl Logic d017
127. D logic gate BO631 is the output Two sources of the 4 free AND logic gate BO633 is the output Source for the position actual value to check whether the knife is in the starting position or is at a standstill there Source for the starting position In the factory setting this is connected to the starting position of the format generator This value is normalized therefore H642 H643 and the actual value must also be normalized quantities source H640 Tolerance range for the starting position identification normalized Hysteresis for the starting position identification normalized Status The knife is in the starting position Source for the Knife stationary signal for the starting position evaluation Minimum time that the knife must be in the starting position before the Knife in the starting position becomes active Status Knife is stationary at the starting position i e it stays there for a defined time H646 Source for the position actual value which should be evaluated to generate a calculation pulse Factory setting Knife position Position value where a calculation pulse is generated The calculation pulse must be generated once per cut and is used to progress the status for cutting operating modes Source of the inverter enable signals due to the request local operating modes Source of the inverter enable signal from the automation Source of the setpoint enable 4 sources to generate the In
128. E AD ED ag N DE RR ein RE N 163 75 Function flow RLC principle EE EE EA Ee SE EE ts ae eae 164 Function charts 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Warning information 0 Warning information WARNING Electrical equipment has components which are at dangerous voltage levels If these instructions are not strictly adhered to this can result in severe bodily injury and material damage Only appropriately qualified personnel may work on commission this equipment This personnel must be completely knowledgable about all the warnings and service measures according to this User Manual It is especially important that the warning information in the relevant Operating Instructions MASTERDRIVES or DC MASTER is strictly observed Definitions e Qualified personnel for the purpose of this Manual and product labels are personnel who are familiar with the installation mounting start up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved He or she must have the following qualifications 1 Trained and authorized to energize de energize clear ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures 2 Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures 3 Trained in rendering first aid death severe personal injury and or substantial property damage will DANGER For the purpose of this
129. E EEN EEN ES Inverter interface FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram General settings Sheet cutter Cut to Length PZD1 Receive process data from inverter PZD1 Status word1 PZD2 speed act value PZD4 Status word2 PZD5 Torque act value PZD7 Current act value Inverter EE V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd OE diagram Process data reception PZD16 from CU d301 da16 PZD1 from C PZD2 from C PZD3 from PZD4 from C PZD5 from C PZD6 from C PZD7 from C PZD8 from CU PZD9 from CU PZD10 from C PZD11 from C PZD12 from C PZD13 from C PZD14 from C PZD15 from C PZD16 from C Four 16bit process data are converted to floating point S ActValue1 CU H317 2302 K 610 3 S ActValue2 CU H320 2303 K 610 3 S ActValue3 CU H323 2305 K 610 3 S ActValue4 CU H326 2306 K 610 3 S DW1 high CU H330 2316 K 610 3 S DW1 low CU 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length CU actValue1 Norm 1 0 H318 GU ActValuet d319 KR3319 ActValue1 CU CU actValue2 Norm 1 0 H321 GU ActValue2 d322 KR3322 ActValue2 CU CU actValue3 Norm 1 0 H324 GU ActValue3 d325 KR3325 ActValue3 CU CU actValue4 Norm 1 0 H327 GU ActValue4 d328 KR3328 ActValue4 CU Convert a double word to floating point CU DW1 Norm 1 0 H333 CU ActValue DW1 d334 KR3334 ActValue DW1 CU Status word2 CU Status word1 CU d359 d357 Status
130. EnDat connected to T400 0 Binary 1 Gray code 2 Gray excess code Enables the parity monitoring in the SSI protocol of an absolute value encoder for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Ratio of the gearbox between the absolute value encoder and knife The value must be 1 0 to clearly determine knife positions for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Position normalization of the absolute value encoder The position value is calculated in revolutions and output multiplied by L169 for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Speed normalization of the absolute value encoder The value can be selected as required as the absolute value encoder speed cannot be used as standard for other functions for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Maximum permissible speed value normalization revolutions minute If the knife speed exceeds this limit bit1 of the error code c177 is set for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Source of the signal to reset the absolute value generator sensing and to acknowledge error messages from the absolute value encoder for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Source of the absolute value encoder offset The offset can be used for zero point correction It is subtracted from the measured value for SSI EnDat connected to T400 Mask to select individual fault bits of the hardware fault identification refer to c176 for EnDat connected to T400 Mask to select individual error bits of the software error indentation
131. FlipFlop2 B 70 2 1 gt B0543_ non L734 0000 S Not4 7 B 70 2 544 0000 3 53 B 702 Th Not2_ RSFF2_Q S R RS FlipFlop2 RSFF2_QN L735 0000 B 70 2 S Edge1 S S RS FlipFlop3 L709 0000 L736 0000 B 70 2 RSFF3_Q RSFF3_QN S SwitchDI 0 73 25 S Bool_NOP1 L645 0000 aaa L641 5684 L685 3000 in T5 L687 0000 ine RR ae KR 70 2 KR3685 B 70 2 B0687 S NOP2 l S Bool_NOP2 l S SwitchDI_sel L686 3000 in T5 L688 0000 in T5 F L642 0000 KR 70 2 KR3686 B 70 2 B0688 B 70 2 S Switch1_0 S Switch2_0 S Switch4_0 L824 3000 L827 3000 KR 70 2 KR 70 2 S Switch3_1 S Switch4_1 L707 3000 L717 3000 L825 3001 L828 3001 S Switch2_sel S Switch3_sel S Switch4_sel L718 0000 L826 0000 L829 0000 B 70 2 B 70 2 N N ON N a y N e N EEN EE EN e FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Miscellaneous functions 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length 32bit integer switch S Limit_max L746 3001 KR 70 2 S Limit_inp L747 3000 KR 70 2 S Limit_min L748 3000 KR 70 2 Limiter T3 42 Limit_max Limit_out Limit_min Compare2 Hyst S Compare2 Range L750 3001 KR 70 2 S Compare2 L749 3000 KR 70 2 S Compare2 Mid L752 3006 KR 70 2 2 Point Characteristic T3 43 Character_Y1 S Character_X L753 3000 KR 70 2 Character_Y2 1 0 L757 0 1 Comparator L751 with hysteresis additional comparators on chart 350 T3
132. Format to synchronize to the material web Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Unit Chart Type Chart Value Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart BO 290 4 0 0mm 190 1 3606 190 2 0000 190 5 2807 190 1 2806 190 1 0 1 mm 190 3 190 3 2806 190 1 1mm 190 2 190 3 3664 190 4 190 5 2001 190 6 mm 190 7 190 4 6 3665 190 1 100 0 m 190 3 0 6 m 190 3 190 7 220 7 93 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H631 H632 S AND3_1 S AND3_2 H633 H634 S AND4_1 S AND4 2 H640 S Act Pos Start H641 S Start Position H642 Startpos Range H643 Startpos_Hyst d644 In Startposition H645 S n_zero Start H646 DelayStartpos d647 Standing Startpos H648 S Pos CalcPos H649 Pos CalcPuls H650 S Enable Local H651 S Enable_PLC H652 S Enable Setp H653 H656 S CU ready 1 S CU ready 4 H657 S Enable Ramp H658 S Start Ramp H659 Enable DelayLoc d660 Inverter ready H661 S optEnableCnirl 94 Description Two sources of the 3 free AN
133. H375 Tmax manual cut H400 Pulse Encoder 1 Initialization par H401 S Refer Speed_1 H402 S Ref Pulses_1 H403 S Reset Pos_1 Parameters and Connectors Description Source for 2 conditions for the storing of H338 AND gate Source for status word 1 from the basic drive This connection should remain connected to the first process data which is received from the basic drive Status word 1 from the basic drive Source for status word 2 from the basic drive This connection is connected as standard to the 4 process data which is received from the basic drive Status word 2 from the basic drive 3 sources of the AND logic gate to enable the position dependent pass mark synchronization 2 sources of the OR logic gate to enable the position dependent pass mark synchronization outside the enable window e g to recognize the first mark Possible deviation of the pass mark position from the reference position information data referred to Fsymech to define a synchronizing window Two sources for a modulo division The result may be used to display the reference position within format length Source for an optional signal to trigger the correction function for the reference position Source for the binary manual cutting request Source for the binary enable for manual cutting Recommendation Set to 666 if the shear may perform a manual cut while the web is standing still Source for a binary value which sig
134. KA GEGR AGE GA RAL fixed val Format fixed val ue 15 190 4 ue 16 Specia sheet 190 2 Fixed values 0 L666 fixed value W2 0 L667 fixed value W3 0 L668 fixed value W4 0 L669 fixed value W5 0 L670 fixed val 0 L671 fixed val 0 L672 fixed val 0 L673 fixed val 0 L674 fixed val 0 L675 fixed val 0 L676 fixed val 0 L677 fixed val 0 L678 ue ue ue ue ue ue ue ue K2666 K2667 K2668 K2669 K2670 a K2671 N KEERRAAR daddi K2672 Go K2673 BR K2674 a K2675 D K2676 add K2677 K2678 5 V1 02 fixed value W1 fixed value W2 fixed value W3 fixed value W4 fixed value W5 fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val 0 ue DIT L679 fixed val 0 ue DI2 L680 fixed val fixed val 0 L681 0 ue DI3 ue DI4 L682 fixed val 0 ue DI5 L683 fixed val ue DI6 0 L684 Fixed pos 1 0 mm H233 Fixed pos 2 0 mm H234 Fixed pos 3 0 mm H235 Fixed pos 4 0 mm H236 fixed val ue 18 S Norm Fixed pos 32bit fixed values KK5679 KK5680 KK5681 KK5682 KK5683 KK5684 H232 3100 FPlan_SPS450e vsd fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val ue DIT ue DI2 ue DI3 ue DI5
135. Messer Y Pulse number 1 knife encoder 2412 120 6 Inc Encoder MESSER YFC Error code knife position sensing Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 137 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 2465 2536 2544 2586 Mark limit limit value for the pass mark counter 2588 Mark number 1 pass mark number calculated from the format 2605 DW_W1 high output double word gt word converter 2606 DW _W 1 low output double word gt word converter 2607 ADDI_Y output integer adder 1 2608 SUBI_Y output integer subtractor 1 2621 2622 2623 2647 R 11 output floating point gt integer converter 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 Output float to N2 converter free block Setpoint 2 CU N2 2789 Setpoint 3 CU N2 2792 Setpoint 4 CU N2 2795 2796 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2812 DIVI_1 Y output integer divider 2813 DIVI 1 Y MOD modulo output integer divider 2814 MULI_1 Y output integer multiplier 2826 2829 2832 2835 138 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 2843 680 3 input CU STW1CU sel Y CB CTW1 control word2 from the COMBOARD Light barrier distance to the cut normalized 60 6_ ConstantKONST2 6_ Fsymech S E Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 139 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 3116 Cons
136. O Increm_2 Symbolic hardware addresses of the basis software package Ana In 1 Ana Out 1 Ana In 2 Ana Out 2 Ana In 3 Ana In 4 Ana In 5 a BinInOut SSI 1 Binlnput X02 Layout of the terminals on the T400 technology module Hardware components and interfaces T400 Tracks A and B from CU Zero pulse from CU RS485 2 wire 11 bits sign 99 Q X5 45 MASTERDRIVES basic drive CUx Serial interface 1 Program download CFC online USS SIMOVIS 2 analog outputs 10 V 10 mA 11 bits sign 24V 2 digital outputs 24 V DC 100 mA 40 mA base load for external P24 supply which can also come from the basic drive Absolute value encoder 1 Absolute value encoder 2 or serial interface 2 peer to peer or MASTERDRIVES basic drive CUx 19 Hardware components and interfaces 3 1 1 Digital inputs and outputs The digital inputs and outputs of the T400 technology module use 24V Power Supply signal levels The 24 V power supply voltage P24 for the digital voltage 9 outputs must be externally connected A maximum of 14 digital inputs are available for open loop control functions 4 of which are bi directional i e can either be used as input or as output All o
137. R Timeout TR Error c155 c157 TR loading active 165 8 B0155 TR FrequencyZero c156 Note S TR n_zero L143 0460 B0156 TR frequency zero Only flip flops used with input R dominant IN EE EK EEN a ee Position sensing V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram TR encoder 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Calibrate Delay 0 0 ms L309 S Calib_Absolute L300 0147 B 165 3 S Calib ZeroPuls L302 0415 B 120 8 OM Locale 290 8 Set to coarse ref 32 ms 170 6 S CalPhiOverflow L303 0684 B 480 4 S CalPhiUnderflw L304 0682 B 480 4 User error pulse encoder 500 5 OM Referencing 290 6 Shear speed negative 120 8 S CoarseRef Sel L301 0594 B1313 Pulse calibrated Calibration is validated set abs pos valid B1300 Calibration is unvalidated 1 Start pulse referencing B1311 End pulse referencing CoarseRef pos 0 0 L318 CoarseRef neg 1 0 L317 Synchr Pos neg 1 0 L311 Synchr Pos pos 0 0 L312 B1314 Pulse not calibrated Shear calibrated e310 R dominant B1310 Shear is calibrated B1309 Shear is not calibrated S Calib CoarseRef L305 0529 B 280 8 S CoarseRef_Jog L306 0593 B 290 6 set abs pos valid 170 3 Enable absolute encoder 50 8 S SetShearPos2 L307 0000 Coarse set value S ShearSetValue L308 3183 S EnStoreVal_1A H336 1308 B 170 7 S EnStoreVal_1B H337 0513 B
138. R3624 H621 1500 0 mm Fixformat 1 H622 1200 0 mm Fixformat 2 H623 1000 0 mm Fixformat 3 H624 1000 0 mm Fixformat 4 H625 1000 0 mm Fixformat 5 Maximum Format 100 0 m H627 B0608 Limit Format S Limit Format H608 0000 H628 0 6 m Minimum Format Refpos limited 200 2 KR3608D Actual format setpoint 220 7 Start length 200 8 FormatRequest d620 Format reguest AN OU BOON AO KR3625 Format setpoint normalized to the mechanical synchron format Fsymech Format setpoint d629 KR3629 Format setpoint Actual minimum format IN EE EK EEN EN EI Shear control V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Format setpoint selection 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S FormatChange_3 H172 0000 S FormatChange_1 B 70 2 H173 0413 B 120 8 S FormatChange_2 H174 1345 Shear calibrated 170 5 Cutting active 320 4 Factor Overspeed 265 5 B 410 5 value changed RefPos max 100000 0 H198 S RefPos Limit H197 3438 KR 135 5 H199 0 0 RefPos limited KR3197 RefPos min Shear control Format generator FGEN S AX_Formatgen H201 3118 KR 60 4 S AY_Formatgen a n N O N 8119 KR 60 4 S AZ_Formatgen H203 3103 KR 60 7 S FGEN Format H150 3184 KR 220 7 S FGEN RefPos T a a N 8197 KR 200 2 S FGEN V_Ref 3435 KR 130 6 I a a n ae ol D og a 3 w
139. Rate a eer timeout 19200 Baud rate Timeout L060 Peer to Peer Peer Receive init B0079 Peer no timeout tmax Peer Run maximum time c068 100ms interval between 2 PER L067 telegrams Receiver initialized B0068 Peer receive initialized B0069 Peer receive not initialized Peer Transmit init c070 Transmitter initialized B0070 Peer transmit initialized B0071 Peer transmit not initialized NOTE After enable the Peer to Peer interface the T400 board has to been restarted power off power on ee e o e a A a EE ee EE EEN EE ee Optional communication FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram General settings peer to peer Sheet cutter Cut to Length Process data words PZD2 PZD3 und PZD4 PZD5 may be transmitted either as word double word or floating point values Note Before connecting Floating point receiver channels e g KR3061 to other function blocks make sure that you receive floating point data from this channel This avoids additional computation time for the error handling of not a number values Process data reception PZD 2 PZD3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD1 Peer PZD5 c061 c065 PZD1 from Peer PZD2 from Peer PZD3 from Peer Peer Float1 Peer DW1 PZD4 from Peer PZD5 from Peer Peer Float2 Peer DW2 S Peer PZD1 L071 2000 K 70 2 S Peer PZD2 L072 2000 K 70 2 S Peer PZD3 L073 2000 K 70 2 S Peer DW1 L080 5000 K 70 2 S Peer Float1 L083 3000 K 70 2 S Pe
140. S422 V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Explanations Explanations Explanations Low pass filter T time constant input at the upper limit eek Curve defined by 2 points Limiter Pee and ne Ne output signalling if the input symmetrical to the Y axis ss input at the eg the High pass filter ede lower limit T smooting time constant Td derivative action time constant setting value set interval limit hysteresis Limiter function Xmin lt X lt Xmax Ramp function with gt Limit value monitor with setting function hysteresis Switch on delay T1 ramp up time ramp down time average interval value proportional gain integral action time Switch off delay T1 integral value system deviation output PI controller Converter here fixed point to floating point 100 converted to 1 0 ee es General FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Control symbols Sheet cutter Cut to Length Language select 0 HOOO Drive code 0 H923 TechBoardParaTyp 0 H980 COMBOARD ParaTyp 0 H981 T400 Baseboard 0 H982 Key EEPROM 0 H984 General settings 0 german 1 english Choose data type for floating point parameters Use T400 as baseboard special applications without inverter Restore factory setting Restore factory setting Set H984 165 Modified parameters are restored to factory setting This opera
141. SIEMENS Standard Software Package Sheet Cutter Cut to Length for T400 Technology Module Software Version 1 02 MIN ar Manual Order No 6DD1903 0DBO0 Edition 10 00 Contents Contents 0 Warning Information ss ses ces ced ee ed ee Ee Ee ee Ee ee EE ee EE oe 3 EE oe NOW EE N EE EE OE AE OE OE RE OE OE ER ce 5 1 1 Validity and how the software is supplied iiii ei Re ee Re de ee ee ee ee 5 1 2 Order numbers ste ss EE EE EE ee ge ge eg ede ge EE Re eg se 5 1 3 Adapting the standard software package ee RR de ee ee ee 6 13 4 Patametels easi ss EE ee Ge E ae EE ee ge 7 1 32 BICO param etei Sie se Es ER Ee ee EG EN ee Ee ee eu ee EE 8 1 3 3 Resources which are used to adapt the software and for start UP iis kke 9 2 Introduction EE EE ED DR RE AE DER DE DE Ee 10 2 1 Hardware Configuration sees ees ee ee Re ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 10 2 2 System features OVerVieW iii ee RA RR ee ke ee de ee ek ee 11 2 3 Operating modes ee eee 13 2 3 1 Referencing i RE Re Re eed anne ee ee eke ee ee de ee ee 14 23 2 GOMUNUOUS CLIN Ms EE ME EE ME MO ME Me IE EES 14 ek T OST CUE EE ER EE RE RE OE OE 15 AE AA OE EE 15 28 BEd USE OD EE RO ie RO ER OE OE ke EE EED ee 16 P 3 6 GUE DOOF EL ELEK KERKE R FREE EKS K DAE REEDS ER O O ERK EE ER EER EE ER ER Ke Eg Ee De ee de 16 28 JOGGING SASIE DEE EDGE EDE EE Ee De 17 2 3 8 Approaching the knife change DOSIHON ee RR Re ee ee 17 3 Hardware components and interf
142. Smax Braking knife position r4 Operating range __ gt Starting position Fig 4 14 Ranges to raise and lower the knife 58 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description To monitor the lowering range the range monitoring in Chart 350 range 3 is used This provides the option to shift the limits as a function of the velocity whereby this is not used in the particular example Table 4 21 Defining the range in which the knife may be lowered Param Value Quantity Significance using the example L224 675 Range3_max Upper limit value where the knife may be in the lower position Example max time to raise the knife 1 5s V_reference 20 m min when raising the knife distance moved 500 mm Range3_max 1200 mm 500 mm 25 mm 675 mm Comment In this particular example the material is considered to have been cut when the knife has been lowered operation completed It would be more correct so set the material cut status when the knife actually reaches the lower dead point However there is the danger that this status would never be reached if for a high material velocity and mechanical delays knife lowering would be interrupted before the lower deadpoint is reached The conditions for the three control functions can be defined using this range definition 4 7 1 3 Parameterizable STATE logic The logic functions in the tabl
143. The cutting devices can either be shears saw knife sheet cutter or comparable elements For reasons of simplicity in the following text independent of the actual version either knife or shears are used The technology control is realized on the T400 The position of the material to be cut and the knife are required Thus the position transmitter signals of the measuring roll material feed and the knife must be connected to the T400 For gearless applications the T400 receives the position tracks of the knife from the pulse encoder emulation of the MASTERDRIVES drive converter via the common backplane bus Data transfer between T400 and the basic drive is also realized via dual port RAM and the common backplane bus This combination represents an optimum system integration as the setpoints can be transmitted extremely quickly and in synchronism with the processing cycles 10 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction 2 2 System features overview System versions Automation Operating modes Cut lengths Cutting speed Overspeed Speed profile Cutting torque Cutting characteristic Characteristic A wide variety of different systems can be implemented using the closed loop Cut to length Systems with rotary axis e g drum type shears as well as linear positioning systems such as flying knife can be implemented Only a few parameters have to be changed to ad
144. U and T400 monitor communications If data transfer communications is interrupted for longer than 200 ms the CU signals fault F082 The yellow LED is bright on the T400 if communications between the T400 and CU are OK Communications is monitored by the standard software package Chart 600 WARNING After T400 has been reset in operation e g via CFC online the T400 re establishes communications to the CU and controls the yellow LED For the CUs presently being used the channel to the T400 remains inhibited also after fault FO82 has been acknowledged This means that data is not transferred from the CU to the T400 Remedy Restart the CU shutdown the voltage Torque actual Maximum value T400 Control word 1 Status word 1 KP adaption torque Current actual value Minimum torque Speed setpoint Control word 2 Status word 2 Speed Torque setpoint Closed loop current control CU Ramp function generator Speed controller Ld Limiting Fig 3 8 Process data transfer between the T400 and CU via DPRAM Table 3 19 Process data from the T400 to the basic drive wor Name Significance assignment crn e pzp5cu KP adaptaion ea ase e Pz08 cu Reserve forthe maximum torque owo 32 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 20 Communications from the basic drive to the T400 word Name Signifi
145. V1 02 Bit 14 Approach knife change pos Bit 15 Option special sheet SCTW1 FPlan_SPS450e vsd 7 Function diagram Shear control word SCTW1 270 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Manual mode 200 3 Mask2 LocMode 16 FFFF H540 Mask2 AutoMode 16 FFFF H541 is Shear control word 2 S ShearCTW2 BitO Bit15 source selection 0000 B 70 2 L a N e 521 0241 B 110 4 Bit 1 External fault alarm 1 522 0000 B 70 2 Bit 2 External fault alarm 2 gt 523 0242 B 110 4 Bit 3 Jogging 1 524 0243 B 110 4 Bit 4 Jogging 2 525 0000 B 70 2 Bit5 526 0000 B 70 2 527 0842 B 680 4 Bit 7 No quick stop I 528 0000 B 70 2 Bit 8 529 0264 B 100 8 Bit 9 Coarse reference 530 0000 B 70 2 Bit 10 gt 531 0000 B 70 2 Bit 11 532 0000 B 70 2 Bit 12 Opt enable cut mode 533 0000 B 70 2 Bit 13 534 0000 B 70 2 Bit 14 535 0000 B 70 2 Bit 15 Fault acknowledge Simulation mode 200 3 S SCTW2_simul H542 2623 Shear CTW2 K 810 6 d544 K2544 Shear CTW2 Shear control word 2 ba Bit 1 External fault alarm 1 Bit 2 External fault alarm 2 Bit 3 Jogging 1 d543 ae SCTW2_PLC Bit 4 Jogging 2 Bit 5 Bit 7 No quick stop Bit 8 Bit 9 Coarse reference Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Opt enable cut mode Optional enable May be connected to Bit 13 H600 290 1 or inverted to H566 300 1 B
146. Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 20s SD 780 6 BO 780 7 5000 790 5 5000 BO 790 5 3000 790 5 3000 790 5 BO 790 6 BO 790 6 BO 50 6 BO 50 7 BO 50 7 BO 50 6 1 480 6 3411 480 1 1 2 480 3 0 05 480 3 BO 480 4 BO 480 4 3411 490 1 0 005 490 2 3023 490 1 103 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L110 n_setp BlockLim L112 S Blocking act Torque L113 act Torque BlockLim L115 Blocking Delay c116 Shear Blocking c117 Encoder Fault User L118 S act Speed_CU L119 S act Speed_T400 c120 Speed Error L121 Limit Delta_n c122 Delta_n gt Limit L123 S Enable Delta_n L124 Delta_n Delay c125 Delta_n Fault L139 S TR Acknowledge L140 S TR Load Output L141 S TR Start Load L142 S TR CU disabled L143 S TR n_zero L144 S TR Enable c145 TR Load request 104 Description Limit value of the reference speed above which the blockage protection should be activated Source for the actual value of the torque for the knife blockage protection monitoring Limit value of the torque actual value above which the blockage protection should be activated Delay time with
147. Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 1 0 435 2 3 0000 436 1 100 ms 436 2 2061 440 1 440 5 7 l 440 4 5 l 440 6 7 l 800 2 3 2000 l 800 3 l 800 2 3 2000 l 800 3 3000 l 445 3 3000 l 445 3 3000 l 445 3 3000 l 445 3 3001 l 445 5 3001 l 445 5 3001 l 445 5 3001 l 445 5 l 425 5 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L808 L809 S ADDS X1 S ADD3 X2 L810 S FreeW_B 2 L811 S R DI L812 L813 S DIVI X1 S DIVI1 X2 L814 L815 S MULI1 X1 S MULI1 X2 L816 L817 S W_DW1 high S W_DW1 low L818 S Integrator_X L819 Integrator LU L820 Integrator LL L821 S Integrator SV L822 Integrator T L823 S Integrator set L824 L825 S Switch3_0 S Switch3_1 L826 S Switch3_sel L827 L828 S Switch4_0 S Switch4_1 L829 S Switch4_sel L830 L832 S AND_OR1_1 S AND_OR1_3 L833 L835 S AND_OR2_1 S AND_OR2_3 L836 L838 S AND_OR3_1 S AND_OR3_3 L840 S Cut Error Parameters and Connectors Description Source for the summands of a free adder Source for free word to binary converter Source for free real to double integer converter Source
148. Value 3000 Type Chart 80 1 Value 3157 Type Chart 210 1 Value 3192 Type Chart 210 1 Value 3000 Type Chart 210 1 Value 3161 Type Chart 210 1 Value 3129 Type Chart 210 1 75 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H129 S GotoKnifeChPos H130 S GotoStartPos H131 S ActValuePosPC d132 Deviation PC H133 PosReg_Max_cut H134 PosReg_Max_loc H135 PosReg_Min_cut H136 PosReg_Min_loc H137 S Max Setp Pos H138 S Min Setp Pos H139 S PC Enable H140 PC Test Setp H141 S PC_set YI 0 H142 H143 dMeas Wheel max dMeas Wheel min d144 Output PC filt d145 IntegratorVal PC H146 KP Pos Ctrl H147 TN Pos Ctrl H148 Tfilt PC H150 S FGEN Format H151 S FGEN V Ref 76 Description Source for changing over to the position reference value Reference position 4 As standard this is connected to the control signal Approach knife change position Source to changeover from the position reference value Reference position 3 This is connected as standard to the control signal Approach start position Source of the position actual value for the position controller This is connected as standard with Knife position System deviation of the position controller Positive position controller limit value for cutting operation Positive position controller limit value for local operation Negative position controller limit value for cutting
149. Word1 CU CU Status word 1 S StatusWord2 CU CU Status word 2 H356 2301 us1 0 H358 2304 K 610 3 K 610 3 us1 1 Bit 1 us1 2 Bit 2 Overspeed Bit 0 Ready to switch on Bit 0 Flying restart exitation CU CU CU CU status2 0 S s S CUs S s S s us2 1 us2 2 us2 3 al Bit 1 Ready for operation al al al atus2 4 al al al al Bit 2 Run Bit 3 Fault active Bit 4 OFF2 active Bit 5 OFF3 active Bit 6 Switch on inhibit Bit 7 Alarm active us1 3 Bit 3 External fault 1 active CU CU us2 5 us2 6 CU us2 7 CU us2 8 CU status2 9 CU status2 10 CU status2 11 CU status2 12 CU status2 13 CU status2 14 CU status2 15 us1 5 Bit 5 Alarm overload us1 6 Bit 6 Fault overtemperature S S s S s S s status1 7 Bit 7 Alarm overtemperature s a a a a atus1 4 Bit 4 External fault 2 active a a a a Bit 8 No setp act value deviation us1 8 Bit 8 Alarm overtemp motor Bit 9 PcD control requested status1 9 Bit 9 Fault overtemp motor CU status1 10 Bit 10 CU status1 11 Bit 11 Fault motor blocked CU status1 12 Bit 12 Bypass contactor ener CU status1 13 Bit 13 CU status1 14 Bit 14 CU status1 15 Bit 15 Pre charging acktive Bit 10 Comp value reached Bit 11 Low voltage fault Bit 12 requ enger main contactor Bit 13 Ramp function gener active Bit 14 positive speed setpoint Bit 15 inverted status bits inverted status bits _f B0300_ CU status1 0 inv B0320 _
150. YN D Reference Manual function block library function block NAVS connection MOD X Last hexadecimal location 2 means Bit 0 0 Encoder 1 Two pulse tracks offset through 90 1 Encoder 2 A dedicated track for each direction of rotation Bit 3 1 Digital filter with time constant limiting frequency 500 ns 2 MHz 000x No filter 001x 500 ns encoder 1 125 ns encoder 2 010x 2 s encoder 1 illegal encoder 2 011x 8 us encoder 1 illegal encoder 2 100x 16 us encoder 1 illegal encoder 2 Rest illegal X Last but one location E means Bit4 Setting mode for input S 0 Set YP to SV 1 Subtract SV from YP Bit5 Setting mode for input SP 0 Set YDP to SVD 1 Subtract SVD from YDP Bit6 Source of the encoder tracks can only be selected for terminal XE1 0 From terminal XE1 of the T400 1 From the BASEBOARD Bit 7 Source of the zero pulse can only be selected for terminal XE1 0 From terminal XE1 of T400 1 From the BASEBOARD XX The two most significant locations 7F means The standstill limit is corrected for 127 sampling cycles Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 1306 l 120 3 0317 l 120 3 3313 l 120 3 16 7FC2 W 120 3 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 SyncMode Encod_1 Initialization par Max Pulse Enc_1 Error Encoder 1 Error code Enc 1 S Pos SyncPulse S En Pos_2 Corr
151. able Controller H667 S EPC SetpEnable H668 S EPC calibrated H669 S EPCOM BA_local H670 S EPC option d671 EnablePosControl H672 S Brake_CU_off H673 S BrakeCUready H674 S Quick stop H675 S Brake_option d676 Release Brake H678 T_Brake close H679 T_Brake release d680 Enable from Brake H690 H692 S CB Fault 1 S CB Fault 3 H693 CB Fault Delay d694 CB Fault H695 H697 S CU Fault 1 S CU Fault 3 H698 CU Fault Delay d699 CU Fault H700 H702 S User Fault 1 S User Fault 3 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors Description Data Signal to enable the inverter Type Chart Signal to enable the setpoints for the inverter Type Chart Status of the general controller enable Type Chart Source of the 1 condition to enable the position controller assigned the general Value controller enable Type Chart Source of the 2 condition to enable the position controller assigned the status Value whether the shears are calibrated Type Chart Source of the 3 condition to enable the position controller This is assigned as Value standard with the No local mode signal Type Chart Source of the 4 condition to enable the position controller optional This is used for Value linear systems to inhibit the position controller while positioning Type Chart Position controller enable status Type Chart Sou
152. able logic refer to Chart 400 Mask for a reset function of the 5 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to Chart 400 Mask for a reset function of the 5 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to Chart 400 Sources for the digital input signals of the 6 parameterizable logic Masks for 4 setting functions of the 6 parameterizable logic refer to Chart 400 Mask for a reset function of the 6 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to Chart 400 Mask for a reset function of the 6 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to Chart 400 Source of the error bits to display faults and alarms Fault sources in the factory setting BitO 0694 Communications via CB Bit1 0699 Communications to the basic drive Bit2 0000 Not assigned Bit3 0704 User error 1 Bit4 0705 User error 2 Bit5 0682 Knife position lower than the lower limit value Bit6 0103 Overspeed knife positive Bit7 0104 Overspeed knife negative Bit8 0116 Knife drive blocked Bit9 0125 Pulse encoder error speed actual value isn t plausible Bit10 0521 External fault 1 Bit11 0522 External fault 2 Bit12 0684 Knife position is greater than the upper limit value Bit13 0443 Material position is less than the lower limit value Bit14 0157 Error absolute value encoder TR encoder Bit15 0000 Not assigned Mask to enable fault trips The mask is ANDed with the fault bits d968 H950ff Mask to enable alarm messages The mask is ANDed with the fault bits
153. aceS users ee RR RR AR AR ER RR EER G ERA AR RR RR EER E Gee RR ARE RR RE EE 18 3 1 Technology module TA400 i hressir E ERK KEEE EER EE EE END R ERENS A a 18 3 1 1 Digital inputs and outpDUtS sesse RA aa 20 3 1 2 Analog inputs and outDUS esse AA RE 21 31 3 die ele SR a a aa 23 3 1 4 Communication interfaces siinses AR AA ke Ad ek ee 27 3 1 4 1 Peer to peer interface iss AR Re ek ee 27 31 42 USS slave IME aCe EE cesar EER RES EE RE LER EI FREE EER RE RE PERE RED Ee See 27 3 143 Diagnostics inte AGE srir RENE EE EER ER GEE EE Ee Ene 28 Lee SIE SA RA RE N ae ee dittneee 28 3 2 Communications Module EE EE EES EER EE ERGE EE ER ER ER EE ER ER ER ED ER EL ER EE ee ee ee Ee ee Pe ees 29 3 3 Interface to the basic drive CU ee de aa AA ee 32 ee Faults We IE EO EE EE OE satin 35 4 Function description SEE EE GE EE GESE EE N GE GE ED ER eta ee Ee ed ed 36 4 1 Normalization operati0ONS iese RA Re ee ke ee de eke ee 36 4 2 Setpoints and actual values iii ee ee cece ke ee ee ee ee dd ee ke ee ee ee ee ek ee 36 4 2 1 Gontrol words EE ER WE aa GR ER RE ER SE Ee RR EG ER Ee DE ER EE RD ER EE Ee De ER EE Re Gee a a 37 A222 OUS WOLOS EE EE ER ER EE a AE B EE ER EG Re ee A EG Ee Re Ee EG ER EG ER ee ee Ee 39 4 3 Mode of operation ee RA AA a aani aaa a Re Ad aaa enakan 40 4 4 Plant geometry and motion seduenCeS ee RA AA ee ee ee 40 4 4 1 Systems with rotary aXiS iss ee eed ee RA ee de RR ee dd de RA ee
154. ag Coarse reteronce Krite atthe coarse reference ma Pio scrwa10 Notdeines OOOO S Pix sewan Notdeines OOOO Pia scrwas noaei CS Pia scrwaa Notdeines OOOO 38 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 2 2 Status words Table 4 7 Open loop control status Chart 510 eit Assignment Fataar O O o toad TR encoder The absolute postion 1s requested fromthe TR encoder Ges 443 EE EE EE n Drive converter ready All of the prerequisites have been fulfilled for drive converter readiness Chart 360 Fi TR start fault The load output of the TR encoder does not respond to the load ESE OE TA ro fad Frequency No poston wack pulses during the Toad operation for TR encoder o TRicadtime Maximum loadtime ofthe TR encoder exceeded 15 Inverter enabled Power off delayed drive converter operating signal to control a motor fan also refer to H998 Table 4 8 Status of the shears Chart 520 ee sowe rsono OOOO O o Perm assigned Kesawa SSS e Perm assigned Zero puise krite entendedio 100ms pe Hee awe SSS pe Hao eek SSCS Os OOS Os oo O Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 39 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 3 Mode of operation All of the applications considered involve synchronizing the motion of a cutting device to a moving material web whereby the cut must be made at a precisely defined position on this mater
155. al position Reference Pos S RefPosFactor d438 H439 3001 KR 70 2 KR3438 Reference position KR3441 Ref pos offset S Ref Pos Ofiset H440 3001 KR 70 2 KR3442 Ref pos offset S MarkPulsUp H465 0420 B 130 6 S MarkPulsDown H466 0000 number of marks 1 Counter status Pass mark status Up pulse Down pulse Pass mark counter H467 0434 B 130 6 H468 0000 B 70 2 Set H469 2000 K 70 2 Reset counter at upper limit PM maximum counter status zero Set value counter at lower limit PM minimum Upper limit Lower limit ee e WindowPassmark 0 05 H366 S Compare4 Range L597 3366 KR3366 KR 140 2 S Compare4 L595 3437 KR 135 5 S Compare4 Mid L596 3204 KR 180 7 Synchronization is enabled within a window close to the expected synchronization position For the first mark synchronization is always enabled until the first mark was detected Compare4 Hyst 0 0 S EnableMark_1 H363 0449 B 135 3 Compare4 X gt Y Compare4 X Y iade by Mark within window B1363 Compare4 X lt Y S EnableMark_2 H364 0000 S EnSynchrRe H360 1363 S EnSynchrRe H361 0576 S EnSynchrRe H362 0007 B 70 2 Enable pass mark synchronization Ee i N NEE EE ENE GEE EEN EE NEE EE EN 7E Position sensing Suppressing pass marks position dependent Sheet cutter Cut to Length V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd
156. ange Significance to the cut which is effective Number of cuts Number of cuts for the cut program 2 16384 Cutting force The cutting force is switched in in a defined 1N 16384 N angular range during the cut Master velocity Material velocity for operating situations where 17s 32 767 Vs there is no material at the measuring wheel 1966 02 min geese EE IN 1 Control word 1 Control word 1 for the drive converter refer to Table 3 16 Control word 2 Control word 2 for the drive converter refer to Table 3 23 Shears control Inputs for the open loop control of the closed loop words cut to length refer to Table 3 15 and Table 3 16 Table 4 4 Actual values of the standard software package for the automation Setpoint Significance Une Rage Material velocity Measured value for the material velocity Tye 32 767 s 1966 02 min Knife speed Knife speed referred to the reference speed Reference speed 32768 32767 16384 Current actual Current actual value referred to the reference Reference current 32768 32767 value current 16384 Torque actual Speed controller output in the drive converter Reference torque 32768 32767 value 16384 Status word 1 refer to Table 3 17 N N Status word 2 refer to Table 3 18 N N Shears status refer to Table 4 8 EEN EE 4 2 1 Control words The standard software package uses 4 control words e Control word 1 and control word 2 for the CU refer to Table 3 16
157. aoe f Table 3 7 e Filtering the trac signals erer iotabe dn e Defining the standstill limit e Behavior when setting the position H428 130 Synchronization settings encoder 2 e Position correction for a zero pulse e Coarse pulse evaluation H430 130 Maximum pulses encoder 2 if this value is not equal to zero the position is reset after H430 position pulses Table 3 7 Incremental encoder sensing modes factory setting highlighted Bit s Designation Encoder type Type 1 Two encoder tracks shifted through 90 Type 2 One track for each direction of rotation do not use Filter for encoder tracks No filter 500 ns for encoder type 1 2 us 8 us 16 us otherwise no permissible Behavior when setting the position Position Setting value Position Position setting value Behavior when setting the position 0 Pos diff position difference setting value difference 1 Pos diff pos diff pos diff setting value Source of the encoder tracks this from terminals 81 82 of the T400 can only be selected for a 1 from the basic drive backplane bus Source of the zero pulse track for from terminals 83 of the T400 encoder 1 from the basic drive converter backplane bus Measuring interval for standstill 4 1 cycles without position change identification in cycles After 4 4 127 cycles without position change selected value without position encoder change the speed goes to 0 Sheet Cutter Cut
158. applications as baseboard if required with another technology board In this case all of the parameter numbers shift by 1000 downwards P123 is obtained from H123 etc Password to establish the factory settings If this parameter is set to 165 then all of the parameters are set to the status when the equipment was originally supplied CAUTION This procedure cannot be undone Change status of the standard configured software 0 Parameters were changed 1 Factory settings Computer utilization sorted according to time sectors 1 0 means 100 utilization The utilization of fast time sectors is included in the utilization of slow time sectors Reserved for automatic identification of a SIMADYN D module by SIMOVIS Sources for the 16 bits which are transferred to the COMBOARD as status word1 Sources for the 16 bits which are transferred to the COMBOARD as status word2 L036 0 Cams may be shifted even passing position step saw toth function of the position with rotary axis L036 1 Cams will be automatically reseted when the input position steps over the end of the saw tooth fucntion If the cam controller actual position value change is more than L037 and is contrary to the actual sense of rotation this is interpreted as position setting operation rather than a reversal Two sources for subtracting an offset value for the input position of the cam controller Source for the position actual value for the cam controller
159. apt the software to the particular system examples refer to Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden The closed loop cut to length is generally controlled from a higher level supervisory automation system This system can control the closed loop cut to length using a few transparent system quantities such as format length number of cuts or operating mode All of the values obtained velocity profiles or statuses are internally generated and normally do not have to be adapted For the automation system there are five cutting operating modes continuous cutting cutting program a defined number of cuts can be made single cut test cut cut a sheet i e make 2 cuts final cut cut the end of the material The knife motion is calculated online from actual data entries and measured values Thus setpoints can be changed when required from cut to cut This means for example that the cut length can be changed in operation without having to shutdown the system or generate waste The cutting speed is limited by the drive technology used especially the moment of inertias The closed loop cut to length operates from plant standstill up to the maximum speed If speeds are changed when cutting these are automatically taken into account When required when cutting the knife can be moved faster than the material The forces which occur influence the appearance of the cutting edges and move the cut sheet away from t
160. are selected using the bits of a mask Chart 420 2 3 which are set to 1 The low word of the mask selects the non inverted the high word the inverted input Example Logic3_MS1 16 300F 0011 0000 0000 1111b gt AND logic operation 1 setting condition IG e I5 14 13 e12 e I1 Masks for 3 reset functions of the 3 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to L869 Type W and Chart 400 Chart 420 2 3 Source of the 1 free single shot function input Value 0000 Type Chart 436 4 Pulse duration of the 1 free single shot function Value 0 ms Type Chart 436 5 Source of the 1 free single shot function input Value 0000 Type Chart 436 4 Pulse duration of the 2 free single shot function Value 0 ms Type Chart 436 5 Mask to select the inputs which reset the 4 parameterizable block refer to L860 Type W Chart 420 7 Sources for the digital input signals of the 4 parameterizable logic Type Chart 420 5 Masks for 4 setting functions of the 4 parameterizable logic refer to L869 and Chart Type W 400 Chart 420 6 7 Masks for 3 reset functions of the 4 parameterizable logic evaluation refer to L869 Type W and Chart 400 Chart 420 6 7 Source of the 3 free single shot function input Value 0000 Type Chart 436 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter L897 T_Single Shot_3 L898 S OnDelay2 L899 T_OnDelay2 L900 CB A
161. are the zero pulses 26 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 14 Communication interfaces 3 1 4 1 Peer to peer interface The standard software package includes a peer to peer interface which is used for fast data transfer with other modules e g an additional T400 This interface has the following pre setting Table 3 9 Data to the peer to peer interface Monitoring time limit in operation L067 Monitoring time limit after power up L077 Number of process data receive and send each 5 PZD The other parameters and connectors are described in function chart 780 Caution In order to eliminate data transfer faults the terminating resistors of the interface used must be switched in switch S1 3 to S1 6 refer to 4 3 1 4 2 USS slave interface Serial interface 1 RS232 RS485 can be used as an alternative for parameterization or as diagnostics interface The parameterization is provided for the special case that the T400 is operated in the SRT400 When used in the basic drive parameterization is realized via the basic drive The following settings are required for USS slave operation refer to function chart 770 Table 3 10 Settings for USS slave operation factory factory setting Value Factory Significance setting L920 pa o Enable the USS slave L921 9600 Baud rate OP1S 9600 or 19200 L922 a ee Slave address on the USS bus
162. arse reference in the shears control word 2 Hardware Pass mark detecting respectively zero pulse shear drive rotary axis 65 T1 180 Light barrier signal to set the reference position 240 Light barrier signal to input the cutting torque 3 1 2 Analog inputs and outputs Inputs The analog inputs are scaled in the factory setting so that a terminal voltage of 5 V is emulated internally as 1 0 This pre setting is changed using scaling factors and offsets The following is valid for analog inputs Scaling Analog value terminal voltage scaling factor 5 V offset The integration of analog inputs into the standard software package and the associated parameters and connectors is shown in function chart 90 Generally a smoothing element is connected after the analog inputs in the software This smoothing function can be de activated by setting the filter time constant to 0 ms The control can set the output signal to zero inhibit ET T terminal 20k 20k T400 C e C terminals 20k 5 ii e j i 10nF 20k ae Analog inputs AE1 AE2 Analog inputs AE3 AE4 AES Fig 3 4 Analog input circuit Outputs The T400 has two analog outputs which are processed in the fastest sampling time T1 The output quantity is selected per parameter The outputs have a filter which can be parameterized and which the control can
163. art 540 7 d068 L968 5402 Reference pulses 1 d069 L969 5422 Reference pulses 2 d070 L970 5061 Peer DW1 d071 L971 5063 Peer DW2 Source for the angle at which the knife no longer is in contact with the material Value 3101 Type Chart 60 3 Source for the angle at which the knife comes in contact with the material Value 3102 Type Chart 60 3 Source for the clearance in mm between the light barrier and knife Value 3106 Type Chart 60 3 Source for the distance in mm between the light barrier and cut Value 3107 Type Chart 60 3 Source for the crop length in mm If a crop cut is enabled a sheet is cut withthe Value 3110 crop length at the start of the material web Type Chart 60 3 Source for the Long Format in mm The Long Format is a cut length which is long Value 3111 enough that the knife must wait in the quiescent position between two cuts also at Type the reference speed of the material web Chart 60 3 Normalization factor to enter and display knife coordinates For application with rotary Value 360 0 axis use 360 0 angular degrees for systems with linear axis enter Fsymech Type R H105 Chart 60 3 Rotary axis Angle at which the knife no longer is in contact with the material Value 20 0 Linear axis 0 0 Type R Chart 60 3 Rotary axis Angle at which the knife comes into contact with the material Value 340 0 Linear axis Distance from the starting position where the knife must run in Type R synch
164. ate positioning Sources the factory settings are in brackets L331 de activation signal 0665 no_enable L332 optional abort condition 0644 in_start position L333 start condition 1 0576 cutting mode L334 start condition 2 e g cut completed knife raised or similar L335 optional L336 end of condition 1 0499 positioning setpoint generator active L337 end of condition 2 1347 positioning mode L338 optional start condition 0236 material_cut Conditions to start positioning L339 0x008C material cut AND cut completed AND cutting mode Conditions for exiting the positioning mode L343 0x2040 positioning_no_longer_active AND positioning_mode L346 0x0003 no enable OR optional abort condition Behavior if the knife slide does not return to the starting position in time for the next cut cause format too short velocity too high or cut type too long The reference format size can no longer be maintained L196 1348 delays the start of the new cut until positioning has been completed t End of the settings for return positioning Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Examples H481 lt H478 5 m s 500 s mm 500 1 s 25000 1 s3 151 Typical commissioning Cutting operation control Start cutting with STATE_logic2 Chart 415 Define the prerequisites for the start of cutting The inputs and the logical equations to initiat
165. be received within this time Status Data receive via peer to peer interface was able to be correctly initialized Status of the receive condition of the peer to peer interface refer to the SIMADYN D communication error messages 3 and CFC online help Caution The status word is a coding of the operating status It cannot be interpreted bitwise The value does not have to be constant 0 in regular operation e g 16 6003 if new data are not available in each cycle Status Sending via the peer to peer interface was able to be correctly initialized Source for 5 process data for output at the peer to peer interface Setting of L085 observe L086 Mask to suppress specific bits of the peer receive status word Setting Interrupt communications withdraw the cable and evaluate c894 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 3040 l 380 3 0001 BO 380 5 0 BO 380 5 360 0 R 380 7 0 0 R 380 8 R 380 1 2 380 3 4 380 5 6 380 7 8 19200 DI 780 1 790 2 BO 780 1 100 ms 780 1 BO 780 4 780 4 BO 780 4 l 790 5 16 FFFF w 780 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903
166. be used as coarse pulse input for encoder2 material Logic signal level at terminal 46 bi directional If the associated output driver is activated H265 1 the inverse signal level is read Logic signal level at terminal 47 bi directional If the associated output driver is activated H266 1 the inverse signal level is read Logic signal level at terminal 48 bi directional If the associated output driver is activated H267 1 the inverse signal level is read Logic signal level at terminal 49 bi directional If the associated output driver is activated H268 1 the inverse signal level is read Defines the driver direction for the bi directional digital terminal 46 0 Input 1 Output Defines the driver direction for the bi directional digital terminal 47 0 Input 1 Output Defines the driver direction for the bi directional digital terminal 48 0 Input 1 Output Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 0 ms SD 95 2 95 4 0 0 95 4 1 0 95 5 3414
167. both values are identical H107 ee EE Knife movement and material flow direction are identical Hits 15 SizeMeas Wheel Measuring wheel circumference Ed 17 10 mm Feed Revolution Spindle pitch This is used to normalize the knife position and velocity refer to Chart 80 H120 1 Mode LinearAxis Linear axis The knife position is not reset to 0 when cutting GET 22 Distance material Distance between the light barrier and the end of the accelerating range from here onwards the knife is located above the cutting position H197 3441 S SV Startlength Shifting the web coordinate system Thus the distance to light L201 3168 S RefPos Limit barrier is related to the start position of the knife 56 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Mode of operation Knife in the cutting range Knife at the bottom Knife at the top Lower knife Raise knife Positioning Material position Start length Speed knife drive End of range Position knife Start position Function description The knife or the saw waits in the starting position until the material has reached the starting length After this the knife accelerates From the end of the acceleration onwards it moves in synchronism with the material The knife is now lowered and cuts through the material After this the knife is lifted and as soon as it is located above the material is returned to its starting position
168. by the synchronous format The reference pulse number is automatically Chart calculated from the plant system parameters as standard refer to Chart 80 Source for the signal to set the material position Value Type Chart Source for the signal to correct the material position For a positive edge at the Value Correct signal input the Position correction value is subtracted from the actual Type material position Chart Source for the signal to enable material position synchronization Value Type Chart Source for the position setting value of the material position Value Type Chart Source for the position correction value of the material position For a positive edge at Value the Correct position input the position correction value is subtracted from the actual Type position Chart Setting for the synchronization type of the material speed sensing Value Type ngs refer to H408 Settings refer to H408 Chart Setting of the material speed sensing mode Value Type ngs refer to H407 Settings refer to H40 Chart Automatic position overflow generation For more than H430 pulse edges 4x pulses Value in one direction of rotation the material position is reduced by the value H430 Type reference pulses and the Maximum position exceeded output is set to 1 for one Chart processing cycle The function is enabled by H430 gt 0 Source for the pass mark position This position is used as setpoint for the offset Value cor
169. c type linear ramp with rounding off H117 Feed of the knife slide per motor revolution Parameters for the knife position H197 3441 Shift the material coordinate system to the knife quiescent position L201 3168 Shift the coordinate system for Starting length H451 3662 Format range for the linear axis H642 Tolerance bandwidth for identifying knife in the starting position refer to H105 refer below H715 Lowest position value of the knife slide in the range in mm recommended 0 H717 Highest position value of the knife slide in operation in mm H718 Knife position monitoring tolerance in mm H719 Source to enable position monitoring errors factory setting Only for cutting operating modes L574 3617 Decrease velocity to zero at the end of traversing Distance normalization H105 Fsymech accelerating travel at max material velocity H100 H105 H102 H105 2 Formula Xacc eS with Vmax max material velocity 2 Amax Amax max acceleration of the knife slide aoe H154 Acceleration travel type 0 H105 gt Xacc 1 H105 gt 2 Xacc 2 H105 gt 1 1 Xacc Caution In order to avoid rounding off errors for the position distance sensing H105 must be set a multiple of the measuring wheel resolution Example From Xacc H105 gt 45 mm is obtained Measuring wheel circumference 400 mm Pulses revolution measuring wheel 4 2048 8192 Resolution measuring wheel 0 04883 mm
170. cance assignment crn e ez romou niasin OO 6 7 PZD7 from CU Current actual value referred to the reference current for 610 700 optional usage e Pzbatrom CU Notassioned o o Table 3 21 Status word 1 from the basic drive chart 620 e neme oo EEN S SSS o Cusanus 10 Not ready topowerup Reay to powerup e Cusanus 1 6 Powerup possible Powerup imi e Cusanus 1 8 Setpoint actual value deviation No seipoint actual value deviation Ps cUstaus1s may nores PZD 12 CU status 1 12 Request main contactor not Request energize main contactor energized CU status 1 13 Ramp function generator not active Ramp function generator active CU status 1 14 Negative speed setpoint Positive speed setpoint Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 33 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 22 Status word 2 from the basic drive chart 620 Bi tall gt A energization ended active e CUsiatus 26 No overioad alarm Alarm drive converter overload overtemperature overtemperature overtemperature overtemperature CU status 2 14 Reserved Reserved CU status 2 15 Pre charging not active Pre charging active Table 3 23 Control word 2 for the basic drive chart 630 ek Significance sege id o saec trcion sase o Jo oS i Seect tinction daa ses o o oo EN Ed B a Select inedseipon mo ooo s saec ed seron Bet oo o o ooo e fes o ooo e Enabl
171. ce for the offset value to determine the friction refer to Chart 460 L500 Source for the evaluation factor of the moment of inertia characteristic refer to Chart 460 Moment of inertia Output_characteristic e f L503 f L504 Source for the offset value to calculate the moment of inertia refer to Chart 460 L503 Sources for the normalization factors of the friction characteristic Initiate re calculation of the friction characteristic with a positive edge at L507 set L507 0 L507 1 Order of the curve segments of the friction characteristic 0 3 order 2 2 order 1 1 order straight lines 3 3 order more rounded off than for L508 0 Mask to define the linear curve segments bit by bit LM1 involves the segments between points X1 and X16 LM2 the subsequent segments Example LM1 0000 0000 0000 1001 2 The point 1 and point 2 as well as 4 and 5 are connected through a straight line independent of the selected curve type L508 Sources for the normalization factors of the moment of inertia characteristic Initiate re calculation of the moment of inertia characteristic with a positive edge at L507 set L513 0 L513 1 Order of the curve segments of the moment of inertia characteristic 0 3 order 2 2 order 1 1 order straight lines 3 3 order more rounded off than for L508 0 Mask to define the linear curve segments bit by bit LM1 involves the segments between points X1 and X16 LM2 th
172. ce of the control signal which is used to start the load operation reading in the absolute position of a TR encoder Source for the enable condition to read in the absolute position of a TR encoder Factory setting Data can only be read in with the inverter inhibited Source of the knife standstill identification for the error evaluation of the TR encoder While the absolute position is being read in a speed which differs from zero must be measured TR encoders generate pulse trains on the incremental encoder tracks Source for the general enable of the TR encoder Status of the request to transfer the absolute position of a TR encoder The signal remains at 1 throughout the complete load operation Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 0 01 R 490 4 3325 l 490 1 0 8 R 490 4 1000 ms SD 490 6 BO 490 7 BO 500 4 3319 l 500 1 3411 l 500 1 R 500 3 0 1 R 500 3 BO 500 5 0150 l 500 4 10s SD 500 6 BO 500 7 0584 l 165 4 0000 l 165 1 0000 l 165 1 0663 l 165 1 0460 l 165 1 0090 l 165 3
173. cutter Tasks which have been executed examples cut to length T1 1 6 ms Closed loop position control Setpoint input for the CU Cam group Pass mark detecting T3 12 8 ms Open loop control Communications with automation Free function blocks exceptions see charts 425ff Slow control tasks and monitoring functions 204 8 ms Parameter handling 28 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 2 Communications module The communications module forms the interface to the higher level automation of the closed loop sheet cutter control Generally a PROFIBUS module CBP is inserted at slot G in the electronics box of the drive converter lower center slot Other communication modules are possible as long as they behave like a CBP with respect to the T400 e g CB1 All of the CBP settings e g bus address are realized via the parameters of the CU The automation can read and change the process data PZD and parameters PKW on the T400 via the communications network The telegram from the automation system comprises 4 words for parameterization and up to 10 PZD The pre assignment is specified in the following tables Regular reception at the communications interface is monitored chart Monitoring 660 If a fault error develops alarms or faults can be output Pre setting At the latest after 20 s H929 after power up the first valid telegram must be receiv
174. ddress L901 L913 CB Param 1 CB Param 13 L914 CB Config set c915 CB Config State L940 L947 S Display R1 S Display R8 L948 L951 S Display W1 S Display W4 L956 L959 S Display l1 S Display 14 L964 L967 S Display B1 S Display B4 L968 L971 S Display DIT S Display D14 L990 USS Enable Initialization par L991 USS Baud Rate L992 USS Address Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual Edition 09 00 6DD1903 0DB0 Parameters and Connectors Description Data Pulse duration of the 3 free single shot function Value Type Chart Source for the 2 switch on delay Value Type Chart 2 switch on delay time Value Type Chart Slave address of the communications module for operating T400 in the SRT400 Value Type Chart Parameter set for the communications module when operating the T400 in the Type SRT400 Refer to the Documentation of the communications module used for the Chart significance of the individual parameters A change only becomes effective after a 021 edge for L914 If a parameter for the communications module is changed L901 ff it becomes Type effective after a 021 edge for L914 Chart Status of the configuration of the communications module 0 OK Type 16 7CB3 configuration is not effective as the drive converter is configuring the Chart module Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d040 d047 floating point typ
175. direction of rotation L527 Speed for jogging negative direction of rotation L528 Source to select the direction of rotation when jogging 2 3 8 Approaching the knife change position This function is used to bring the knife to a specific mechanical position The knife is moved to this position through the shortest possible path whereby generally the cutting range does not have to be passed through Cutting cannot be started from the knife change position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 17 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 Hardware components and interfaces 3 1 Technology module T400 Feature __Dataandexplanations Subrack e Operation in the electronic boxes of the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive converters with the exception of the Compact Plus type of construction and SIMOREG DC Master SRT400 subrack Operation without fan up to an ambient temperature of 55 C Software protection Application specific hardlock PALs available this is required when using the standard software package Analog outputs No 2 Range 10 V 12 bit resolution Analog inputs No 5 2 differential inputs 3 non floating inputs Range 10 V 12 bit resolution Digital inputs No 8 Interrupt capable 4 Voltage 24 V DC rated voltage Digital outputs No 2 Voltage 24 V DC rated voltage Current max 50 mA Bi directional inputs No 4 outputs digital Current voltage refer to digital inputs outpu
176. e Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 3098 220 2 0575 220 2 3436 220 2 20 ms 220 4 0 0 220 5 0 0 220 5 0577 220 3 220 6 220 7 3414 220 2 3114 220 2 3577 265 1 0413 265 1 0 0 265 3 0 0 265 3 0169 265 4 3000 220 2 600 ms SD 265 2 3159 265 5 3000 220 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter d196 Cutting Error H197 S RefPos Limit H198 RefPos max H199 RefPos min H200 S EnFormatCtrl H201 S AX_Formatgen H202 S AY_Formatgen H203 S AZ_Formatgen H210 Al1 Scale Factor H211 Al1 Offset H212 Al1 Time Constant H213 S Disable Al1 d214 Al1 smoothed H215 Al2 Scale Factor H216 Al2 Offset H217 Al2 Time Constant H218 S Disable Al2 d219 Al2 smoothed H220 S Analog Output 1 H221 S Disable AO1 Parameters and Connectors Description Cutting error in mm This value is valid only if the knife position and the reference position are known exactly for the cutting instant Faults of the reference position sensing can not be corrected e g slip of the measuring wheel Source for the position actual value for the format generator if this value is to be
177. e This Type allows connector values to be displayed where no monitoring parameter is Chart configured Source Display Source Display L940 d040 L944 044 L941 d041 L945 d045 L942 d042 L946 d046 L943 d043 L947 d047 Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d048 d051 word type This allows Type connector values to be displayed where no monitoring parameter is configured Chart Source Display Source Display L948 d048 L950 d050 L949 d049 L951 d051 Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d056 d059 integer type This allows Type connector values to be displayed where no monitoring parameter is configured Chart Source Display Source Display L956 d056 L958 d058 L957 d057 L959 d059 Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d064 d067 BOOL type This allows Type connector values to be displayed where no monitoring parameter is configured Chart Source Display Source Display L964 d064 L966 d066 L965 d065 L967 d067 Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d068 d071 double word type This allows Type connector values to be displayed where no monitoring parameter is configured Chart Source Display Source Display L968 d068 L970 d070 L969 d069 L971 d071 Enables the USS slave functionality to operate the T400 in the SRT400 with OP1S Value Switch S1 8 must be simultaneously set to ON The activation deactivation only Type becomes effective after the module is reset For USS operation it is no longer Chart
178. e c208 Source for the distance between the light barrier and knife to calculate the material position when passing the light barrier when activating cutting operation Indicates that the system is waiting for the end of the material web in the End cut operating mode Status of the control signal is to set the material position Source for the distance between the pass marks sensed by the light barrier and the knife Source for the control signal Operating mode for the 1 cut If this signal is 0 then a sheet is cut already at the 1 cut in accordance with the format specifications Source for the control signal to enable the crop cut When the crop cut is enabled at the 1 cut a sheet with the crop length is cut This allows a clean cut edge at the start of the material web Source for the control signal No cutting operation to generate a pulse to set the material position Source for the signal to identify the strip to set the material position Factory setting Connected to terminal 65 Source for the signal to enable the end cut operating mode to set the material position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart
179. e a cut are specified Operation must always be enabled General conditions automatic cut 1 Cutting mode must be active 2 The knife must be in synchronism with the material 3 A cut has still not been made so that cuts aren t made a multiple number of times one after the other Optional conditions automatic cut 4 The knife is located within the permitted lowering range this takes into account that there is sufficient time to raise the knife Manual cut in the automatic mode A manual cut is initiated with the material running by setting the material position to the starting length value refer below The start of the cut is obtained from the conditions 1 to 5 above If the material is stationary this could be confusing for operating personnel as the cut would only be made when the material web starts to move again Thus if the material web is stationary immediately make a manual cut Conditions 5 Material velocity 0 6 Cutting mode 7 Manual cut request 8 Knife in the quiescent position Conditions for a manual cut the cutting mode has been disabled 9 Request manual cut this should be in the form of a pulse which is available for at least as long as the cut lasts 10 Cutting mode not active 11 The material must be stationary Contact controlled knife at the Time controlled top knife at the bottom Define the sequence time for the cutting signal using free Reset the cutting logic wi
180. e above should be considered as an application example For each actual plant or system changes can be expected to take into account plant or system secondary conditions In order to be able to create as many different versions as possible logic functions are not implemented in the form of individual gates but as parameterizable logic refer to Chart 400 A parameterizable STATE logic block has 8 BOOLean inputs I1 18 which can be freely connected to BOOLean connectors e g to a digital input which signals knife at the top The type of logical combination is defined using mask entries Each mask selects which inputs or inverted inputs are to be AND ed Maskbit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Associated in l8 I7 l6 15 14 B3 12 A 18 17 ie IE 4 RB ayn put Example MR1 16 8106 1000 0001 0000 0110b 18 11 13 12 Fig 4 15 Assigning the selection mask bits to the inputs 4 set masks MS1 MS4 and 3 reset masks MR1 MR3 are available In addition using the MR mask the inputs can be selected which cause the internal flipflops to be reset Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 59 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 22 Input assignment for the raise knife function Chart 415 input Function Param value The folowing is usea 12 anual operation DOWN 1250 0000 Deactivated i
181. e multiturn encoder Correct the zero offset gt Move the kife to the required zero position gt L542 0 referencing velocity zero gt Initiate referencing shears control word 1 0x0050 gt Referencing completed shears control word 1 0x0000 gt Offset position value is saved CAUTION After commissioning has been completed it is not permissible to output any referencing command otherwise the zero setting will be changed For operation without automation set L631 to 0 Chart 810 i C End absolute value encoder Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 153 Typical commissioning TR encoder y TR absolute value encoders are incremental encoders which when requested output the actual absolute position as a sequence of pulses at tracks A and B refer to Chart 165 via binary input digital input load input of the encoder L158 1 enable operation with TR encoder L141 0592 read in the starting position with referencing request Connect connector 0148 with the encoder load input via the digital output Connect L140 with the digital input connected with the load output of the encoder End TR encoder Format controller vy Define the 1st cutting instant Connect H200 with the cutting pulse for rotary axis knife zero pulse 0413 Linear axis Rotary axis 3438 Present N
182. e speed controler droop o O O OoOo o Enable CU speed controler Contolererable o eertse Ce weeman oS 15 _ Checkback signal maincontator oS 34 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces 3 3 1 Faults and alarms A number of monitoring and diagnostic functions are implemented in the standard software package and the monitoring result is connected to a fault word d968 Using masks it is defined whether a fault bit is signaled to the CU as alarm H967 fault H966 or not at all chart 530 The alarms or fault signalled to the CU are displayed PMU e g A099 or F120 Further the drive converter shuts down when a fault is present Table 3 24 Bits of the fault word and associated faults and alarms chart 530 ei aarm Faun Faultsouce Possible causes A097 F116 Communications CB e No defective communications module e Incorrect bus address CU P918 e Incorrect module type configured for the bus master Old CU type e g CU2 log on T400 Else rive Notassned ra aror rio Usertaute 5 A102 F121 Knife position lt minimum e Knife pulse encoder or reference incorrectly value set e Setting function knife position sets negative position values e Limit value not adapted to the application A103 F122 Overspeed positive knife e Check limit value L101 L102 e Check speed normalization on T400 CU 7 A10
183. e subsequent segments Example LM1 0000 0000 0000 1001 2 The point 1 and point 2 as well as 4 and 5 are connected through a straight line independent of the selected curve type L514 Source of the velocity for the Jogging mode This value is negated and can be used as velocity for jogging in the opposite direction Fixed speed setpoint normalized for the Jogging mode 3 sources to enable the Jogging function for positive speeds Purpose Evaluating limit switches for linear systems Enable signals which are not used must be connected to 1 connector 0001 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 3533 260 6 3519 260 2 0 05 260 1 260 1 113 Parameters and Connectors Parameter Description Data L523 Source for the positive speed setpoint normalized for Jogging Value 3519 S JogSpeed1 Type Chart 260 1 L524 L526 3 sources to enable the Jogging function for negative speeds Purpose Evaluating Type S JogNegativ1 limit switches for linear systems Enable si
184. e1 L650 L665 Fixed value 1 Fixed value 16 L666 L670 Fixed value W1 Fixed value W5 L671 L678 Fixed value Int1 Fixed value Int8 L679 L684 Fixed value DIT Fixed value DI6 L685 L686 S NOP1 S NOP2 L687 L688 S Bool_NOP1 S Bool_NOP2 L689 L690 S AND5_1 S AND5_2 L691 L692 S AND6_1 S AND6_2 Parameters and Connectors Description Setting mask to activate the drives for simulation Refer to the programmable logic STATE in Function Chart 400 Mask to power down the drives for simulation Refer to the programmable logic STATE in Function Chart 400 Source for the word to binary converter to split up the simulated shears control word 1 into binary digital values Source for the word to binary converter to split up the simulated control word 1 into binary digital values 2 sources for the inputs of the 32bit integer changeover switch The output is selected with L642 Source for the signal to select the input at 32bit integer changeover switch 0 Source L640 1 Source L641 Source of the state machine logic for standalone operation of the T400 In factory setting this input is used to distinguish between cutting operation and approach start position 2 condition mask for terminating the cutting operation request of the state machine Source for the 2 free edge function input Source for a free integer to real converter Source
185. ed In operation a new telegram must be received every 100 ms H926 Table 3 13 Telegram from the automation system to the T400 optional not required for operation respectively fixed value used as setpoint word name Signficancelassignment chan me aap Me SSCS Sd pa wem Paramotor vave ighwors SSSCSC wSC r PWE Ly Parameter vaie ow word 6 Fz02 rom CB Master veel materalweb OO m e Pzb trom CB conws o o PzDs rom cB Acceleration J o PZD10 from Shear control word SCTW Table 3 15 670 270 CB Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 29 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 14 Telegram from the T400 to the automation system word Name _Significancelassignment crn BE Parameter OOO ef mw index SSCS e PWE CA Parametervalue grag OOOO S Os PWE Parameter value ow wore OOO e Pz02 C8 out material velocity factual valid m e F204 C8 out Saus wore 2 Taes oso e Pz05 C8 out Curent acualvaue roe sie Table 3 15 CB shear control word chart 680 Er Name comoro O signiicance tor T O o cascrwio noo NENEEEEEN EE Fs cescrwi e Referencing Request calibrateknite Fa cB SCTW1 8_ Approach staring postion Request approach staring position 10 CB SCTW1 10 Enable cutting program Cutting program is enabled the length setpoint is transferred with a
186. ed quantity is outside the range limits Source for the setting signal of the free RS flip flop 1 Source for the reset signal of the free RS flip flop 1 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 3001 l 350 1 3413 l 350 1 3000 l 350 1 BO 350 3 BO 350 3 3000 l 350 1 3413 l 350 1 3000 l 350 1 1 0 R 350 2 1000 mm R 350 2 0 0 R 350 2 0 0 mm R 350 2 BO 350 4 BO 350 4 3162 l 350 5 3438 l 350 5 3163 l 350 5 BO 350 7 350 7 BO 350 4 1277 l 430 1 0454 l 430 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter c241 Blocking nsetp c242 Blocking act Torque L243 L250 S Logic1 I1 S Logic1_ 8 L251 L254 Logic1 MS1 Logic1 MS4 L255 L257 Logic1 MR1 Logic1_MR3 L258 Logic1 MR C259 Logic1_Q L263 L270 S Logic2_I1 S Logic2 I8 L271 L274 Logic2_MS1 Logic2_MS4 L275 L277 Logic2 MR1 Logic2 MR3 L278 Logic2 MR c279 Logic2_Q L282 S AbsPos high L283 S AbsPos low
187. elay 2 switch off delay time Source for a 16 bit value which is broken down into individual bits connectors 0760 to 0775 2 sources for a double word which is converted into a floating point value L763 is the normalization i e the output value for the input value 16 40000000 Source for a 16 bit value which is to be converted into a floating point value L765 is the normalization i e the output value for the input value 16 4000 Source for a floating point value which is converted into type N2 L767 is the normalization i e the input value where the output 16 4000 8 16 bit test values for selection with L776 Source to select one of 8 16 bit test values L768 L775 8 16 bit test values for selection with L785 Source to select one of 8 16 bit test values L777 L784 Source for the summands of a free adder Source for the summands of a free adder Source for the inputs of a free subtractor X1 X2 Source for the inputs of a free subtractor X1 X2 Source for the inputs of a free multiplier Source for the inputs of a free multiplier Source for the inputs of a free divider X1 X2 Source for the inputs of a free divider X1 X2 2 sources for the inputs of the 3 free OR block Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart
188. endent on the knife position In this case position dependent changes of the knife geometry can be taken into account These characteristics can also be used for other application specific characteristics For shears with rotary axis the material feed is measured between two cuts The closed loop format controller can compensate deviations from the reference setpoint format When required the closed loop synchronous control can synchronize to pass marks which are located on the material The cut is then made at a defined distance from the pass mark The standard software package has numerous free functions which can be used to realize application specific open loop control tasks Especially for shears with linear axis secondary associated processes must be controlled open loop e g such as raising and lowering the knife positioning clamping the material nip position etc The closed loop cut to length includes numerous monitoring and plausibility functions In some instances they are permanently defined e g knife block protection plausibility of the knife speed in some instances they can be used application specific Each error fault condition can initiate an alarm or a fault to the drive converter Faults and alarms can be signaled to the automation system All of the most important quantities parameters of the closed loop control are available as monitoring parameters and can be displayed at parameterizing devic
189. ent symbols for connectors and BICO inputs are used in the function charts BICO parameter Name of the BICO Connector number Connector input name Connecting S enable Number of the j H681 0123 connected connector BOOLean values Status bit XY B 120 3 factory setting Data type symbol ype sy S control word Chart sector of source L430 2541 for the factory setting 16 bit values PZD_123 K 200 8 S double word P501 5021 32 bit values KK5021 gt CU doubleXY KK 60 2 S speed actual value L321 3155 Floating point values KR3155_ Speed KR 330 1 Connectors BICO inputs Fig 1 3 Symbols for connectors and BICO inputs Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Overview 1 3 3 Resources which are used to adapt the software and for start up Various resources are available which can be used to adapt the standard software package to the particular application Table 1 3 Adaptation and start up tools Name Explanation Input field for all MASTERDRIVES and DC Master units with 4 digit display PM OP1S Operator control device with numerical keypad and 4 line text display this can be directly connected at the PMU SIMOVIS Start up and parameterizing software for PC Windows This also provides an oscilloscope function for MASTERDRIVES MC CFC Graphic configuring tool which is used to generate the standard software package This is connected to the service interface o
190. er PZD4 L074 2000 K 70 2 S Peer PZD5 L075 2000 K 70 2 S Peer DW2 L081 5000 K 70 2 S Peer Float2 L084 3000 K 70 2 Process data Peer Sendtype1 transmission 0 L085 VA PZD 2 PZD3 Peer Sendtype2 0 nee PZD 4 PZD 5 VA Ee NN o e e a A EE EEN ER EE EN EN EG Optional communication FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Peer to peer process data Sheet cutter Cut to Length Factory setting Test data for control word 1 CTW1 S Testdata1_Sel L776 2000 Testdata1_1 K 70 2 16 847E L768 Testdata1_2 16 9C7F Testdata1_3 L769 16 057F sd Testdata1 4 16 067F Testdata1_5 ie Testdata1 16 84FE te Testdata1 6 0 Testdata1 7 L773 0 L774 AN Da WDM AO Testdata1_8 0 L775 Factory setting Test data for shear control word1 SCTW1 S Testdata2_Sel L785 2000 Contin t Testdata2_1 K 70 2 eS ON 16 0032 L777 Testdata2_2 Tested 1640034 j Testdata2 3 L778 Single cut 1640038 f Lue Testdata2_4 Referencing 16 0050 Testdata2_5 780 Approach start pos 16 0130 L781 Testdata2 Crop cut Testdata2_6 pou 1640810 Testdata2 7 L782 End cut 16 1010 L783 OO NOU BOND AO Testdata2 8 Cut program 16 0430 L784 Hs NEE NEE GENE ENE ENG ENE WEEN EES GEE EEN EE NEE EEN EEN Test operation FPlan SPS450evsd Function diagram ang Multiplexer selected fixed values Sheet cutter Cut to Length S ON StateMach 3 B0609 ON s
191. er ready B0663 Pulse disable B0662 Enable inverter EnableSetpoints d664 B0664 Enable setpoints Th B0665 Disable setpoints EnableController d666 MT B0666 Controller enabled B0667 Controller disabled ee ee a Control logic V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram Enable inverter setpoints controller 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S EPC SetpEnable EPC Enable Position Control H667 0666 B 360 7 S EPC calibrated H668 1310 B EnablePosControl S EPC OM_local d671 H669 0600 S EPC option H670 1346 B0671 Enable position controller B0670 Disable position controller Operation modes using position controller Shear standing in start position 340 7 OM approach start pos 290 8 OM approach knife chg pos 290 8 Cutting active 320 5 T_Brake close T_Brake release 200 ms 200 ms H679 EnableFrom Brake d680 Brake control logic S BrakeCUready ae 0660 B 360 5 B0680 Enable from brake control S Brake_CU_off ne 0344 B 620 4 S Quick stop Release brake k 0345 dere B 620 4 S Brake_option B0676 Release brake H675 0001 Control FPlan_SPS450e vsd er diagram sa Enable position controller brake control logic Sheet cutter Cut to Length Speed shear Web speed Speed2 L038 3413 KR 120 7 L039 3000 KR 70 2 Cam1_XA 0 5 Speed normalizations speed_norm_1 speed_norm_2 speed_norm_3 speed_norm_4 S ActPos Cam
192. es e g OP1S Quantities parameters which change quickly can be connected to analog outputs where they can then be tracked using an oscilloscope Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction 2 3 Operating modes Generally the sheet cutter is controlled open loop from a higher level supervisory automation system This has the advantage that many settings and inputs can be changed during operation This also means that the required closed loop control mode can also be defined The available operating modes are listed in the following table For all operating modes it is assumed that the drive converter is operationally ready If several operating modes are simultaneously selected the operating mode with the highest priority is set Thus a cutting operating mode can be interrupted by approaching the starting position A differentiation is made between steady state and latching functions Steady state functions are only executed as demanded by the automation system For latching functions a request pulse is sufficient which then triggers all of the additional sequences Table 2 1 Available operating modes sorted according to priority highest priority at the top Local operating modes Referencing The knife is moved with a constant velocity If the Steady state function reference position is passed the knife calibrated highest priorit highest priority status is set
193. es can also be used e g high resolution encoders It is important that the encoder module of the CU has an incremental encoder emulation function so that the encoder from the perspective of the T400 acts like an incremental encoder The selection and encoder mounting are decisive for the cutting accuracy of the system Thus the following points must be taken into account The position encoder for the knife should be mounted directly at the knife and not at the drive motor A gearbox located between the motor and knife results in inaccuracy as a result of the gearbox play The zero pulse must always be output at precisely the same knife position The material web position is sensed using a wheel with incremental encoder which is driven by the material which is to be cut As a result of slip between the feed drive and material significant measuring inaccuracy can result when sensing the position using the angle of the feed drive The resolution of the material position sensing must be 10 x higher than the required cutting accuracy This means that if a cutting accuracy of 1 mm is to be achieved then the encoder must provide at least 10 position encoder increments for a 1 mm material feed For the position sensing each edge of the position tracks is evaluated whereby the position resolution is quadrupled A 1024 pulse encoder generates 4096 edges per revolution Thus a position encoder increment is the same as the 1 4 pulse number
194. et masks Logic3_Q Logic3_QN Logic3_QE Logic3_QEN L868 0000 B 70 2 Reset masks MR3 MR L873 L874 L875 L860 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 Logic3_MR1 Logic3_MR2 Logic3_MR3 Logic3 MR STATE_Logic3 L888 0000 B 70 2 Logicd MS1 Logic4 MS2 Logicd MS3 Logic4_MS4 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 L889 L890 L891 L892 d t s y MS3 MS4 Set masks Logic4_Q Logic4_QN Logic4_QE Logic4_QEN Reset masks MR3 MR L893 L894 L895 L880 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 Logic4_MR1 Logicd MR2 Logic4 MR3 Logicd MR STATE Logic4 Ee NR NE ANN EE ENG NEE MEE HEG GEE EER EES ee Ka Free function blocks Parameterizable logic 2 V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Logic5_MS1 Logic5_MS2 Logic6_MS1 Logic6_MS2 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 H937 H938 H945 H946 MS2 di Set masks H933 0000 Logics Q 0000 B 70 2 aS Logic6_Q 2 H934 0000 0000 Logic6_QN B 70 2 Ia Logic6 OE H935 0000 QE 0000 B 70 2 Logic6_QEN H936 0000 B 70 2 MR H939 H940 H947 H948 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 Logic5_MR1 Logic5_MR Logic6_MR1 Logic6_MR Ee ER ES NEG ENE GEE EA WE EE ee ee Free function blocks FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Parameterizable logic 3 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Remark S AND1_1 The computation order of free function blocks charts
195. eter H154 and the position of the transition point AZ refer to Fig 4 2 The types of characteristics which are available are shown in the following table Type of Characteristics characteristic H154 0 Sinusoidal arc Format lt Fsymech Format gt Fsymech Vreteral gt RR XARA RASS QR ARR 1 Format gt Fsymech Linear ramps Vreteral 2 Linear ramps with rounding off Format gt Fsymech start and end each with 10 v of the V amplitude material Fig 4 6 Types of characteristics for the format generator The type of characteristic is selected depending on the particular application The smoother the transition of the velocity from acceleration into the cutting range then the more precise is the cut On the other hand linear ramps type 1 allow the best possible utilization of the motor torque Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 47 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 6 Systems with rotary axis The sub functions of the closed loop cut to length will be described using examples of plants and systems These will explain the basic settings of the closed loop control Detailed functions will then be described using case studies The solutions of detailed functions e g pass mark synchronization are principally valid for other system types as well also using linear axes 4 6 1 Drum type shears basic settings
196. etting functions of the mode changeover refer to Chart 400 The inputs which are ANDed are selected using the bits of a mask which are set to 1 The low word of the mask selects the non inverted the high word the inverted inputs Example ModeSwitch_MS1 16 300F 0011 0000 0000 1111b AND logic operation 1 setting condition I6 e l5e 14 e I3 e12 e 1 Masks for the 3 reset functions of the mode changeover evaluation refer to L339 and Chart 400 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart 0 0 ms SD 170 2 BO 170 5 1 0 170 3 0 0 170 3 170 7 120 1 0 0 170 3 1 0 170 3 3311 170 6 425 7 410 3 4 111 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L346 ModeSwitch_MR c347 Mode Positioning c348 Error Mode Switch L349 S Mode Error L350 L389 Friction_X1 Friction Y1 Friction X20 Friction Y20 L390 L429 n_Cut_X1 n_Cut_Y1 n_Cut_X20 n Cut Y20 L430 L469 Inertia_X1 Inertia_Y1 Inertia_X20 Inertia_Y20 L470 L489 P_X1 KP_Y1 KP X10 KP Y10 c490 KP_Diagr_Out
197. f the T400 Prerequisite STEP 7 D7 SYS Service IBS Simple start up and diagnostics tool for PPC DOS Windows This is also available as start up Telemaster for remote diagnostics The resources differ essentially by the intervention possibilities which is shown in the following table Table 1 4 Adaptation and start up tools Was AS Raa el had start up finsert block ys ne fe hoe mw CCS Delete block Change execution yes no no sequence run sequence Change the cycle time for yes no no processing Duplicate software yes Jno ne In ro Documentation charts a parameter no lists Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 9 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction 2 Introduction 2 1 Hardware configuration The drive unit comprises a SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive converter with integrated T400 technology module a communications board for connection to the automation system e g CBP and a three phase motor synchronous or induction Electronics box of the drive converter Process data and parameters 1 t 1 1 1 l 1 1 cuU CB 1 Basic drive Communications Technology module i i MasterDrives DC Master module i CB1 CBP l 1 1 1 l 1 l 1 1 1 I 1 Encoder emulation Position sensing Position sensing Position sensing knife drive knife material Fig 2 1 Typical hardware arrangement in the electronics box of a drive converter
198. f the inputs are also available inverted The associated parameters and connectors are obtained from function charts 100 and 110 P24 A T400 N T400 terminal 6k8 v terminal O e TT Pi D 22k i 68nF 10k pas Digital inputs Beg Coarse pulse inputs Digital outputs Fig 3 2 Circuit of the digital inputs and outputs P24 External 24 V power supply at terminal 45 P24 i A Drive enable os T400 terminal 6k8 Ps EE EL 22k it 68nF Bi directional inputs Bi directional outputs Fig 3 3 Circuit of bi directional digital inputs outputs P24 external 24 V power supply at terminal 45 The inputs can be used for any open loop control tasks The configured pre assignment can be taken from Table 3 2 It should be observed that the inputs are up dated in different sampling times Table 3 1 Pre assignment of the digital outputs Fault bi directional terminal driver activated with H265 1 ae n 10 Open brake bi dir term driver activated with H266 1 47 Motor fan on bi dir term driver activated with H267 1 20 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 2 Pre assignment of the digital inputs Terminal Sampling Chart Application time External fault alarm 1 in the shears control word 2 Jogging 1 in the shears control word 2 Jogging 2 in the shears control word 2 External fault alarm 2 in the shears control word 2 Co
199. format KR3094 Set value pass mark Act setpoint format 220 7 KR3205 Dist light format S OffsetSetValue L203 3006 KR 70 2 KR3206 Dist light format KR3203 Position close to set value First set value is different to the set value used with zero pulse synchronization setting S SV_SetValue L202 3000 KR 70 2 SetValue RefPos og c204 KR3204 Set value ref position WaitingForWebEnd c207 A B0207 Wait for end of web Set Ref Position c208 B0208 Set reference position ee we N 8 e Position sensing V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Set reference position 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Convert double word to floating point value normalizing to mm Format DW Norm S Format DW high H610 2807 K 670 3 S Format DW low H611 2806 K 670 3 0 1 mm H612 high low Format W Norm 1 mm H615 AE S SawBladeWidth H607 3606 KR 190 2 Format Word S Format Word d616 H614 2806 Range 0 65535 Saw Blade Width 0 0mm H606 Select special sheet 300 6 H626 3665 KR 70 3 Format setpoint valid SCTW1 4 270 8 Format request 190 8 Accept new format setpoint Xref_normalization 60 7 Format float d618 KR3618 gt Format float S FormatSelect H619 2001 K 70 2 S Format float H617 3664 KR 70 3 Format DW d613 KR3613 Format DW Format Word KR3621 KR3622 KR3623 K
200. format to be cut from the end of the material The setpoint for this sheet length is transferred when the operating mode is activated which means that it must already be available The format must be subatantial shorter than the clearance between light barrier and knife Ther must be enough time for accelerating the knife when the web end passes the light barrier This function is latching and is started with the rising edge of the request if the end of material web identification still detects the material web at this particular instant The cut is made with the active operating mode after the end of the material web is identified Request end cut Operating mode end cut Material web identification Knife speed in the cutting range at the start position Active operating mode Clearance light 1 Light barrier S barrier knife Knife ie End of web 4 y Web speed Possible format Format i pe EE a gt Web speed lt Format gt gt Fig 2 6 Timing in the end cut operating mode 2 3 6 Cut program 16 The cut program automatically manages a larger number of cuts The length and number of cuts is specified by the automation system The number of sheets to be cut is transferred with the control bit enable cut program refer to shear control words and the cutting operation is started The timing corresponds to that shown in Fig 2 3 only that for the cut program the cut reque
201. g L914 0 and L914 1 ee ee eee ee ON ES Optional communication FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram COMBOARD configuration Sheet cutter Cut to Length USS slave operation The USS slave coupling is required for visualizing or changing parameters using OP1S or SIMOVIS only if the T400 is working stand alone in the SRT400 rack For enabling set T400 switch S1 8 ON The switching becomes valid after the next power on Online communications with other service tools using the same interface e g CFC will be disabled If there is no access with OP1S caused by not supported parameter setting e g wrong baud rate set S1 8 OFF and use the Service IBS program to correct the parameters PZD1 USS PZD2 USS c995 USS Status Receive F c994 USS Enable 1 Enable Receive status USS Status L990 USS Baud Rate 9600 L991 Baud rate OP1S 9600 bps or 19200 bps Transmit S PZD1 USS Slave L997 2000 USS Address K 70 2 0 USS bus address L992 S PZD2 USS Slave L998 2000 USS 4 Wire Duplex half duplex operation 0 0 RS485 2 wires L993 1 RS232 4 wires EE NN RE e a A EE HENNE EE EE EE EE ee Optional communication FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram USS slave Sheet cutter Cut to Length Mask Peer Status tmax PeerPowerON 16 FFFF 20s L077 16 bit bitwise ANDed ie Endi PeerReceiveStat at least one bit 1 i Peer Timeout nable c078 LO66 Receive status B007 P i Peer Baud
202. g of the absolute value encoder has been completed Referencing status of the knife Setting value for the knife position for a negative knife speed Setting value for the knife position for a positive knife speed Actual setting value for the knife position 3 alternative sources to enable the knife position synchronization This means that synchronization is permitted as a function of the current operating mode Setting value for the knife position for the coarse referencing for a positive knife speed Setting value for the knife position for the coarse referencing for a negative knife speed Source set value for the shear position at zero pulse synchronization 2 sources for the inputs of OR gate 4 2 sources for the inputs of OR gate 5 Sources for the normalization factors for the cutting curve Initiates a re calculation of the cutting curve with a positive edge at L237 set L327 0 L327 1 Order of the curve sections of the cutting curve 0 3 order 2 2 order 1 1 order straight lines 3 3 order more rounded off than for L508 0 Mask to define linear curve elements bit by bit LM1 involves the sections between points X1 and X16 LM2 the subsequent sections Example LM1 0000 0000 0000 1001 2 The point 1 and point 2 as well as 4 and 5 are connected through a straight line independent of the selected curve type L328 Sources for the digital input signal of the mode changeover Masks for 4 s
203. gnals which are not used must be Chart 260 1 S JogNegativ3 connected to 1 connector 0001 L527 Source for the negative speed setpoint normalized for Jogging Value 3518 S JogSpeed2 Type Chart 260 1 L528 Source to select the direction of rotation in the Jogging mode Value 0594 S Jog1_Dir 0 Positive Type 1 Negative Chart 260 3 L529 Source to select the Jogging or Referencing mode Effect of the selected signal Value 0592 S Sel Ref Jog 0 Jogging1 Type 1 Referencing Chart 260 5 L530 Source for the status of the lefthand limit switch for automatic referencing Automatic Value 0000 S LimSwitch Start in this case means that the direction is reversed when the limit switch is reached Type Chart 260 1 L531 Source for the status of the righthand limit switch for automatic referencing Value 0001 S Limit Switch End Automatic in this case means that the direction is reversed when the limit switch is Type reached Chart 260 1 L532 Source for the signal to define the initial status when automatically referencing This Value 1312 S Init_Ref_Dir means that it can be ensured that the same direction of rotation is always used atthe Type start of referencing Chart 260 1 c533 Velocity setpoint for the local Jogging or Referencing modes Type R Speed Local Chart 260 5 L534 Source to select the knife velocity refer to Chart 260 signal values Value 0599 S Sel_SpeedLocal 0 Speed setpoint from the cutting mode type Type 1 Speed
204. he 32 bit absolute position All of the bits selected with 1 are evaluated Mask to select the valid bits of the low word of the 16 32 bit absolute position All of the bits selected with 1 are evaluated Source of the signal which signals the validity of the position value from the absolute value encoder Source for the Absolute position valid signal to reference the knife Source for the signal to enable the direction dependent reference position When this function is enabled for a positive speed L312 is set as reference position and for a negative speed L311 Source for the synchronizing pulse to reference the knife Source for the Knife position has exceeded the permissible range signal The signal is used to reset the status Knife is calibrated Source for the Knife position has fallen below the permissible range signal The signal is used to reset the status Knife is calibrated Source for the coarse reference pulse to set the knife position when referencing with the jogging function to the coarse reference value Source for the jogging signal in order to set the knife position to the coarse reference value when referencing Source for an optional setting pulse to set the knife position Source for the setting value of the knife position when referencing to the coarse reference value or when using an absolute value encoder not for TR encoders Type Chart Value Type
205. he inputs of the 1 free AND block Type Chart 3 sources for the inputs of the 2 free AND blocks Type Chart 2 sources for the inputs of the 1 free changeover switch The output is selected Type using L708 Chart Source for the signal to select the input at changeover switch 1 Type 0 Source L706 Chart 1 Source L707 Source for the 1 free edge detection block Value Chart 3 sources for the inputs of the 1 free OR logic block Type Chart 3 sources for the inputs of the 2 free OR logic block Type Chart 2 sources for the inputs of the 2 free changeover switch The output is selected Type using L718 Chart Source for the signal to select the input at changeover switch 2 Value 0 Source L716 Type 1 Source L717 Chart Source for the input signal of the ramp function generator Value Type Chart Source for the upper and lower limit value of the ramp function generator Type Factory setting Limited to 0 0 to 1 0 Chart Source for the setting value of the ramp function generator Value Type Chart Ramp up and ramp down times for the ramp function generator The times refer toa Value change of the output by a value 1 0 Source for the control signal to enable the ramp function generator Type Chart Value Type Chart Source for the control signal to set the ramp function generator to the value in Value accordance with L723 Source for the 1 switch on delay 1 switch on delay time Source for the 1 switch ou
206. he material The only data which has to be input is the percentage that the knife speed has to be higher than the material speed The knife speed with respect to time is decisive for the cutting accuracy and for the power and torque requirements of the drive Various speed profiles can be selected to specify the optimum knife speed for the particular application e g metal or paper shears An additional cutting torque can be entered to compensate the cutting forces within a selectable angular range When cutting the knife enters the material For certain drum type shears the knife geometry means that the knife speed has to be changed during cutting This correction function is specified using a characteristic cutting characteristic Velocity change as a function of the knife position In addition to the cutting characteristic three additional characteristics are available They are provided so that the following functions can be implemented dependent on the position or velocity Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 11 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction Format controller Pass marks Optional functions Diagnostics 12 KP adaptation Speed controller gain in the drive converter as a function of the torque demand Friction characteristic Generates a frictional torque component as a function of the material velocity Moment of inertia characteristic Generates a moment of inertia characteristic dep
207. hus there is no position overflow The parameterization of the knife specific coordination is realized in mm In this case H100 is set to Fsymech X_Shear Norm 4 7 1 Flying knife Operating range 1200 mm a l l Proximity switch Acceleration range Braking range Start position 30mm 25mm l Limit switch L _pl Possible synchronous RE gt e end Limit switch start z Es Es Zz Zz Z Es Zz Zz Z Es Zz Zz Eg SSSA Zz A ORK da Measuring wheel 8 oS OO DOOS Start position duiescent position Knife id Light barrier WW es Spindle Pitch 10 mm revolution Material motion sp 6 xs LLK K Disatnce Material gt Format gt Fig 4 12 System principle for the flying knife Table 4 19 System specific data flying knife H100 30 0 mm X_ Shear Norm Maximum knife acceleration travel This allows AX AY to be specified in mm refer to Chart 60 H101 The start position is defined as 0 using H101 and H103 H102 30 0mm AY Position from which the knife must move in synchronism with the material In this particular example the complete acceleration travel is used H103 sae Sidi The start position is defined as 0 using H101 and H103 H104 Reference Speed Maximum material velocity GEE 30 0mm Fsymech Components of X_Shear Norm in the material flow direction i this case
208. ial web The cutting operation lasts as long as the material and knife are in contact with one another During this time the cutting device must generally move in precise synchronism with the material web There are also applications where the knife moves faster than the material by a specific factor overspeed factor which then pushes the cut sheet forwards It may also be necessary due to the knife geometry to adapt the velocity to a position dependent characteristic during the cut in order to keep the knife parts precisely at the material velocity After the cutting operation the knife is brought back into the initial position There are significant differences between the motion of rotating and linear knife systems Thus these systems will be separately handled 44 Plant geometry and motion sequences The machine geometry is defined using parameters Their significance differs as to whether it involves a rotating or a linear system 4 4 1 Systems with rotary axis Plant geometry 40 Systems which use rotary axes are characterized by the fact that the drive for the knife position always rotates in one direction of rotation The knife position actual value is reset to 0 at the center of the cutting range For rotating systems angular constants can be specified in degrees normalization H100 360 0 exception refer to the double saw example The 0 mark ap lies at the center of the cutting range When om is exceeded
209. ife Logic1_MS1 Logic1 MS2 Logic1_MS3_ Logic1_MS4 16 000A 16 0012 16 0240 L251 L252 L253 voy oy 7 MS1 MS3 MS4 Set masks l1 Disable Logic1_Q c259 Cutting mode Logic1_Q Knife at top position PP Logic1 ON Knife at bottom position STATE Out of lowering range Logic1 OE Logic1 OEN Manual mode UP l8 Manual mode DOWN Reset masks MR1 MR2 MR3 MR L255 L256 L257 L258 16 4200 0 0 16 0005 Logici MR1 Logici MR2 Logici MR3 Logic1_MR STATE Logic1 L270 0248 B 110 4 Parameter setting for the function lower knife Logic2 MS1 Logic2 MS2 Logic2 MS3 Logic2 MS4 16 1026 16 4280 0 L271 L272 L273 voy oy y MS1 MS3 MS4 Set masks l1 Disable Cutting mode Logic2 O Format mode Logic2 ON Knife at bottom position STATE Out of lowering range Logic2 OE Logic2 OEN Material still not cut Manual mode UP I8 Manual mode DOWN Reset masks MR1 MR2 MR3 MR L275 L276 L277 L278 16 8200 16 0012 0 16 0009 Logic2 MR1 Logic2 MR2 Logic2 MR3 Logic2 MR STATE Logic2 Ee AE NEE NG ENE NG NEE EE HEEN GEE EER EES EE EE EN ES Free function blocks Parametrizable logic 1 raise lower knife V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Logica MS1 Logic3 MS2 Logic3_MS3 Logic3 MS4 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 16 0000 L869 L870 L871 L872 voy oy y MS3 MS4 S
210. in the cutting range Processing can be extended for a defined period of time with delay L614 Sources for the inputs of a free multiplier 3 Source for the square root function to reduce the speed setpoint at the end of the travel Source for the starting signal for the automatic start up sequence commissioning sequence of the simulation mode The drive can be powered up referenced the starting position approached and continuous cutting with a 1 at this signal Source for the Basic drive ready to power up signal in the simulation mode Source for the Feed drive ready to power up signal if the feed drive is also to be activated in the simulation mode Source for the Fault signal in the simulation mode Value for control word 1 of the drive converter for the drive OFF status in the simulation mode Value for the control word 1 of the drive converter for the drive ON status in the simulation mode Source for the Basic drive operational signal in the simulation mode Source for the Material drive operational signal in the simulation mode Source for the Knife calibrated signal in the simulation mode Source for the Knife in the starting position signal in the simulation mode Simulation value for the shears control word for the No operation operating mode Simulation value for the shears control word for the Calibrating operating mode Simulation value for the shears control word for the Approach starting position o
211. in the starting position Manual cut automatic This is only permissible when the material and slides are at a standstill Any mode disabled slide position Referencing Automatic after the automatic mode has been activated 158 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Interfaces Connection Terminal Ground Type Enable 0241 53 61 Digital input Jogging forwards 0242 54 61 di Jogging reverse 0243 55 61 Automatic mode 0244 56 61 Manual cut 0245 57 61 Limit switch rear 0246 58 61 i Limit switch front 0247 59 61 7 Limit switch starting position 0249 83 84 61 Light barrier start of material 0250 65 66 j Control signal for cutting H269 51 50 Digital output Control signal for camping H270 52 50 Fault message H271 46 50 Speed setpoint spindle drive H220 97 99 Analog output Incremental encoder wheel 62 63 85 HTL input Incremental encoder spindle drive 81 82 66 86 87 88 HTL input 7 4 1 System specifications Par Value Function Plan H100 40 The knife position is normalized to the length of the accelerating travel 40 mm 60 1 H101 0 Synchronizing ramp starts at knife position 0 60 1 H102 40 Synchronizing ramp ends at knife position 40 set H102 lt H100 60 1 H103 0 Synchronizing ramp starts at knife position 0 60 5 H104 60 m min System reference velocity 80 4 H105 40 The material posit
212. ing time constant Differentiation time constant Manufacture for incremental encoders with combined absolute position Referencing velocity material velocity Velocity setpoint 16 bit data word 32 bit data word 5 2 Terminology Automatic mode Continous cutting operation Contrary to manually caused operations like jogging or manual single cut Format operation Operation with the format generator as setpoint generator for position and Format range Positioning Reference Start length speed setpoints Knife position range in which the knife moves asynchronously with the material rotary axis acceleration or braking linear axis acceleration Operation with the positioning ramp generator as setpoint generator for position and speed setpoints Values concirning the web material e g reference position web position If the web position passes this particular value the shear starts accelerating Only valid for a operation where the shear stands still between wo cuts Starting position When the material passes the starting position the knife starts to synchronize with the material Before this the knife is in the quiescent position Synchronous The range of the shear positions where the shears runs synchronous with th range web Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 69 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Appendix 5 3 Literature 1 Instruction Manual for SIMOVERT Master Drives Vector Control
213. input 165 8 Bit 0 System error a at 0 Bit 1 System Status Bit 3 Task manager CU Status1 5 No quick stop 620 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 A AG G e Bit 5 Hardware Inverter ready 3606 gt Bit 6 Bit 7 TR start error 165 6 Bit 7 Bts gt O TR frequency zero 165 6 Bit 8 Bit 10 elle TR Timeout 165 6 Bit 9 Enable setpoints 360 6 Bit 10 Bit 1 Shear calibrated 170 5 Bit 11 Fault 530 8 gt Bit 12 Release brake 370 4 Bit 13 Shear standing in start position 340 7 Bit 3 n_shear gt 0 330 3 Bit 14 Fan_off_Delay Bit 15 30 s H978 CU Status 1 2 operation 620 4 ss SS TOT System status and status control logic Sheet cutter Cut to Length StatusContrlLogic d016 Status Control logic A TR encoder load Status control logic Enable position controller 370 5 Bit 2 Enable pos controller In starting position Quick stop from CU n_shear 0 Inverter ready TR start error TR frequency zero TR Timeout Enable setpoints Shear calibrated Fault Release brake n_shear gt 0 Inverter operation Shear calibrated 170 5 in synchronous range 330 5 in format range 330 5 Shear standing in start position 340 8 Knife in changepos 330 8 End cut program 1 300 6 Pos Sync 100ms 120 8 S ShearStatusB7 15 H547 1347 B 410 5 H549 1279 B 415 8 548 1259 415 4 H551 0245 B 110 4 552 0420 B 415 H H H554 0000 B 70 2
214. int is the sheet size of the actual cutting cycle A modification takes place after updating the sa nor format constants see chart 200 S FC FormatNorm H186 3114 In continuous cutting modes the format controller is calculated KR KR31 A i 60 6 Cutting error once a cutting cycle e g after the end of cutting operation The calculation of cutting errors depends on the system structure fregze FC Task Update format constants H182 0577 B 320 4 BO172 chart 200 4 S FC FormatSetp H185 3414 freeze integral component KR 120 7 p Output FC Int Output FC KR3185 d183 d184 S FC FormatSetp2 H192 3000 R3185 7 KR 70 2 KR3184 J Output format controller Le S FC actFormat H178 3436 KR 130 5 H179 S FC actFormat 2 H195 3000 20 ms Integral Time FC KR3630 Actual format setpoint Select the actual format setpoint Setpoint FC S FC FormatSetp1 H175 3629 d630 KR 190 7 Act format setpoi A point KR3631 in mm S FC_FormatSetp2 H176 3098 KR 60 5 Xref_normalization 60 7 S FC FormSel H177 0575 B 300 7 EE RA GENE NEG EER ENG ENE WEEN EES GEE EA WE EE EE KEN N Shear control FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Format controller Sheet cutter Cut to Length S PosRG_Xnorm L N N 3050 position normalization Setpoint generator for position PosRG Acc_norm KR 80 2 speed and acceleration 0 0 H497 SPORE voor 3400 speed normalization KR 80
215. int for jogging If required use limit switches to stop the shear S Sel Ref Jog L529 0592 B 290 6 Speed Local pa e c533 Speed local mode Bas KR3533 S Jog1_Dir L528 0594 B 290 6 S Sel_SpeedStart L535 0595 S Sel_SpeedLocal B 290 7 La 0599 B 290 8 S Speed Local ad 3021 R 250 6 S Speed Local Ed 3517 R 260 8 S SpeedPosCtrl aa 3144 R 210 8 Speed setpoint for the inverter StepsRampLocal 5 L540 S Ramp_Local L517 3533 KR 260 6 S DisableSpdsetp L541 0000 B 70 2 Tfilt n_setp 1 2 ms speed setp 0023 speed setpoint KR3023 speed_local lt gt 0 speed_local 0 Oe Shear control Function diagram Speed local modes and setpoint for inverter 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cutto Length cutter Cut to Sheet cutter Cutto Length F_over_max 1 1 Factor Overspeed L586 d020 S EnableCutCurve S F_Overspeed 562 0576 L560 3000 in Factor Overspeed B 620 5 KR 70 2 Overspeed_Max L569 S Speed_VRef 1 0 1 0 L563 3435 L571 F_over_min KR 130 6 S Speed_vCut S Speed dVsetp ne L561 3491 L583 3561 KR 450 6 KR 265 5 KR3577 V_setp cut curve L573 1 0 FactorCutCurve S Phi_cut_reduce H194 3159 KR 200 8 S SampleCut H191 0169 B 200 8 S Cutc_Int 0 i CutCurve_max H188 0413 set integral value 0 0 0 B 120 8 H189 S V CutCurve H187 3577 KR 265 7 KR3192 J Position cut curve
216. int3 CB Sheet size PZD 7 PZD7 f B A Cutting force rom C CB O Norm H931 PZD 8 N CB Setpoint4 Distance to cut PZD8 from CB S Setpoint4 CB ae H930 2805 pz0e PZD9 from CB K 670 3 KR3932 Setpoint4 CB Number of cuts PZD 10 Shear control word PZD19 trom CB Convert double word to floating point CB DW1 Norm S DW1 high CB 1 0 H812 2808 H813 CB Setpoint DW1 K 670 3 d814 S DW1 low CB KR3814 Setpoint DW1 CB H811 2807 GONBOARD FPlan_SPS450e vsd er diagram Process data reception Sheet cutter Cut to Length Simulation mode 270 6 S CB Control W1 S CB CTW Simulation CB Shear CTW ol d845 H842 2621 Bia K 810 6 S CB ShearCTW H844 2810 K 670 3 CB control word 1 for CU CB Shear control word Bit 0 0 OFF1 Bit 1 0 OFF2 Bit 2 0 OFF 3 quick stop Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Setpoint enable CB Contro CB Contro 3 Bit 1 Continous cutting CB Contro Bit 2 Test cut CB Contro Bit 3 Single cut CB Contro Bit 4 Format setpoint valid CB Contro i Bit 5 Light gate web start CB Contro j Bit 6 Referencing CB Contro Bit 7 CB Contro j Bit 8 Approach start position CB Contro CB Contro Bit 10 Enable cut program CB Contro Bit 11 Crop cutfreigabe CB Contro Bit 12 End cut CB Contro Bit 13 CB Contro Bit 14 Approach knife change pos CB SCTW O CB SCTW 1 CB SCTW 2 CB SCTW 3 CB SCTW 4 CB SCTW 5 CB SCTW 6 CB SCTW 7 CB SCTW 8 CB SCTW 9 CB SCTW 10 CB S
217. interface Type Chart 770 6 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 6 3 Connectors Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 127 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors inpAbsolut TR3690 Q 128 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0306 620 4 input CU CA3100 invers O7 CU status1 6 inv 0369 620 8 input_CU CA3200 Q10 CU status 2 9 0370 620 8 input_CU CA3200 Q11 CU status 2 10 129 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0372 0373 0374 0375 0376 0377 0378 0379 0380 0410 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 Synchronizing pulse encoder1 also w o enable at SP 0420 Long pulse pulse extension for synchronizing pulses 0424 0431 Synchronizing pulse encoder2 also w o enable at SP 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 130 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0512 270 8 Ctrl STW Prio ShearSTW1 intO13 SCTW1 12 0513 270 8 CtrlSTW_Prio ShearSTW1_int Q14 SCTW1 13 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 131 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 0596 0597 0598 0599 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 0608 0609 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619
218. ion K2434 Error code encoder 2 Say ATMs Initialization parameters Error Encoder2 H420 H428 H429 d433 become effective after next up B0433 Error encoder2 power up a we N eh es ResetDisplCorr 1 H446 Correct Increm 0 02 H444 e Increment S DisableOfsCorr H376 0446 B 135 1 Disable Position actual value Position1 act value 130 6 Position corr S Ref_Mark_Pos H431 3094 KR 180 7 Synchron position 130 7 Displacement correction Setpoint mark pos Act value mark pos S FreezeCorrect H432 0453 B 330 5 Position2 set for synchr 130 6 Freeze correction Start Correction S PM_Format H588 3630 KR 220 7 S PM_dX_Mark H589 3592 KR 60 7 S MarkQuantity1 H585 2001 H586 2588 K 135 4 H587 0448 B 135 3 S MarkQuantity2 S MarkSelect S SetFirstMark S ResetFirstMark EE S 2 NN GN NN EE NEE GENIE EEN S Position sensing V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Displacement correction and pass mark counter 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S RefPos modulo H367 3445 KR 135 5 H368 3631 KR 220 7 Xref_normalization 60 7 Refpos format KR3368D ialPosit F Meier Ese S Format modulo Refpos modulo format KR3445 Material position position2 d437 Reference Min 0 5 H443 Reference Error d442 KR3437 position2 B0442 Reference error B0443 Ref error pulse Monitioring materi
219. ion 09 00 Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart l 170 6 2301 l 620 1 W 620 1 2304 l 620 5 W 620 5 l 140 7 l 140 5 0 05 R 140 1 l 135 6 0000 l 130 1 0000 l 145 2 0000 l 145 2 0000 l 145 2 0000 l 145 2 0424 l 145 2 5000 ms SD 145 4 1024 l 120 3 3401 l 120 4 5402 l 120 3 1311 l 120 3 83 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H404 S Set Pos_1 H405 S Sync1 Enable H406 S Pos Set Value_1 H407 Mode Encoder 1 Initialization par 84 Description Source for the signal to set the knife position Source for the signal to enable the knife position synchronization Source for the position setting value of the knife position Operating mode of the knife speed sensing The operating mode of the speed sensing block for the knife drive is set using this parameter this especially involves the digital filter the encoder type the coarse signal type selection and the source of the encoder pulses The selected operating mode is highlighted bold For additional information refer to the SIMAD
220. ion is normalized to the length of the accelerating travel 40 mm 60 5 H122 450mm Distance between the material detection and reference point 60 6 H115 400 mm Measuring wheel circumference 80 1 H117 20mm Feed of the knife slide per motor revolution 80 1 H120 1 Operation with linear axis 410 1 H154 2 Curve type 2 linear ramp with rounding off 200 4 H197 3441 Shift the coordinate system for the reference position by Fsymech 40 mm This means that 200 1 L201 3168 the reference position has the value actual format when the cut position reaches the quiescent position of the knife This simplifies the input of material position dependent dimensions e g the distance between the material start detection and the knife quiescent position can be measured H451 3662 Shifts the lower range limit of the synchronous range monitoring to a value outside the 330 2 traversing distance 1000 mm For linear axes the knife slide cannot enter the synchronous range when reversing out of the quiescent position H642 0 025 Tolerance bandwidth to identify in start position to 0 025 40 mm 1 mm 340 2 H715 0 Min position of the knife slide 0 mm 480 1 H717 800 Max position of the knife slide 800 mm 480 1 H718 10 10 mm tolerance bandwidth to the knife position monitoring to initiate a fault 480 3 L574 3617 Reduces the reference velocity to zero at the end of the traversing distance 250 5 H220 3779 Speed setpoint output at analog output 1 95 1
221. ionary Source for the actual knife position to check whether the shears are at the knife change position Permissible deviation from the knife change position Hysteresis when checking whether the knife is at the knife change position Display The knife is at the knife change position Source for the counting pulse of the pass mark counter Source for the down counting pulse of the pass mark counter Source to delete the pass mark counter Source to set the pass mark counter setting value refer to H469 Source for the setting value of the pass mark counter Source for the upper limit of the pass mark counter Source for the lower limit of the pass mark counter Source for the setpoint of the knife position to check whether the shears are in the knife change position Activates a diagnostics function for the positioning block Only for internal use Output of the positioning unit Reference setpoint speed for the knife normalized Source for the 1 target position for positioning this is connected to the start position of the shears as standard Source for the 2 target position for positioning alternative goal Source for the control signal to select between 1 and 2 target position 0 Target 1 1 Target 2 Rounding off the speed for a positioning operation with the exception of the end range refer to DA1 in Fig 4 17 The value presents the acceleration change and is obtained as the 2 derivative of
222. it 14 Bit 15 Fault acknowledge Control logic Shear control word 2 SCTW2 FPlan_SPS450e vsd 10 01 01 7 Function diagram Sheet cutter Cut to Length SCTW2 0 SCTW2 1 SCTW2 2 SCTW2 3 SCTW2 4 SCTW2 5 SCTW2 6 SCTW2 7 SCTW2 8 SCTW2 9 SCTW2 10 SCTW2 11 SCTW2 12 SCTW2 13 SCTW2 14 SCTW2 15 SCTW1 6 Referencing 270 8 SCTW2 3 Jogging 1 280 8 S EnableJog H597 0577 B 320 5 SCTW2 4 Jogging 2 280 8 SCTW1 8 Appr start pos 270 8 Shear calibrated 170 5 SCTW1 14 Appr knife change pos 270 8 S Enable Prio1 S Enable Prio2 H600 0001 B 70 2 no request local mode 290 8 Shear calibrated 170 5 no end cut 320 7 no continous cutting 300 6 no test cut 310 6 no single cut 310 6 no fault 530 8 Shear standing in start position 340 7 Priority evaluation local operation modes S Hold OM Local H594 0537 The value 1 at the input with the highest priority is switched through Request cont cutting 300 6 SCTW1 2 Test cut 270 8 SCTW1 3 Single cut 270 8 SCTW1 12 End cut 270 8 d605 Enable Prio2 RequestLocal1 d591 B0591 Request local mode 1 B0592 OM referencing OM Local2 B0593 OM Jogging 1 d599 OM Jogging2 gt 1 OM local BO595 OM appr start position BO596 OM appr knife chg pos B0597 no request local mode l1 B0598 request local mode d595 d596 d598 OM Start Pos OM knifeChgPos OM local
223. ition Position offset YP Meas value ref position software Reference positon Synchronization Sy fey di Position setting value gt t Offset correction Gradient proportional to the correction increment Fig 4 10 Examples for offset corrections Table 4 16 Parameters for offset correction H431 135 3094 S Ref_Mark_Pos Source for the reference position when the pass mark is reached the same setting as for L202 S SV_setting value H432 135 0453 S FreezeCorrect Source to hold interrupt the offset correction Combined with the shears in the cutting range signal The correction is continued outside the cutting range H444 135 0 1 Correct increm For each operation the offset correction is reduced by the correction increment with the exception when correction is held In the example an offset of Fsymech is corrected in 1000 T1 52 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 6 1 4 Offset synchronization of the knife position The position encoder for the knife position should be adjusted so that a synchronizing pulse is generated if the knife is in the setting on Fig 4 1 The position sensing Chart 120 then generates a cutting pulse For situations where this adjustment is not possible a cutting pulse can be simulated The cutting pulse is available at connector B0417 e The position setting value for synchroniza
224. ive for the distance between the saw blade and a light barrier is used to sense the material web 54 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 18 Plant specific data for the double saw arrangement H100 1971 239 mm X_Shear Norm Normalization value for the knife coordinates corresponds to Fsymech AX AY are specified in mm H101 500 mm Rsaw Exit position The saw blade exits the cutting range after 500 mm radius of the saw blade Rsaw H102 1971 239 mm AX AY Entry position in the cutting range taking into account the saw blade diameter H104 Reference Speed Maximum material velocity material Maximum material velocity H105 1971 239 mm Knife travel per cut s travel Knife travel per cut s cut os 70 0 Epsilon Angle between the knife and the material movement direction H117 17 942 478mm 478 942 478mm Feed Revolution Feed Revolution Knife travel for one revolution of the toothed wheel _ travel for Knife travel for one revolution of the toothed wheel _ revolution of the toothed wheel H120 ap er Mode LinearAxis Rotary axis knife position is reset to 0 when cutting Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 55 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 7 Linear systems For linear systems the cutting device is synchronized to the material velocity cuts and then returns to the initial position T
225. l Position actual value reference material Fig 4 5 46 The closed loop control essentially comprises the following components e Setpoint generator for synchronization operation format generator e Setpoint generator for return positioning PosRG this is not required Position actual for rotating shears e Closed loop control section Position ref value Speed setpoint Torque setpoint N Setpoint generator Control section Position controller aa Speed controller A Torque controller Speed actual value knife value knife Closed loop control structure The setpoint generator calculates the setpoints for the knife position speed and the required torque from the cutting data refer to Fig 4 5 The position controller is computed on the T400 the speed and torque controllers in the drive converter The setpoint generator requires the following input quantities Plant system geometry AX AY Required speed characteristic select the characteristic type Cut format Reference velocity material Reference position Overvelocity factor Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 Drive converter Function description 4 5 1 Types of characteristics The characteristic of the knife speed is defined by selecting the type of the characteristic param
226. lest permissible knife position value Largest permissible knife position value Tolerance of the knife position before position errors can be generated Source of the signal for enabling the knife position errors and alarms Sources for the 8 process data which are sent to the basic drive Actual process data to the basic drive Sources for the bits which are sent as control word 1 to the basic drive Sources for the bits which are sent as control word 2 to the basic drive Source for the 1 setpoint for the CU alternative A The speed setpoint is entered in the format mode here as standard Source for the 1 setpoint for the CU alternative B The speed setpoint is entered in the positioning mode here as standard Source for the signal to select setpoint at the CU alternatives refer to H776 and H777 This means that the speed setpoint for format and positioning mode is changed over as standard Actual setpoint 1 for the basic drive Normalization for setpoint1 at the CU This is the floating point value which is sent as 100 to the basic drive Setpoint at the CU after normalization as N2 type 16384 100 Source for the 2 setpoint for the CU alternative A The torque setpoint is entered in the format mode here as standard Source for the 2 setpoint for the CU alternative B The torque setpoint is entered in the positioning mode here as standard Data Value Chart Type Chart Type Chart
227. light barrier and the end of the accelerating range from here onwards the knife is located above the cutting position H197 3441 S SV_Startlength Shifting the web coordinate system Thus the distance to light L201 3168 S RefPos Limit barrier is related to the start position of the knife The coordination of the motion sequences is comparable with the flying knife example The decisive difference is that the saw is raised and lowered outside the cutting range This means that immediately after cutting the material it is not possible to start re positioning the knife In this example positioning is sub divided into two phases 1 Approach a wait position after the cutting range as long as the saw has not been raised 2 As soon as the saw is in the up position position to the starting position Table 4 30 Logical equations for the flying saw example e AND v OR Functionistatus No _______Legicalequations lt 15 gt v Saw_after_the_cutting range e cutting operation Stop raise saw lt 16 gt no enable v saw top Start lower saw cutting operation e saw in the accelerating range 157 v no cutting operation e manual operation DOWN e no manual operation UP Stop lower saw lt 16 gt no cutting operation e no manual operation DOWN dominant lt 17 gt v no enable v saw bottom Start positioning stop Saw_after_cutting range e cutting operation e mode linear axis formatting S
228. lt2 d705 BO705 User Fault 2 EE N NE EE EN NG NEK EN EE GEE EE EE NE EE GEE es Diagnostics FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram CU CB and user fault Sheet cutter Cut to Length Fault monitoring shear position KR3708 X Position error lower limit Comparator Position shear 120 8 X X gt Y Shear Pos Min ASA 20 0 Y X lt Y B0681 Shear pos underflow H715 KR3715 min shear pos norm KR3705 Shear calibrated 170 5 B0682 Shear pos underflow pulse X Shear normalization 60 4 Shear Pos Toler S EnShearPosErr H719 0600 10 0 B 290 8 Comparator B0684 Shear pos overflow pulse Position shear 120 8 X X gt Y Shear Pos Max xay B0683 Shear pos overflow 390 0 Y X lt Y H717 KR3707 max shear pos norm KR3709 gt Position error upper limit X Shear normalization 60 4 n_Shear Max n_Shear Hyst 1 2 0 05 g Fault monitoring L101 L102 SynchronToleranc Comparison of line speed hear 1 and shear speed shear speed tee aes Overspeed pos c103 S Diagn n shear Overspeed positive n_shear gt n_Ref L100 3411 i KR 120 7 d n shear smoothed 3411 120 8 n shear n Ref Overspeed negative n_shear lt n_Ref Speed2 smoothed 3435 130 6 EE NN NE EN TEER S MEEN ENE GEEN EEN ER EE N EN Diagnostics FPlan SPS450evsd Function diagram ia Shear position and speed Sheet cutter Cut to Length j 7 speed BlockLim 0 005 L106 0 001 BlockingDelay 1000 ms
229. lutePos 1 1288 c292 5 c293 KR3292 gt Absolute position 2 corrected p Mask AbsLow 2 position 16 FFFF L297 L284 Comparator S AbsPos low 8192 0 x Abs Pos Norm gt Y L283 2313 K 610 3 L286 Aer 1 0 Y X lt Y AbsPos Limit Excample for shifting the position value of a single turn absolute value encoder AbsPos Range 1 0 Absolute position 2 NY i 4 i i ie 1 revolution gt si NN ENE NEG ENE ENG ENE WEEN EES GEE a ee ee Speed and Position FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Absolute value encoder CU Sheet cutter Cut to Length TR complete c147 TR encoder S TR WR disabled B0147 complete L142 0663 TR StartDelay B0146 gt TR encoder 1000 ms B 360 6 Etik not complete L153 B0151 TR reset shear pos TR Load request Control of the loading operation S TR StartLoad L141 0000 B0145 TR Load request B 70 2 TR Load input connect to TR c148 encoder TR load active 165 8 TR End Dela TR error 165 7 omen TR Load input S TR Enable L146 L144 0090 S TR Load Output B 50 8 BO150 TR loading inactive L140 0000 TR LoadingActive B 70 2 c149 B0149 TR loading active TR encoder signal loading TR StartErrDelay active as 1 at terminal load 1 0 s Monitoring the loading procedure output TR start error TR loading inactive 165 8 TR start error TR request loading 165 8 TR TimeoutDelay S TR Acknowledge L139 0584 B 530 6 T
230. ly made at the pass mark the cuts can be made at a defined distance from the pass mark using H107 distance to the cut This distance between the cut knife center position and the next pass mark is also dependent on the actual sheet length as shown in the following table and Fig 4 8 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 49 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 14 Setting value for the reference position material position for the pass mark synchronization refer to Fig 4 8 Operating case Identification Distance pass mark Setting value to the cut Xpm Meer Light barrier senses the next cut position FORMAT gt Xic FORMAT Xie Several pass marks are located between FORMAT lt Xig XLe modulo FORMAT FORMAT XPy the light barriers and knife also applies for the operating case above Light barrier placed behind th cut region FORMAT gt Xia Oooo ee Xe O Light barrier Distance light barrier knife Knife center lg xamm K lt 4 Xom gt lt Xser gt Pass marks EWE fff CL itt tte Material ffyyrersyp LLL VAAG AG AG AG lt q 2nd panel pe 1st panel gt ma EE ie Distance cut 15 mm Fig 4 8 Defining the reference position setting value Xser Cutting instant The reference position is set to the setting value Xser when the pass mark is passed Thus the set position function is no longer available when cutting Instead of this the reference p
231. mat operation The material position defines the knife velocity and position This is why the material position is known as the reference position Positioning operation is used to position the knife back to the starting position The dynamic performance of this operation must be defined independent of the material motion This operation must have been complete before the material passes over the starting position The logical conditions for toggling between the two operating modes are shown in Table 4 20 The implementation is shown in the following two tables Table 4 26 Input assignment for toggling between format and positioning operation Chart 410 input Function Param Value __Thefollowingla usa terminating the raise operation 16 Positioning acive 1886 0499 PosRG active Chart 230 is Macra rase 0296 RSFF1 ON Orano Table 4 27 Selection mask to changeover between format positioning operation refer to Table 4 20 14 o 3 5 o 8 MS1 0000 0000 1001 1100b 16 009C L339 16 009C NG 17 MR1 0010 0000 0100 0000b 16 2040 L343 16 2040 11 v12 MR 0000 0000 0000 0011b 16 0003 L346 16 0003 Masks which are not used MS2 MS3 MS4 MR2 MR3 0 EE ER The closed loop control structure is changed when toggling between the two operating modes In the format mode the format generator supplies the setpoints for the closed loop position control and in the positioning mode the positioning
232. max knife velocity which occurs must be less than 2 H104 H111 Longitudinal format Format length at which the knife slide at the highest material velocity remains for at least 0 5 s in the quiescent position clearance to the material ID H115 Circumference of the measuring wheel sensor wheel in mm Faults and alarms H966 Fault mask Non relevant fault error sources are suppressed bits in the mask are set to 0 H967 Alarm mask Non relevant fault error sources are suppressed 2 Application control Linear axis Rotary axis 2 General settings for linear axis 2 Incremental encoder linear axis 2 General settings for rotary axis 2 Incremental encoder rotary axis gt Op loop contr of the basic unit from the T400 prereq the basic unit has been gen commissioned incl mot parameterization Shenton 2 Behavior at the first cut in automatic mode Linear axis Rotary axis 2 Settings for jog 2 Supplementary torques optional 2 Settings for reverse positioning gt Cutting curve optional gt Controlling the cutting operation End of the commissioning phase 144 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Application control From external automation Local T400 internal device Control type L620 Source for the enable input H841 Source for control word 1 for the basic uni
233. mounted It must be adjusted so that this course reference is active in the quiescent setting range of the knife i e when the knife is fully opened In this case the system can be referenced using jogging 1 without having to pass through the cutting range For linear systems the reference position is located in the quiescent setting of the knife i e outside the cutting range and close to the limit switch The zero mark is defined using a proximity switch or by combining a proximity switch coarse pulse with the zero pulse of the knife feed Three types of absolute value encoders are used to sense the knife position e TR encoder pulse encoder which sense the absolute position and output when requested this as pulse sequence at the incremental tracks e Absolute value encoder at the T400 terminals SSI or EnDat encoder e Absolute value encoder connected to an encoder sensing module of the basic drive CU whereby the absolute position must be transferred as process data from the CU to the T400 When using an absolute value encoder the incremental position sensing is initialized with the absolute knife position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 4 4 Typical system configurations The following overview shows the essential system configuration parameters using typical systems Both for systems with rotary as well as linear axis there are applicati
234. mum negative torque referred to the reference torque This limit value can also be transferred to the basic drive as torque limit PZD8 in Chart 640 Maximum torque referred to the reference torque for local operating modes Actual positive torque limit Actual negative torque limit Source of the signal which is treated as supplementary speed component during the synchronous phase Source for the control signal to changeover to the torque limit specified using L587 Using this control signal for example when cutting the torque is limited to extremely low values while the cutting tool is clamped to the material Source for a supplementary speed setpoint This is assigned as standard to the speed generated from the cutting curve Highest permissible value for the Factor overspeed value Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 3144 250 1 0666 265 3 0671 250 4 1 0 265 2 3435 250 1 1 0 265 2 0 3 265 2 1 0 265 7 3575 250 5 1
235. n from the automation Distance between two pass marks Source for the binary signal for delaying the local operating mode Used to delay jogging until the jogging speed ramp output is zero The Approach start position operating mode is active The Knife change position operating mode is active Source of the signal for enabling jogging In factory setting jogging is disabled while any cutting mode is active There is a request for a local operating mode One of the operating modes Referencing or Jogging is active Source of the signal to enable the cutting operating modes The signal enables the priority logic Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 0 l 520 5 0554 l 520 5 0343 l 530 4 0000 l 530 4 0847 l 530 4 10s SD 530 5 BO 530 6 2001 l 135 1 2588 l 135 1 0448 l 135 1 3630 l 135 1 3592 l 135 1 0666 l 290 1 BO 290 6 1000 mm R 60 6 0537 B 290 3 BO 290 6 BO 290 6 0577 B 290 1 BO 290 7 BO 290 7 0001 l 290 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Ma
236. n the factory seting The following selection masks are obtained with the input assignment above Table 4 23 Selection masks for the raise knife function refer to Table 4 20 Re ioga sqan O manaus Param Vatuo_ MS1 0000 0000 0000 1010b 16 000A MS3 0000 0010 0100 0000b 16 0240 MR1 0100 0010 0000 0000b 16 4200 MR 0000 0000 0000 0101b 16 0005 Table 4 24 Input assignment for the lower knife function L263 0665 No setpoint enable Chart 360 L264 0576 Cutting operation active Chart 320 Synchronous operation L265 1346 Mode_synchronous operation toggling between positioning and format operation Chart 410 16 Material stinot out L268 0287 RSFE aN Chanas 12 Manoai operation DOWN 1270 0000 Deactivated in the factory seting The following selection masks are obtained with the input assignment above Table 4 25 Selection masks for the lower knife function refer to Table 4 20 2 I5 I3 I6 MS1 0001 0000 0010 0110b 16 1026 L271 16 1026 J12 18 o 17 MS2 0100 0010 1000 0000b 16 4280 L272 16 4280 MR 0000 0000 0000 1001b 16 0009 unused masts MS2 MSO MS4 MRI MRO Ro o0 _ 60 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 7 1 4 Changeover between format operation and positioning Terminology Synchronizing and synchronous operation of knife and material are associated with for
237. nal fault 2 2 2 0684 SEE F128 A109 Alarm status word 480 4 Shear pos gt Maximum Send to the inverter H963 0443 F129 A110 B 135 7 Bit 13 Reference pos lt Min gt 1 B0015 Alarm 0157 E F130 A111 B 165 7 Bit 14 Fault TR encoder H965 0000 B 70 2 Bit15 PITAA EE S EE EEN EE S a ENE EER EN e EE EEN EEN EG Status FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Faults and alarms 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length ES BOO13 No fault Actual Alarm d015 B 470 8 H956 B 480 4 H958 JB 490 7 H960 B 280 8 H962 I CO oD ESS Set if at least one bit of the alarm status word is set CPU load Note CPU load T d986 CPU load T d987 CPU load T d988 CPU load T d989 CPU load T d990 The display parameters on this chart will be updated about each 200 ms 4 Diagnostics Display parameters S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp Type floating point ay R1 L940 3401 KR 80 6 ay R2 L941 5050 KR 80 4 ay R3 L942 3421 KR 80 4 ay Ra L943 8440 KR 130 6 ay R5 L944 3498 KR 230 7 ay R6 L945 3192 KR 265 6 ay R7 L946 3099 KR 60 7 S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp S Disp ay R8 L947 3094 KR 180 7 Type Word ay W1 L948 2776 K 480 8 Display W1 d048 ay W2 L949 2785 K 440 8 Display W2 d049 ay W3 L950 2671 K 70 6 Display W
238. nals the start of the cutting procedure After the start of cut is detected the manual cut pulse is reset Source for a binary value which signals the end of the cutting procedure After the end of cut is detected the next manual cut may be initiated Source for a binary value which signals the correction of the reference position after cutting This information is required to calculate the correction value for the reference position Set to 413 if the reference position is reseted by the zero pulse of the shear Time limitation for the manual cutting operation The manual cutting is aborted if there was no end of cut detected within the time interval specified by H375 Number of pulses per revolution of the incremental encoder for the knife position sensing Source for the knife reference speed As standard the reference speed is automatically calculated from the system parameters refer to Chart 80 The reference speed is the speed at which the material runs with the reference velocity and the synchronous format length is cut Source for the reference pulse number of the knife This is the number of edge changes quadrupled pulses of the incremental tracks when the knife is moved through Fsymech The reference pulse number is automatically calculated as standard from the plant system parameters refer to Chart 80 Source for the signal to reset the knife position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edit
239. nchronous format length is Chart cut Error code of the knife drive speed sensing In operation the value must be 0 If itis Type not equal to 0 there is an error in the parameterization of the speed sensing Chart The cases identified by can only occur after user specific changes in the configured software Significance of the error bits 0 Parameters may not be 0 H400 H104 H105 H108 H118 1 Sampling time gt 20 ms 2 H407 illegal filter parameterization 3 Slave without master 4 Master and slave in various sampling times 5 Several masters use the same encoder 6 Master and slave use the same encoder 7 Pulse counter overflow Knife position normalized as defined in H100 e g in angular degrees or mm The Type value is displayed without name as the names cannot be changed by the user Chart Source for the synchronizing pulses of the knife position generated per software It Value can involve the following Synchronized position or Maximum position exceeded Type Chart Source for the signal to enable the correction function for the reference position Value Type Chart Cutting pulse extension which means that synchronizing pulses can be identified in Value slower processing cycles Type Chart Filter time constant to smooth the knife speed actual value Value Type Chart Duration of the extended pulse Value Type Chart Source for the extended pulse This is used to transfer synchronizing pulses f
240. ncoder type SSI EnDat connected to T400 SSI rotary encoder SSI length measuring system EnDat rotary encoder EnDat length measuring system SSI length measuring system with range correction EnDat length measuring system with range correction OG POND AO Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 120 ms SD 165 6 BO 165 2 BO 165 7 BO 165 7 1 0s 165 3 20 0s SD 165 3 1 0s 165 3 1000 ms 165 4 BO 165 5 BO 165 5 BO 165 5 BO 165 6 50 5 8192 150 2 0 DI 150 20 150 4 105 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L166 AENC Data Code L167 AENC Parity L168 AENC i_Gearbox L169 AENC Pos Norm L170 AENC n_Norm L171 AENC n_max L172 S AENC Reset L173 S AENC Offset L174 AENC Mask YF L175 AENC Mask YFC c176 AENC YF c177 AENC YFC c178 AENC Error c179 AENC Encoder Pos c180 AENC Pos Single c181 AENC Pos Multi c182 AENC Speed L183 S Abs Position 106 Description Codes the measured value from absolute value encoders SSI
241. nectors Description Angle between the velocity vectors of the knife and material web Knife position to which the knife is positioned in the local mode Approach knife change position Fixed value for the crop length in mm If a crop cut is enabled a sheet with the crop length is cut at the start of the material web Fixed value for the Long Format in mm The Long Format is a cut length which is large enough that the knife must remain in the quiescent position between two cuts also for the reference speed of the material web Starting position for the cut torque input End position for the cut torque input Normalization factor for the material position Corresponds to Fsymech for all applications where the knife and the material have the same direction of movement Circumference of the measuring wheel to sense the material position Gearbox ratio for the material position sensing This is required if the feed drive encoder is used for position sensing Definition speed_encoder i_measuring wheel speed measuring wheel Knife movement for one revolution of the knife feed drive Refer to the application example Gearbox ratio of the knife encoder Definition speed_knife encoder i_encoder1 speed_knife Calculated reference speed of the shear drive Enables positioning functions for applications with linear axis Source for a factor to correct the gearbox ratio and the measuring wheel circumference Fact
242. ng mode Control logic v1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Operation modes 3 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Testing if the knife is in the region where it runs synchronous to the material S RangeTestEnd H452 3092 KR 60 4 S RangeTest H450 3413 KR 120 7 S RangeTestStart H451 3091 KR 60 4 Zero speed detection for the shear drive Limit n_zero 0 002 H457 Hyst n_zero 0 001 H458 n_shear gt 0 d459 S n Standstill H456 3411 KR 120 7 d460 n_Shear Zero n_Shear n_Ref 0095 480 8 Cutting possible Cutting active 320 5 Format mode 410 5 B0455 Cutting synchronous in SynchrRange d453 in synchronous range in format range Test if the shear position is the knife change position KCPos_Range 2 0 H462 KCPos_Hyst 1 0 H463 n_shear gt 0 S ActPos_KCPos H461 3413 KR 120 7 InKnifeChangePos d464 n_shear 0 S Setp_KCPos H472 3109 KR 60 4 Knife in change pos e ibe 8 A a e a EE e o o o EEN EN ee FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram Control logic Range monitoring 1 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Testing if the shear is standing in start position Startpos Range Startpos_Hyst The start position is given in internal position normalization 0 01 0 003 H642 H643 DelayStartpos 500 ms in stanina position S n_zero Start H646 StandingStartpos H645 0460 OSAN S Act Pos Start d647 H640 3414
243. nput after normalization Example Input 12345 Normalization 0 1mm gt reference format 1234 5 mm Source for the 16 bit format input In the factory setting this is connected to PZD 6 from the basic drive converter Normalization for the 16 bit format input It involves the resolution of the input in mm In the factory setting 1 mm can specify formats up to 16383 mm 16 bit format input after normalization Source for the format input as floating point value In the factory setting this is connected to a fixed value Actual value of the floating point format input Source of the control signal to select the format input source If this signal is connected to the automation then it is possible to toggle between 5 fixed values in operation Factory setting Input via floating point channel H617 Actual format request in mm for continuous operation Whether this format is actually cut depends on the operating mode the request of special formats special sample and the limit H626 H627 Five fixed values for the format input which can be used to select a multiplexer and H619 Source for the special sample format Largest permissible cutting format Smallest permissible cutting format Requested reference format after limiting and normalization Xref_normalization Reference format normalized for the format controller In continuous operation coincides with d629 Exception 1 cut changeover to the Long
244. nual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter d605 Enable Prio2 H606 Saw Blade Width H607 S SawBladeW idth H608 S Limit Format H610 S Format DW high H611 S Format DW low H612 Format DW Norm d613 Format DW H614 S Format Word H615 Format W Norm d616 Format Word H617 S Format float d618 Format float d619 S Format Select d620 Format Request H621 H625 Fixformat 1 Fixformat 5 H626 S Special sheet H627 Maximum Format H628 Minimum Format d629 Format Setpoint d630 Setpoint FC Parameters and Connectors Description Enables the status of the priority logic for cutting operating modes This value is added to the format setpoint in order to consider the width of the saw blade Source for an value which is added to the format setpoint e g the saw blade width Source for a boolean control bit to activate a dynamic format size limitation If the format is modified in automatic mode while the knife is in the starting position this limitation avoids abrupt changes of the position setpoint of the knife Source for the high word of a 32 bit format input In the factory setting this is connected to PZD 7 from the basic drive Source for the low word of a 32 bit format input In the factory setting this is connected to PZD 6 from the basic drive Normalization for the 32 bit format input It involves the resolution of the input value in mm 32 bit format i
245. o starting length General formula Feed for 1st section longitudinal format setting value at L199 J 150 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Settings for jogging H523 source for jogging 1 H524 source for jogging 2 H497 source to enable jogging factory setting if cutting mode is not active L521 source for front limit switch inverse inhibits jogging 1 if the limit switch is active L522 source for rear limit switch inverse inhibits jogging 2 if the limit switch is active L519 velocity for jogging referred to H104 V_rated L540 number of ramp up stages for the velocity when jogging and referencing Checking distance normalization gt Move the knife after referencing into the start position gt Move the knife to the end of the traversing distance in the direction of the material flow gt The knife position d413 must be the same as the distance between the knife and the starting pos if this is not identical correct H117 feed revolution and H400 pulses revolution Y End of the settings for jogging Settings for re positioning t max slide acceleration H481 acceleration H481 lt slide feed motor revolution H481 time to establish torque H478 rounding off H478 H479 final rounding off calculation analog to H478 Logic which is recommended to activ
246. o calculate the cut error Default Xref normalization Source for the cutting velocity when processing the cutting curve The cutting velocity is the deviation from the synchronous velocity while the knife is in the cutting range The integral of this represents the angular error which is obtained as a result of the cutting velocity Default Output of the cutting curve Source for the control signal to delete the integral over the cutting velocity Upper limit of the integral over the cutting velocity Default Cutting curve not active Lower limit of the integral over the cutting velocity Default Cutting curve not active Source for the signal to save the cutting angular error refer to H187 Default The value when exiting the cutting range is saved Source for a correction value to calculate the cutting error Integrating time for the integration over the cutting curve The integrating time is the cutting time at the reference velocity and synchronous length H193 Xref_norm V_ref H105 H108 H104 observe the units Source for the function which should weigh the angular error determined from the cutting curve as supplementary angle Default Weighting with a knife angle dependent function Source for a correction value to calculate the cutting error Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Typ
247. o identify that the knife is at a standstill Display Shears are moving Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Unit Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart 3001 135 3 3001 135 3 3114 130 5 BO 135 7 0 5 135 6 0 02 135 3 mm 135 5 BO 135 2 130 6 0434 135 1 0577 135 1 3413 330 1 3091 330 1 3092 330 1 BO 330 4 130 3 3219 130 2 3411 330 1 0 002 330 2 0 001 330 2 BO 330 3 87 Parameters and Connectors Parameter d460 n_shear Zero H461 S ActPos KCPos H462 KCPos_Range H463 KCPos_Hyst d464 in Knife Change Pos H465 S Mark Puls Up H466 S Mark Puls Down H467 S Mark Cnt Reset H468 S Mark Cnt Set H469 S Mark Cnt SV H470 S Mark Cnt LU H471 S Mark Cnt LL H472 S Setp_KCPos H473 PosRG_Diag_Sel d474 Vsetp PosRG H475 S PosRG Target1 H476 S PosRG Target2 H477 S PosRG TargetSel H478 Rounding Off H479 Final Rounding Off H480 PosRG_Vmax 88 Description Display Shears are stat
248. ock STATE Sheet cutter Cut to Length Mode LinearAxis 0 ModeLinear H120 Disable in starting position Cutting mode Knife at the top position Mode linear axis Positioning active Mode Positioning Material cut S ModeSwitch_ 1 331 0665 B 360 6 S ModeSwitch_l2 332 0644 B 340 4 S ModeSwitch_I3 333 0576 B 320 4 S ModeSwitch l4 334 1257 B 415 4 S ModeSwitch I5 335 0120 B 410 2 S ModeSwitch_ 336 0499 B 230 5 Oo S ModeSwitch 17 337 1347 B 410 5 S ModeSwitch l8 338 0236 B 430 2 ModeSwitch_MS2 ModeSwitch_MS4 0 0 ModeSwitch mst 1340 ModeSwitcn ms3 1342 16 009C 0 L339 L341 Set masks May be used to watch the mode switching respectively to detect if the speed is to fast S ModeError L349 0454 B 330 5 Ref pos gt start length 340 4 ModePositioning Reset masks MR2 MR3 L343 16 2040 ModeSwitch_MR1 L345 16 0000 ModeSwitch_MR3 L344 16 0000 ModeSwitch_MR2 L346 16 0003 ModeSwitch_MR c347 Positioning mode B1347 Format mode B1346 Start positioning B1345 Start format mode for the actual format size ErrorModeSwitch c348 Mode switching error RE ANENE NEE MEN EG EE NEE Ed EE EEN ENE AG V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Free function blocks Mode switching positioning format mode Parameter setting for the function raise kn
249. oduction 2 3 3 Test cut For a test cut only one sheet is cut The knife drive is then stopped again The test cut operating mode is a latching operating mode i e the request can be withdrawn again immediately after it has been set Request test cut Operating mode test cut Material identification Knife speed in the cutting range at the start position active operating mode Fig 2 4 Timing in the test cut operating mode 2 3 4 Single cut In the single cut operating mode a single cut is made If material is already located in the cutting range the cut is made immediately after the request It is not necessary to specify a sheet length If the single cut request is set before the start of the material web was identified the cut position can be defined The knife stays in the wait position until the material has approached the cutting range corresponding to the cutting data Thus for example a precise cutting edge can be established at the start of the material web Request single cut Operating mode single cut Material identifcation Knife speed in the cutting range at the start position active operating mode Fig 2 5 Timing in the single cut operating mode Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 15 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction 2 3 5 End cut The end cut operating mode is used to make a cut at the end of the material web This allows a selectable sheet length
250. offset Absolute value encoder 1 at T400 terminals L172 0000 Re initialize AENC Pos Norm 1 0 L169 S AbsPos_ Valid L298 0976 B 600 5 Store actual position as offset in NOVRAM 0 read offset 1 store offset S Save pulse L294 1311 B 170 4 S AbsolutPos L295 3292 KR 160 8 Position sensing Absolute value encoder on T400 and normalization AENC n_Norm 1 0 L170 Position send by encoder Position norm Single AENC i_Gearbox AENC n_max 1 0 6000 0 L168 L171 B0298 Absolute position valid AbsolutOffset c290 KR3290 Absolute pos offset Abs Pos correct c291 AENC Mask YFC 16 FFFF L175 AENC Mask YF 16 FFFF L174 AENC Error c178 BO178 AENGC error T AENG OK AENC EncoderPos AENC Pos Single c180 AENC encoder position AENC Pos Single AENC Pos Multi AENC Speed c182 AENC Speed AENC Pos Multi Normalize a position in revolutions to the internal normalization X Shear normalization 60 4 eee S AbsPosition L183 3291 KR 150 4 KR3183 Abs position norm Revolutions Fsymech 80 3 KR3291 Absolute position corrected MEE NEE a d a S 5 Ss EE ee V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Abs Pos CU AbsPos Range EE a is Overflow handling L296 If the position exceeds the KR3285 upper limits L286 L287 is AbsPos AddPos subtracted S AbsPos high 0 0 Absolute Pos 2 SCG Abso
251. offset equalization H444 percentage offset equalization per machining cycle e g 0 5 of Fsymech Mark first reaches the light barrier v Position of the light barrier Mark first reaches the knife y H431 3094 H431 3099 L202 3094 L202 3099 y y Power down the T400 and power up again 146 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Incremental encoder linear axis y H400 Pulses per motor revolution feed drive of the knife slide H420 Pulses per revolution of the measuring wheel Via backplane bus from the encoder emulation of the basic drive Connection incremental encoder knife position Via backplane bus from the basic drive AA H407 0x7FC2 Connection Terminal 83 Terminal 83 Connection At terminals 81 82 Via backplane bus from the basic drive y H407 0x7F82 synchronizing signal synchronizing signal v y H407 0x7F42 H407 0x7F02 v Referencing technique Zero pulse only at the ref point Zero pulse coarse pulse Limit switch edge Absolute value encoder y v y H408 0x0000 H408 0x0030 y v L531 Limit switch at the rear L530 Limit switch at front in mat flow direction Fig 4 12 H
252. one H197 Pass marks Cut error Cut error Cut error knife position reference position 1 knife position reference position format setpoint reference position at zero pulse H185 3414 knife position H185 knife position of the knife H178 3436 reference position H178 reference position H185 3630 setpoint format H195 3001 fixed value 1 0 H178 3440 reference position for zero pulse y y Define max correction range normalized to Fsymech set H180 gt 0 e g 0 1 set H181 lt 0 e g 0 1 H179 integrating time if required increase until controller output d183 is stable y End format controller j 154 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Attention The zero pulse of the encoder for the shear position must be active if the shear is in the center of cutting range This zero pulse must reset shear position and material position Exclusively in the synchronous range Velocity reduction in the angular range a1 a2 Version 1 Cutting characteristic Range 0 a2 values between 0 3 and 1 0 Range a2 a1 value 1 0 Range a1 360 values between 0 3 and 1 0 gt H193 187 5 ms L583 3491 cutting characteristic is interpretted as supplementary velocity H189 gt 0 enable max supplementary angle 0 1 36 H190 lt 0 enable min supplementary angle H193 H105 60 H104 Cu
253. ons where the knife and material movement directions deviate from one another In these cases the speed and position components are required in the material flow direction which can be calculated using the Epsilon parameter H108 Table 4 10 System overview Drum type shears Radius of action of the Fsymech 1 knife at the circumference of _ Knife the shears type drum Rotary axis with normalization in angular degrees H100 360 Drum type shears with 2 knifes Half the radius of action Radius action along the circumference 2 Fsymech Rotary axis with normalization in angular degrees H100 360 Double saw Half the length of the Circumference of the Rotary axis with normalization transport belt cs nie A the m H100 Fsymech Fan SPortwe Reference position at the cut center Flying saw Acceleration range Knife travel for 1 Distance between the revolution of the knife wait position and the start feed drive cut Linear axis Knife position in mm with respect to the wait position Flying knife Acceleration range Spindle feed per Distance between the revolution wait position and the start cut Linear axis Knife position in mm with respect to the wait position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 45 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 5 Closed loop control structure Cut length Angular ranges Overspeed factor Speed actual value reference materia
254. operation Negative position controller limit value for local operation Source of the upper limit of the knife position for the setpoint of the position controller Used to stop the knife in linear applications Source of the lower limit of the knife position for the setpoint of the position controller Used to stop the knife in linear applications Source for the position controller enable Test setpoint to enter a setpoint reference value step into the position controller Source for the control signal to delete the integral component of the position controller Connected to 1 as standard i e the integral component is de activated Maximu and minimum value for the adaption of the measuring wheel circumference Position controller output smoothed Integral component of the position controller Proportional Gain of the position controller Integral action time TN of the position controller Smoothing time constant of the position controller output Source for the normalized cutting format for the format generator This is connected to the format controller output as standard Source for the normalized material web speed for the format generator This is connected to the smoothed material web speed as standard Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Val
255. or Value slower processing cycles Type Chart Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 0 Ww 120 3 0 DI 120 4 BO 120 6 120 7 120 6 120 7 0413 120 6 0576 130 1 100 ms SD 120 7 20 ms 120 6 32 ms 130 8 0431 130 7 85 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H420 Pulse Encoder 2 Initialization par H421 S Refer Speed_ 2 H422 S Refer pulses_ 2 H423 S set Pos_2 H424 S Pos_2 correct H425 S Enable Synchr2 H426 S Pos Set Value2 H427 S Pos corr Val2 H428 SyncMode Encoder2 Initialization par H429 Mode Encoder2 Initialization par H430 MaxPulseEnc_2 H431 S Ref_Mark_Pos H432 S FreezeCorrect d433 Error Encoder2 d434 Error code Enc2 d435 Speed 2 H436 Tfilt Speed 2 d437 Position 2 d438 Reference Pos 86 Description Data Number of pulses per revolution of the incremental encoder for material position Value sensing Type Chart Source for the material reference speed The reference speed is automatically Value calculated from the plant system parameters as standard refer to Chart 80 The Type speed of the material sensing where the material is running with the reference speed Chart is the reference speed Source for the reference pulse number of the material sensing This is the number of Value edge changes quadrupled pulses of the incremental tracks if the material is moved Type forwards
256. or the high word of a 32 bit absolute value encoder value Non relevant bits Value e g multi turn positions can be masked out using L296 Type Chart Source for the low word of a 16 32 bit absolute value encoder value Non relevant bits Value e g multi turn positions can be masked out using L297 Type Chart Normalization value for the absolute position selected using L282 L283 In this case Value it involves the Cuts per revolution value Type Chart Absolute value encoder position L282 L283 before normalization The value 1 0 Type corresponds to the smallest encoder step resolution Chart Range limit of the normalized absolute value encoder position This is required to Value shift the range of the position refer to c292 Chart 160 Type Chart 490 3 490 3 415 1 415 2 3 415 2 3 415 3 BO 415 4 415 5 415 6 7 415 6 7 415 7 BO 415 8 2314 160 1 2313 160 1 8192 0 160 4 160 3 1 0 160 4 109 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L287 AbsPos Range L288 AbsPos_AddPos c290 AbsolutOffset c291 Abs Pos correct c292 Absolute Pos 2 C293 Absole Pos 1 L294 S Save pulse L295 S AbsolutPos L296 Mask AbsPosHigh L297 Mask AbsPosLow L298 S AbsPos Valid L300 S Calib_Absolute L301 S CoarseRef Sel L302 S Calib_ZeroPuls L303 S CalPhiOverflow L304 S CalPhiUnderflw L305 S CalibCoarseRef L306 S CoarseRef_Jog L307 S Se
257. or the particular cut there are two selection techniques One involves counting the marks and enabling synchronization from a counter status which can be specified refer to Chart 135 The other technique is to issue a position dependent enable signal using free blocks As a result of the dimension data specified in Fig 4 8 the material position is uniquely defined when the pass mark passes the light barrier setting value pass mark KR3094 in Chart 180 7 If the material is located within a tolerance window around the position value then synchronization can be enabled via the pass mark Synchronizing is inhibited in the remaining sheet range Range c sh Compare4 Hyst Window to enable synchronization dependent on the svompares nange 0 1 material position calculated in T1 L597 3366 L751 P Material position B1595 Compare4 X gt Y Q Compare4 Enable the mark synchronization L595 3437 Compare4 X Y Q EnableMark_1 H363 0449 Mark within window Compare4 X lt Y Ref position of the mark JB Q Compare4 Mid Q EnableMark_2 L596 3204 Synchr Puls H364 0000 Differentiation between 1st cut and continous operation Q SetFirstMark p H448 0434 B 130 6 B0448 Mark set 2 Q B0449 Mark not set Manual operation Error No mark in the tolerance window Q ResetFirstMark H449 0577 B 320 5 Q AND1_I1 L700
258. ors greater than 1 0 simulate a slower material movement as displayed from the encoder Clearance between the light barrier for material detection and the knife Source for correction value to adapt the circumference of the measuring wheel Source for the main position reference value of the angular controller for cutting mode types This is the position reference value of the format generator as standard Source for the auxiliary position reference value of the angular controller for cutting mode types This is the supplementary setpoint from the cutting curve as standard Source for a supplementary position reference value Source for the position reference value of the angular encoder in the Approach start position operating mode Source for the position reference value of the angular controller in the Approach knife change position operating mode Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value 0 0 Type R Chart 60 6 Value 180 0 Type R Chart 60 5 Value 200 0 mm Type R Chart 60 3 Value 100 0 m Type R Chart 60 3 Value 315 0 Type R Chart 60 6 Value 345 0 Type R Chart 60 6 Type R Chart 60 7 Value 500 mm Type R Chart 80 1 Value 1 0 Type R Chart 80 1 Value 1000 mm Type R Chart 80 1 Value 1 0 Type R Chart 80 4 Type R Chart 80 6 Value 0 Type BO Chart 410 1 Value 3001 Type BO Chart 80 1 Value 1500 mm Type R Chart 60 6
259. ory d157 Form generator output knife reference position normalized Type R FGEN_Xsetp Chart 200 6 d158 Form generator output knife setpoint speed normalized Type R FGEN_Vsetp Chart 200 7 d159 Format generator output sin knife position Type R FGEN sin sin Chart 200 7 d160 Cutting format referred to the format generator output multiplied by the overspeed Type R Electric Format factor Chart 200 6 d161 Format generator output starting position quiescent position of the knife Type R Start Position normalized Chart 200 7 d162 Format generator output starting length normalized If the position of the material Type R Start length web exceed the starting length the knife starts its synchronizing operation Chart 200 7 d163 Format generator output material position normalized where the knife reaches the Type R AREF for AZ transition point in the velocity profile the knife comes to a standstill for larger format Chart 200 6 lengths d164 Format generator output maximum knife acceleration before transition point AZ is Type R Acc Phase1 reached Chart 200 7 d165 Format generator output maximum knife acceleration between the transition pointAZ Type R Acc Phase2 and the start of the cut Chart 200 7 d166 Format generator 1 diagnostics output Type R FGEN Diagnostic 1 Chart 200 6 d167 Format generator ond diagnostics output Type R FGEN Diagnostic 2 Chart 200 7 d168 Format generator output shears in the cutting range Type BO FG in CutReg
260. osition is corrected by the sheet length when cutting Reference position cut reference position sheet length Table 4 15 Parameters for pass mark synchronization and values for the example above H095 3106 S Dist LightGate Source for the distance from the light barrier to the knife center axis gt fixed value HO96 3107 S Dist Cut Source for the distance between the pass mark and cut gt fixed value H106 Dist Light Gate Distance from the light barrier to the knife center axis from the Distance from the light barrier to the knife center axis barrier to the knife center axis os KOEI mm Dist Cut Fixed value distance to the cut The cut is made 15 mm in front of the pass mark example H424 130 0413 S Pos 2 correct Source for the pulse generated per software to correct the reference position when cutting The reference position is reduced by the current format length Possible sources 0413 or 0417 H427 130 3630 S Pos corr Val2 Correction value of the reference position when cutting This corresponds to the currently effective format length L202 180 3094 S SV_Setvalue Source for the setting value of the reference position according to Xser refer to Fig above 50 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description 4 6 1 2 Suppressing pass marks For the case where there are several pass marks within a sheet from which only one is relevant f
261. ot be set by the synchronizing pulses Jogging and referencing Value 0 05 0257 0256 0259 0249 0000 Function Velocity when jogging 5 of 60 m min this results in 5 cm s factory setting No forwards jogging if the front limit switch is occupied No reverse jogging if the rear limit switch is occupied Reverse referencing if proximity switch starting position 0 Forwards referencing if proximity switch starting position 1 Initial direction of rotation is automatically obtained due to L531 L532 Chart 190 6 190 4 60 1 270 2 60 1 180 1 180 1 Chart 120 3 120 2 120 3 120 4 130 3 130 2 Chart 260 1 260 2 260 2 260 2 260 2 260 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning 7 4 5 Controlling the cut sequence RS flipflop1 in the format range gt RO Material not cut Material cut Enable gt Pulse 1 Cutting operation gt Cutting 00 ms ciami Starting condition gt control amping pulse Material standstill gt Cutting pulse Manual cut pl STATE Logik2 OnDelayl OffDelay1 In starting position gt 50 ms Soms Cutting pulse Start reverse positioning Output start cut kae o Clamping pulse E Oms Start reverse positioning Par Value Function Chart L758 0245 A pulse min 1000 ms is generated from the manual cut input terminal 57 436 1 L759 1000 ms Man
262. p c491 Cut Polygon Outp c492 Outp Friction Diag c493 Inertia Poly Out c495 Inertia L496 S KP Polygon L497 S Cut Polygon 112 Description Mask to select the inputs which reset the mode changeover to synchronous operation setpoint input from a format generator The low word of the mask selects the non inverted and the high word the inverted inputs refer to L339 The selected inputs or inverted inputs are ORed If the result of the OR logic operation is 1 the outputs Q 0 QN 1 Output Q then changes from 1 to 0 and a pulse is output at output QEN Status output mode changeover 0 Synchronous operation format generator inputs the setpoint 1 Positioning mode The status is inverse to output QN If the status changes a pulse is output at the following outputs QE ON 0 gt 1 and QEN ON 1 0 for the duration of one processing cycle Monitoring output of the enable of the positioning mode An error is generated if an illegal status occurs selectable with L349 in the positioning mode e g if for the current material position synchronous operation should be active Source for the error condition which may only have the value 1 when there is an error in the positioning mode This is used to monitor the mode changeover 20 value pairs to specify the friction characteristic Input values lt X1 output Y1 Input values gt X2
263. pe Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 2803 670 5 1 0 610 6 610 7 2807 670 5 1 0 610 6 610 7 3435 700 1 700 3 1 0 700 2 3411 700 1 700 3 1 0 700 2 3445 700 1 700 3 1 0 700 2 3000 700 1 700 3 1 0 700 2 3000 700 1 700 3 700 3 1 0 700 2 Parameter H841 S CB_Control W1 H842 S CB CTW Simulation d843 CB CTW1 H844 S CB Shear CTW d845 CB Shear CTW d846 Status Word 1 CB d847 Status Word 2 CB H901 H910 S PZD1 CB S PZD10 CB d911 d920 PZD1 CB out PZD10 CB out d921 CB Receive init d922 CB Transmit init H923 Drive code d924 Timeout CB H925 CB Enable H926 CB tmax Run d927 CB Receive Status H928 Mask CB Status H929 tmax CB PowerON H930 S Setpoint4 CB H931 CB Setpoint4 Norm d932 CB Setpoint4 Parameters and Connectors Description Source for the CB control word 1 In the factory setting this is connected to the 1 PZD from COMBOARD Source of the simulated control word1 from CB CB control word1 Control word 1 at the basic drive is formed from this Source for the shears control word from COMBOARD This is connected to the 10 PZD from COMBOARD in the factory setting Shears control word from COMBOARD This is used to form shears control words 1 and 2 d539 d543 Status word 1 Intended for transfer as 1 PZD from COMBOARD Status word 2 Intended for transfer as 4 PZD from
264. perating mode Simulation value for the shears control word for the Continuous cutting operating mode Setting mask to activate the cutting mode for simulation Refer to the programmable logic STATE in Function Chart 400 Mask to exit the cutting mode for simulation Refer to the programmable logic STATE in Function Chart 400 Data Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart BO 50 6 4 8 ms SD 50 5 3001 l 445 5 25 1 0000 l 810 1 0340 l 810 2 0001 l 810 2 0014 l 810 2 16 843E W 810 4 16 9C7F WwW 810 5 0342 l 810 1 0001 l 810 1 1310 l 810 2 0647 l 810 2 16 0000 l 810 2 16 0050 l 810 2 16 0110 l 810 3 16 0032 l 810 4 16 0007 l 810 3 16 0500 l 810 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L636 MS1 SM on L637 MR SM off L638 S SCTW bits SM L639 S CTW 1bits SM L640 L641 S SwitchDI_O S SwitchDI_1 L642 S SwitchDI sel L643 S Cut Mode SM L644 StateCut MR1 L645 S Edge2 L646 S LR1 L647 S R_1L1 L649 S Reserv
265. position is forced by the cut and is therefore known this operation is used to set the reference position The zero pulse from the knife encoder is simultaneously used as zero pulse for encoder 2 When cutting the knife position and the reference position are set to zero refer to Fig 4 1 and therefore all of the reference position sensing errors which have occurred are deleted Table 4 12 Hardware connections terminals refer to Fig Fig 3 1 Encoder connections of the CU Incremental encoder at the knife Tracks A B encoder 1 T400 Via the backplane bus from CU Zero track encoder 1 T400 Via the backplane bus from CU Tracks A B encoder 2 T400 Incremental encoder measuring wheel Zero pulse encoder 2 T400 Zero pulse encoder emulation of the CU encoder 1 and encoder 2 using the same zero pulse Terminal 65 T400 Light barrier signal to identify the start of the material web Table 4 13 Incremental encoder settings H400 4096 Pulses Encoder 1 Pulses revolution of the incremental encoder at the knife H420 2048 Pulses Encoder 2 Pulses revolution of the incremental encoder of the measuring wheel 4 6 1 1 Pass mark synchronization To synchronize to a mark on the material requires a light barrier to sense it H106 When the mark is passed the reference position must precisely have the following value Xset reference position pass mark sheet length distance cut pass mark This guarantees that the cut is precise
266. que sum for the drive converter Value 3029 S TorqueFriction Type Chart 240 6 L546 Source of the moment of inertia for differentiating when calculating the oscillating Value 3495 S Dif_inertia torque Type Chart 240 1 114 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter L547 S FactorT_accel c548 Torque Setp gt max c549 Torque Cut_Enable L550 S Cut Torque L551 S Cut Torque Pos L552 S Torque Cut Light L553 S n_Acceleration L554 S Inertia L555 S Friction L556 S Vref_OscillTorque L557 S Torque Cut Region L558 TD_Acceleration L559 TD_Inertia L560 S F_Overspeed L561 S Speed_vCut L562 S Enable Cut Curve L563 S Speed_Vref L564 S Speed_DV_FGEN L565 S Speed_FOVS Parameters and Connectors Description Source of the moment of inertia to calculate the accelerating torque Result of the comparison between the setpoint reference and maximum torque If this quantity is 1 this means that the demanded torque cannot be provided if the basic drive uses the same limit values Status of the cutting torque enable 1 Cutting torque is entered as additional torque Source for the cutting torque for the torque generation Source of the knife position for the cutting torque input Source for the material identification light barrier for the cutting torque setpoint input Source of the speed setpoint to determine the accele
267. r on the T400 in revolutions min L170 Source of the absolute position normalized in revolutions to normalize to the internal knife position normalization Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 150 4 BO 150 5 1 0 150 4 1 0 R 150 2 1 0 R 150 3 6000 1 min R 150 4 0000 l 150 1 3000 l 150 1 16 FFFF w 150 5 16 FFFF w 150 6 W 150 5 WwW 150 6 BO 150 7 150 5 150 6 150 5 150 6 3291 150 6 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L189 L190 S V_Cut Polygon S NV Cut Polygon L191 L192 S V_Friction S NV_Friction L193 L194 S V_Inertia S NV_Inertia L195 L196 S SV set Ref_1 S SV set Ref_2 L197 S SV_Longformat L198 S SV_StartSel L199 S SV_StartVal L200 S SV_Format L201 S SV_Start Size L202 S SV_Set Value L203 S Offset Set Value c204 Set Value RefePos L205 S SV Dist Light c207 Waiting For Web End c208 Set Ref Position L209 S Dist PassMark L210 S SV_OM 1 Cut L211 S SV enTopCut L212 S no Cut Mode L213 S SV Light Gate L214 S SV End Cut Pa
268. rameters and Connectors Description Two sources for multiplying the derivation of the the cutting curve Two sources for multiplying the derivation of the the friction curve Two sources for multiplying the dreivation of the the inertia curve Two sources for setting the reference position during the cutting operation Source of the Longfomat variable used to calculate the set value of the reference position for the first sheet after starting the cutting operation Source of the signal for selecting the set value when starting the cutting having material detected Source for an alternative starting length value for the setting value of the material position Source for the cut format to calculate the setting value of the material position Source for the starting length refer to d162 to calculate the setting value of the material position Source for the setting value of the material position for continuous cutting operation The material position is set using the synchronizing pulse of the material position sensing Source for the value which is subtracted from the setting value of the reference position material position when passing the pass mark The result of the subtraction operation can be used to enable synchronization shortly before reaching the pass mark Actual setting value of the material position The material position is set using the synchronization pulse of the material position sensing or per softwar
269. rating torque Source for the moment of inertia input to generate the effective mass moment of inertia Source for the friction torque input to generate the effective friction torque Source of the velocity for the oscillating torque calculation Source for the signal to enable the torque component oscillating accelerating and cutting torque The effect of this enable signal 0 Torques are set to 0 1 Torques together with the friction torque generate the reference torque Differentiating time constant to determine the accelerating torque Differentiating time constant to determine the oscillating torque Source for the supplementary velocity The knife velocity is increased as percentage by the supplementary velocity connected entered here Example Supplementary velocity 0 05 the knife speed is increased by 5 with respect to the material velocity when cutting Source for the velocity components from the cutting characteristic to take into account the over velocity factor Source for the control signal to enable the cutting curve Control signal logic 0 Setpoint velocity from the cutting curve 0 1 Setpoint velocity from the cutting curve effective Source for the reference velocity for the cutting curve The supplementary setpoint obtained from this parameter c577 is given by c577 L573 factor_overspeed 1 cutting curve reference velocity Source for the velocity component of the setpoint generator
270. rce of the 1 enable signal to control the motor brake This is assigned status bit Value OFF2 of the basic drive Type Chart Source of the 2 enable signal to control the motor brake This is assigned the signal Value Converter ready Type Chart Source of the 3 enable signal to control the motor brake This is assigned the signal Value No fast stop Type Chart Source of the optional 4 enable signal to control the motor brake Value Type Chart Status of the control signal to control the knife drive brake Type Chart Time until the brake has closed The brake control maintains the setpoint enable fora Value time specified using H678 when withdrawing the CU operational readiness Type Chart Time until the brake has opened The brake control delays the setpoint enable for a Value time specified using H679 after the CU operational readiness has been issued Type Chart Setpoint enable from the brake control This signal takes into account the times to Type open and close the brake H678 H679 Chart Selects 3 fault error sources to monitor the COMBOARD and the data transfer via Type COMBOARD Chart Delays a fault message from COMBOARD Value Chart Fault status of the COMBOARD Type Chart Selects 3 fault error sources to monitor the basic drive CU and data transfer from Type CU Chart Delays a fault message from the CU Value Chart Fault status of communications with the CU Type Chart Selects 3 fault error sources to monitor operator con
271. rection Type Chart Source to interrupt the offset correction As long as the connected signal 1 Value correction is stopped If the signal goes to 0 correction is continued until the Type position and corrected position are identical Chart Group error message of the material speed sensing If a error develops d433 1 Type evaluate d433 Chart Error code of the speed sensing of the material feed In operation the value mustbe Type 0 If it is not equal to 0 then there is an error in the speed sensing parameterization Chart Error bits refer to d412 Material velocity normalized and smoothed to V_reference H436 Type Chart Filter time constant to smooth the material velocity actual value Value Type Chart Normalized material position after the offset correction If a material position offset Type has been identified the material position is instantaneously set to the correct value Chart The Position2 value doesn t immediately follow this step function but approaches the actual position value in smaller steps The reference position is the normalized material position which is used as reference Type for the knife position closed loop control This involves the actual material position Chart multiplied by the overspeed factor 1024 l 130 2 3421 l 130 3 5422 l 130 3 0208 l 130 3 1345 l 130 1 0317 l 130 2 3204 l 130 3 3630 l 130 2 0 WwW 130 3 16 7F02 W 130 2
272. refer to the following problem profile 1 2 Interchange encoder tracks A B H401 3402 H318 1 0 H780 1 0 Rotary axis Knife and material position are reset by the same synchronizing pulse Torque surges sporadically occur The two position sensing functions knife and material use different synchronizing signal edges phase sequence tracks A and B of the encoder are different the position values are then not simultaneously reset a Always use the rising front edge of the synchronizing pulse H408 Bit2 1 e g H408 0x0004 H428 Bit2 1 CAUTION Both bits must be identical Cut length incorrect Format setpoint reference value is not transferred d630 is not equal to the format which has been entered Format shorter than possible c348 B1348 briefly to 1 Incorrect position normalization for knife or material 1 Set the length setpoint to valid SCTW 1 4 270 8 Remove limits H627 H628 Locate the calculation position H649 in the operating range Allow format constant calculation H172 H173 _ Measuring wheel slip 2 Reduce the mer velocity 3 Check the position sensing Changes made to H400 H407 H408 H420 H428 H429 only become effective after the T400 has been powered down 4 Compensate slip using a factor at H121 Shears to not stop after cont Longitudinal format too short 1 Set H111 to the format with delay in
273. rmats are to be cut the knife must be accelerated as soon as it has exited the cutting range This means that the knife can re enter the cutting range faster than at the synchronous speed The following diagram is obtained when showing the knife speed as a function of time with respect to the material position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 41 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description V material Cutting range Fig 4 2 Circumferential velocity of the knife for the format lt Fsymech principle At a constant material velocity time and material position are proportional to one another Then the period of the knife velocity corresponds to the cut sheet length Further the integral over the knife velocity must correspond during one period to precisely 360 as the knife rotates through precisely one revolution during this time If sheet formats are to be cut which are longer than Fsymech then the knife must be braked when it exits the cutting range From a specific format length onwards the knife even brakes down to standstill This format is called the limiting format For all format lengths which exceed the limiting format the knife remains in a wait position until the material has been transported forwards by an adequate length Zero pulse shear encoder cutting range id FA AY X lt lt Knife speed SN N LS V Material AASS AAAS SESSIES DR i Hoy Knife
274. ronism This value must be lt Fsymech Chart 60 3 Sub division of the format range velocity profile of the knife motion into an Value 0 5 accelerating and braking range The ratio of the ranges is defined using H103 Type R Example For H103 0 6 60 of the format range is available for acceleration and Chart 60 6 40 for braking Maximum material web speed in m min Value 100 m min Type R Chart 80 4 Mechanical synchronous format Value 1000 mm Rotary axis Knife travel between 2 cuts Type R Linear axis Maximum acceleration travel Chart 60 6 Fixed value for the distance between the light barriers and the knife in the 1 0 position Value 1500 mm the normalized knife position corresponds to Fsymech for non normalized position Type R Chart 60 3 Fixed value for the distance in mm between the light barrier and cut Value 0 0 mm Type R Chart 60 5 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameter H108 Epsilon H109 Knife Change Pos H110 TopCut size H111 Long format H112 Angle_CUT_ON H113 Angle_CUT_OFF d114 Xref_Norm H115 SizeMeas Wheel H116 i_Meas Wheel H117 Feed Revolution H118 i_Encoder1 d119 n_Ref Shear H120 Mode Linear Axis H121 S Slip Factor H122 Distance Material H123 S Meas W heelCorr H124 S SetPosition 1 H125 S SetPosition 2 H126 S SetPosition 3 H127 S SetPosition 4 H128 S SetPosition 5 Parameters and Con
275. rt Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 3000 445 3 2000 440 1 3000 440 6 2001 445 1 2001 445 1 2000 440 4 3000 435 5 1 0 435 6 1 0 435 6 3000 435 5 1000 ms 435 5 0000 435 5 430 5 0000 430 5 430 7 0000 430 7 425 1 425 1 425 1 3196 520 6 123 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L841 L848 Statistic Limiti Statistic Limit8 L849 Statistic Number Initialization par L850 Statistic Absolut c851 C859 Portion lt Limit 1 Portion gt Limit 8 L860 Logic3_MR L861 L868 S Logic3_I1 S Logic3_I8 L869 L872 Logic3_MS1 Logic3_MS4 L873 L875 Logic3 MR1 Logic3_MR3 L876 S Single Shot_1 L877 T_Single Shot_1 L878 S Single Shot_2 L879 T_Single Shot_1 L880 Logic4_MR L881 L888 S Logic4_l1 S Logic4_I8 L889 L892 Logic4_MS1 Logic4_MS4 L893 L895 Logic4 MR1 Logikc_MR3 L986 S Single Shot_3 124 Description Data Eight limit values to statistically evaluate cutting errors The evaluation determines the Type R relative component of measured values which lie between 2 adjacent limit values or Chart 520 6 below the lowest or above the highest limit For example Output Component LV3
276. se for the cut counting and cut fault error statistics The pulse is extended to 32 ms so that it can be used in a slower sampling time Status Cutting with a special length This control signal is used to select the format source for the format controller The first cut when cutting continuously is realized with a special length in order to synchronize the shears to the material starting from standstill Status One of the following modes is active Continuous cutting single cut sample cut or end cut This is used to delete the cut counter status per parameter 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors Data Type W Chart 280 6 Type Chart 520 1 Value 2809 Type Chart 300 2 Type BO Chart 300 4 Type BO Chart 300 5 Type BO Chart 300 5 Value 0560 Type Chart 300 3 Type BO Chart 300 6 Type Chart 300 1 Type BO Chart 310 5 Type BO Chart 310 5 Value 0555 Type Chart 260 3 Type BO Chart 320 7 Value 0168 Type Chart 520 2 Type BO Chart 300 7 Type BO Chart 320 4 Value 0 Type BO Chart 520 7 91 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H578 S Counter Set H579 S Cut Pulses H580 S AcknEndofFault H581 S Acknowledge_1 H582 S Acknowledge_2 H583 Delay End of Error d584 Acknowledge H585 S Mark Quantity 1 H586 S Mark Quantity 2 H587 S Mark Select H588 S PM Format H589 S PM_dX_Mark H590 S Enable Prio1 d59
277. set to zero Setting 1 20 The output goes to the input value corresponding to L741 Quality of the bandstop filter Practical values lie in the range 1 0 10 0 Source of the input signal for a 1 order lowpass filter free block Filter time constant of the 1 order lowpass filter Source of the input signal for a bandstop filter free block Source of the input signal for the blocking frequency in Hz of the bandstop filter Sources for the input signals of a comparator Source for the upper limit of a free limiting block Source for the signal to be limited of a free limiting block Source for the lower limit of a free limiting block Source for the input signal of a comparator with hysteresis free block Source for the range limit of the comparator with hysteresis free block Hysteresis of the comparator with hysteresis free block Center of the comparator range with hysteresis free block Source for the input signal of a characteristic with 2 points The output Y1 if the signal is less than X1 the output Y2 if X2 is greater A linear approximation is made between the two points Value pair for the lefthand characteristic point smaller X coordinate Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Val
278. source H828 H830 Source of the 3 actual value which is sent via the COMBOARD Factory setting Material velocity 3 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization Normalization for the 3 actual value at the COMBOARD Conversion Actual value3 CB 16384 value_of the_source H831 H833 Source of the 4 actual value which is sent via the COMBOARD 4 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization Normalization for the 4 actual value at the COMBOARD Conversion Actual valuet4 CB 16384 value_of the _source H834 H836 Source for the 5 actual value which is sent via the COMBOARD The value can either be sent as 16 bit or 32 bit process data High word of the 5 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization This value should be transferred if only 16 bit PZD are used Low word of the 5 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization Normalization for the 5 actual value at the COMBOARD Conversion Actual value5 CB 16 40000000 value of the _source H837 H879 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Ty
279. st is withdrawn by the internal control and not by the automation Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Introduction f Optionally directly after a cut program a sheet with a special length can Option special test be cut The source for the format length of the special test is defined using H626 chart 190 2 3 7 Jogging 1 2 Jogging 1 If jogging 1 is activated the knife normally moves forwards with a selectable velocity L523 When the reference position is passed the knife position and the knife calibrated status are set Coarse reference If when referencing material is still in the traversing range of the knife then it is not possible to pass through the reference position In this case a coarse reference switch can be evaluated which can be located close to the knife wait position However the coarse reference pulse is not as precise as a zero pulse and therefore results in a lower cutting accuracy at the first cut Jogging 2 For operation with jogging 2 the same statements are valid as for jogging 1 However jogging 2 is normally processed with a negative direction of rotation Table 2 2 Parameters for jogging 1 and jogging 2 L312 Coarse reference setting value jogging 2 and a positive direction of rotation L520 L523 Sources to enable jogging positive direction of rotation L524 L526 Sources to enable jogging negative direction of rotation L523 Speed for jogging positive
280. t Value Type Chart Value Type Unit Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Unit Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 150 0 230 3 3050 230 1 3400 230 1 3414 230 1 3412 230 1 1346 230 1 1 0 230 3 0 0 ms SD ms 230 3 3414 230 1 1347 230 1 230 1 0001 230 1 4 8 ms SD ms 230 5 3486 BO 230 1 3480 230 1 1 2 230 6 0 0 230 6 89 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H498 S PosRG_VSetp d499 PosRG aktiv H500 H515 S ShearCTW1 BitO S ShearCTW 1Bit15 H516 Mask 1 LokMode H517 Mask 1 AutoMode H518 Manual mode H519 Simulation H520 H535 S ShearCTW2 BitO S ShearCTW2 Bit15 d536 Shear CTW 1 H537 S SCTW1_simul d539 SCTW1_PLC H540 Mask2 LocMode H541 Mask2 AutoMode H542 S SCTW2_simul d543 SCTW2_PLC 90 Description Data Source for the precontrol of the position controller for positioning In factory setting Value connected to the speed setpoint output of the ramp generator Type Chart Status of the positioning setpoint generator Type 0 Positioning inactive or completed Chart 1 Positioning being processed Sources for the bits of the shears control word 1 assignment refer to d536 Value In the factory setting all of the bits of the control word are connected with
281. t L626 Source for the automatic mode input H844 Source for the shears control word L627 0013 Inhibit automatic operation when a fault occurs H841 2621 Intern generate control word 1 for the basic unit H844 2622 Internally generate the shears control word H581 0627 Acknowledge fault when withdrawing the enable y y H520 H535 Define sources for bits of the shears control word 2 y v End of the application control General settings for systems with rotary axis v EE General settings H105 Fsymech scope circumference of the knife movement H100 360 degrees H101 Knife exit angle Fig 4 1 H102 Knife entry angle Fig 4 1 H103 Symmetry of the velocity characteristic Fig 4 2 H154 0 Characteristic type Sinusoidal sections H117 H105 Knife slide feed per motor revolution Parameters for the knife position H642 Tolerance bandwidth to identify knife in the starting position refer to H105 refer below H719 Source to enable position monitoring fault errors factory setting only for cutting operating modes End of the general settings for systems with rotary axis Na Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 145 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Via backplane bus from the basic drive a Incremental encoder rotary axis i H400 Pulses per knife revolution H420 Pulses per revol
282. t Gate 1500 0 mm H106 S Dist Cut H096 3107 KR 60 2 Distance to cut KR3107 Dist Cut 0 0 mm H107 S TopCut size H097 3110 KR 60 2 S Long format H098 3111 KR 60 2 TopCut size TopCut size 200 0 mm KR3110 H110 Long format KR3111 Long format 100 0 m H111 KR3091 End of cutting range KR3118 End of cutting range norm KR3092 Start cutting range KR3119 Start cutting range norm KR3109 knife change position KR3129 KC pos normalized KR3100 X Shear normalization KR3195 gt KR3095D KR3099D KR3096 D KR3098D Neg dist light gate norm Dist light gate norm Dist light gate cut Dist to cut norm TopCut size norm Long format norm Edge point AZ 0 5 KR3103 Angle edge point H103 Angle_CUT_ON 315 0 Start cut torque H112 Angle_CUT_OFF 345 0 H113 KR3113 End cut torque Fsymech 1000 mm H105 Xref Norm d114 Xref_normalization Epsilon 0 0 H108 cos_Epsilon dX Pass mark 1000 mm H592 Dist between pass marks KR3592 pass mark dist norm Distance Material 1500 mm KR3122 Distance material H122 KR3123 Distance material norm S Reserve1 L649 3000 KR 70 2 KR3649 Reserve1 norm Xref_normalization 60 7 ERG ANENE NEK EE ENE EE EEN Ed EE EEN EN EG V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Constant General constants Floa
283. t Shear Pos2 L308 S Coarse Set Value 110 Description Theoretical value range of the absolute value encoder position The value is used to shift the range of the absolute position refer to c292 Chart 160 Offset to shift the range of the absolute position refer to c292 Chart 160 Offset position for the absolute value generator from the CU or on T400 It involves the encoder position in the required zero position Data Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart When a plant system is first commissioned the shears are positioned at the zero position and the absolute value position is saved as offset position in the NOVRAM of the T400 In cyclic operation the saved offset position is subtracted from the measured value Absolute position from the 16 32 bit source after subtracting the absolute value offset c290 Absolute position from the 16 32 bit source after normalization and range correction The range correction is used to shift a discontinuous position range Type Chart Type Chart overflow of the encoder position from the operating range of the encoder Absolute position from the 16 32 bit source after normalization Source of the signal to save the absolute position in the NOVRAM Source of the position value from an absolute value encoder not relevant for TR encoders The value can be saved as zero offset in the NOVRAM Mask to select the valid bits of the high word of t
284. t active AND mode positioning MR No enable Fault processing if the knife isn t at the starting position on time this means that larger formats sheets are cut than specified Angular acceleration of the slide drive in 40 mm up to 60 m min 1 m s 2 _ 60 4 in min 125m gt fea Ye DX 2 40mm zomm Rounding off The torque is established when accelerating time to establish the torque H481 H478 20 ms Final rounding off The torque is reduced when braking down to standstill time to reduce the torque H481 H479 40 ms Chart 436 4 436 5 436 1 436 2 430 4 100 1 100 1 Chart 421 1 421 1 421 1 421 2 421 2 421 3 180 1 Chart 410 2 410 2 410 2 410 2 410 2 410 2 410 3 410 3 410 4 180 2 230 3 230 4 230 4 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning 7 4 7 Par T400 operation without external automation system Function H841 H844 L620 L626 L627 H653 H654 L621 H656 H581 H966 H967 7 4 8 Par H548 H549 H550 H551 H552 H553 Value 2621 Internally generate control word 1 for the drive converter 2622 Internally generate shears control word 1 0241 Enable from terminal 53 0244 Automatic mode from terminal 56 0635 Only enable automatic mode if the drive converter is operational e g no fault 0001 Simulate drive converter ready 0001 Simulate drive converter ready 0001 Simulate dri
285. t delay Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 425 5 430 4 l 425 3 l 425 3 l 430 1 l 430 1 l 430 4 l 425 5 l 425 5 l 430 3 0000 l 430 3 3000 l 435 5 l 435 6 3000 l 435 5 10000 ms l 435 5 6 0000 l 435 5 0000 l 435 5 0000 l 436 1 100 ms SD 436 2 0000 l 436 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter L731 T_OffDelay1 L732 L733 S Nott S Not2 L734 L735 S S RS FlipFlop2 S R RS FlipFlop2 L736 L737 S S RS FlipFlop3 S R RS FlipFlop3 L738 S set_PT1_Zero L739 Quality L740 S PT1_inp L741 Tfilt PT1 L742 S Bandstop_inp L743 S StopFrequency L744 L745 S Compare_X S Compare Y L746 S Limit_max L747 S Limit inp L748 S Limit min L749 S Compare2 L750 S Compare2 Range L751 Compare2 Hyst L752 S Compare2 Mid L753 S Character_X L754 L755 Character_X1 Character Y1 Parameters and Connectors Description 1 switch on delay time Sources for the 2 logical inverters Sources for the set and reset input of the 2 RS flip flop R dominant free block Sources for the set and reset input of the 3 RS flip flop R dominant free block Source for the digital signal to set the output of the free lowpass filter to zero Behavior of the setting function Setting 0 21 Output is immediately
286. t equal to zero will be obtained due to the load operation Delay time when automatically starting the load operation for TR encoders Factory setting After the system is switched in the load operation is initiated with a L153 ms delay Indicates that the TR encoder has not started the load operation within the requested time L150 Indicates that the load operation of the TR encoder takes longer than is permissible L151 Indicates that during the load operation of the TR encoder no pulses nor incremental encoder tracks were identified Group error message for the TR encoder Selecting the absolute value encoder type 0 No absolute value encoder used 1 TR encoder 2 SSI or EnDat encoder connected to the T400 terminals 3 Absolute value encoder connected to the basic drive Resolution of the absolute value encoder steps per revolution SSI EnDat connected to T400 Number of revolutions of a multi turn encoder 0 signifies single turn encoder SSI EnDat connected to T400 Number of fill bits which are transferred by an SSI protocol before the position value SSI EnDat connected to T400 Position of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol SSI connected to T400 0 No alarm bit available Selects the clock frequency and period of the transfer clock cycle for the absolute value encoder SSI EnDat connected to T400 0 100 kHz 10 us 1 500 kHz 2 us 2 1MHz 1 us 3 2MHz 0 5 us Selects the absolute value e
287. t the absolute knife position is known In this case the knife position must be calibrated referencing The sequences and the effect of the prioritization are shown in the following diagram A reference approach travel is not required when an absolute value encoder is used refer to Section 4 4 3 Referencing FI AA Jogging 1 C Fa Zero pulse Il Il Coarse reference l Knife calibrated B TT EI Knife speed N KX t gt Any Active operating mode priority Fig 2 2 Sequence when referencing and jogging 1 cutting The continuous cutting operating mode is used to cut any number of material sheets When the operating mode is selected cutting starts as soon as the material enters the cutting range Request continuous cutting Operating mode continuous cutting AARD LALO Material identification Knife speed in the cutting range at the start position active mode Fig 2 3 Timing in the continuous cutting operating mode The operating mode is terminated after the request is withdrawn as soon as the knife is at the start position During the last cut a fictitious format is entered for the following sheet which is large enough so that the knife must wait in the quiescent position start position for the start of the cut The continuous cutting mode is completed in this status without this fictitious cut actually being made Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Intr
288. t7 No fast stop Bit8 Not used Bit9 Coarse reference Bit10 Not used Bit11 Not used Bit12 Enable cutting operation Biti3 Not used Bit14 Not used Biti5 Acknowledge fault Sources for the freely definable bits of the shears status word refer to d017 Source for the number of sheets to be cut for the cutting program permissible range 0 32767 Status of the request for continuous cutting from the cutting program 1 request available Status cutting program 1 completed T cutting program completed At the last cut of a cutting program this is used to display as to whether it involves a sheet with a different format This control signal selects the format source for the format reference Chart 190 3 1 the last sheet is cut and a request for a special sample is present Source for an optional control signal to exit the continuous cutting mode This mode is self latching i e after the cut request has been withdrawn a cut is still made This characteristic can be bypassed using the signal at H564 Status Operating mode continuous cut is active Sources of the AND logic gate to immediately stop continuous cutting Status Single cutting mode is active Status Sample cut mode is active Source of the signal which should be used as the material detection for the operation mode end cut Status End cut mode is active Source of the signal which should be used as the cutting pul
289. tant KONST2 Y8 Gearbox factor measuring wheel 3117 Constant KONST3 Y1 Feed revolution 220 3 Format CutError Y Cutting error in mm 200 2 PosControl LIM_AREF Y Limited reference position material position Inc_Encoder Dx_EnSync Y Position before the setting value position value shortly before the pass marks 3204 3205 3206 3209 3214 3216 3218 3219 3221 3223 3230 3233 3234 3235 3236 140 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 3279 90 6 input_T400 AE3 Filter Y AI3 smoothed Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 141 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors 3498 3517 3518 3519 Speed setpoint for inching fixed value 3533 3558 3559 3561 3575 3577 3581 Format FMT16_norm Y Output 1 selection switch free block 142 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors Output 2 selection switch free block Output lowpass filter free block R_DI real gt double word converter MULI_1 double word output integer multiplier W_DW 1 output word gt double word converter Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 143 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Typical commissioning 7 Typical commissioning 7 1 General procedure Commissioning the application General settings H120 0 Rotary axis 1 Linear axis H104 Reference velocity the
290. tart formatting lt 19 gt No enable v shears in the start position dominant lt 20 gt v positioning not active e positioning Target position after the Saws after cutting range es saws not on top cutting range Target position Starting Otherwise position Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 65 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description In the cutting range Saw in the lower position Saw in the upper position Raise saw Lower saw Positioning Start length Speed knife drive End of traversing End of cut Start of cut Starting position Fig 4 19 66 A Material position Format A Knife position Timing for the flying saw example The control functions for raising and lowering the saws are implemented as well as the changeover between format and positioning operation with the parameterizable STATE logic Chart 415 The logic to changeover the target coordinates when positioning is a free AND logic gate Chart 425 The required parameters and connection changes are summarized in the following table Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 31 Input assignment for the raise saw function first STATE block in Chart 415 L243 0665 No setpoint enable Chart 360 L244 0576 Cutting operation Chart 320 I5 Saw rear cutting
291. tary encoder L162 Number of leading bits without position info L163 Position of the interrupt bit optional L166 Coding 0 binary 1 gray 2 gray excess L167 Parity bit 0 no 1 yes y L158 3 Type Absolute value encoder from the basic drive L282 Define source for the high word L158 2 Type SSI or EnDat connected directly to T400 term L160 Number of cuts per revolution L161 Number of revolutions 0 for single turn encoders L295 3181 Source absolute position L298 0179 Position value if no error has been recognized L300 0298 Set calibration valid if the position value is valid Position actual value encoder c181 L283 Define source for the low word L296 L297 suppress non relevant bits per mask L284 Steps per revolution L286 L287 number of revolutions measuring range 1 0 for single turn encoders L300 0298 set calibration after power on delayed Position actual value encoder c292 Linear axis Rotary axis Move the knife slide to the end of the traversing distance VVVV If required rotate the encoder until the conditions are fulfilled No position overflows may occur when traversing the complete travel Move the knife slide to the start of the traversing travel for the quiescent position Encoder position actual value refer above must be greater than 0 The position actual value refer above must be less than the number of revolutions of th
292. tate machine L620 0000 B 70 2 MS1 SM on 16 0017 L636 S CU ready SM L621 0340 B 620 4 S Web ready SM L622 0001 B 70 2 S Fault SM L623 0014 B 530 8 SCTW1 Refer SM SCTW1 Startp SM 16 0050 16 0110 scTwiorrsm 1631 L632 16 0000 L630 B0632 S CU run SM L626 0342 B 620 4 S Web runSM S Calibrated SM S in Startpos SM S CutMode SM ON state machine 810 2 StateCut MS1 16 0007 L634 L635 MR SM off 16 1008 L637 at CTW1 CU OFF 16 843E L624 SCTW1 Cut SM 16 0032 B0628 StateCut MR 16 0500 R SCTW1 test operation j K2622 S CTW1bits SM L639 2621 K 810 6 CTW1 CU ON 16 9C7F L625 X CTW1 test operation j K2621 S SCTW1bits SM L638 2622 K 810 5 SCTW 2 test operation 16 1080 StateCut MR1 16 0A00 L644 TW1_SM_0 TW1_SM_1 TW1_SM_2 TW1_SM_3 TW1_SM_4 TW1_SM_5 TW1_SM_6 TW1_SM_7 TW1_SM_8 TW1_SM_9 TW1_SM_10 TW1_SM_11 TW1_SM_12 TW1_SM_13 TW1_SM_14 TW1_SM_15 O OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO SCTW1 SM 0 SCTW1 SM 1 SCTW1_SM_2 SCTW1_SM_3 SCTW1_SM_4 SCTW1_SM_5 SCTW1_SM_6 SCTW1_SM_7 SCTW1_SM_8 SCTW1_SM_9 SCTW1_SM_10 SCTW1_SM_11 SCTW1_SM_12 SCTW1_SM_13 SCTW1_SM_14 SCTW1_SM_15 ENE ee lt a SS e ENE EEN e y EE ee V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Test operation Startup state machine
293. terval cut has been withdrawn Calculation position is not within the of 0 5 s between 2 cuts clearance to SCTW1 2 operating range no changeover to the material detection longitudinal format to stop refer to d630 2 Locate H649 in the operating range Knife in the starting position not received 3 Knife position fluctuates around the starting position increase range H642 smooth closed loop position control Brief events are not always Transfer pulses which are too short from 1 Pulses lt 25 ms from T1 to T3 should be recognized a fast into a slower sampling time extended to 2 T3 e g zero pulses from Processing sequence of freely assigned the encoder blocks was not observed 2 The sampling time and sequence of freely assigned blocks must be observed refer to function charts In the synchronous range becomes active after re positioning For linear axes the knife cannot re enter the synchronous range cutting range for a reverse movement n Locate the range limit H451 toa position outside the operating range Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 157 Typical commissioning 7 4 Example of cut to length Proximity switch 4 mm RE starting position 9 Limit switch rear 1 oe EN N 0 Limit switch front 1 A o O 0 EA 0 0 Knife position gt gt
294. th system versions can be realized using the same software Synchronous Knife velocity Braking V material Return i positioning i Synchronizing A i Knife position AM Wait position Fig 4 4 Knife speed and position in the linear system The following definition is obtained from the analogy to the rotating system Fsymech maximum acceleration travel in mm Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 43 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Fsymech is also used to normalize the system for the knife coordinates H100 This allows knife coordinates e g and AX and AY to be entered in mm displayed and evaluated e g for knife position dependent functions The velocity diagram in Fig 4 3 must be parameterized as follows by defining the angular constants e AX 0 e AZ 0 shifting the wait position to 0 e AY 0 Fsymech defines the accelerating range 4 4 3 Absolute knife position Applications with rotary axes Applications with linear axes Applications with absolute value encoders 44 In order to be able to sense the absolute encoder position an encoder must be used with a reference point on the gearbox output side For practical reasons the encoder zero pulse is used The reference point position must be able to be freely selected so that it can be located in the cutting range of the knife Optionally an additional proximity switch BERO can be
295. th the knife at the bottom signal blocks refer to the example in Section 7 1 Reset the cutting logic STATE_Logic2 with the start of the Use STATE_logic1 Chart 415 for raise knife Start conditions for raise knife cutting pulse iti gp General conditions 1 Enable signal present 2 Knife not at the top Automatic mode 3 Knife at the bottom 4 Cutting mode 5 Optional Outside the permissible lowering range alternative to knife below Manual operation 6 Request raise knife 7 No cutting mode active v y Material cut is set with a reset pulse from the cutting logic connector 1277 this prevents multiple cuts is used Manual cut in the not required automatic mode Implementation STATE logic3 Chart 421 L195 0935 use a positive output pulse in order to set the material position to starting length Start conditions Exit condition 1 Cutting operation 4 No manual cut request 2 Knife in the start position 3 Manual cut request End of the cut control 152 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Absolute value generator SSI or EnDat At terminals 76 79 Connection EnDat TR encoder y gt Settings for TR encoder At the basic drive Protocol structure SSI encoder L165 2 EnDat rotary encoder L165 0 SSI ro
296. ting Point fixed values fixed val ue1 16bit fixed values fixed value W1 fixed val 16 FFFF 1 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 0 2 0 3 141592654 BOOOO B0001 K2000 K2001 K2002 K2003 K2004 K2005 K2006 KK5000 KK5001 KR3000 KR3006 KR3001 KR3007 KR3002 KR3003 logical 0 logical 1 word 0 word 1 word 2 word 3 word 4 word 5 word 16 FFFF Integer 1 double word 0 double word 1 Real Real Real Real Real I 0 0 L650 fixed value2 0 0 L651 fixed val 0 0 L652 fixed value4 0 0 L653 fixed value5 0 0 L654 fixed value6 0 0 L655 fixed value7 0 0 L656 fixed value8 0 0 L657 fixed val 0 0 L658 fixed value10 0 0 L659 fixed value11 0 0 L660 fixed value12 0 0 L661 fixed value13 1000 0 L662 fixed value14 0 0 L663 fixed value15 ue3 ue9 KR3650 KR3651 KR3652 KR3653 KR3654 KR3655 KR3656 KR3657 KR3658 KR3659 KR3660 KR3661 KR3662 KR3663 fixed value1 fixed value2 fixed value 3 fixed value 4 fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed val fixed value10 fixed value11 fixed value12 ue13 range lin axes fixed val format fixed value 14 CoarseRefValue 170 6 6 283185307 1 570796327 Constant KR3004 KR3005 2 Pl PI 2 1000 0 mm L664 fixed value16 1200 0 mm L665 KR3664 KR3665
297. tion 09 00 Data Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart W 510 7 W 520 4 265 4 250 6 520 8 260 8 150 8 240 7 240 3 240 3 240 4 460 8 540 5 W 540 5 73 Parameters and Connectors Parameter d056 d059 Display l1 Display 14 d064 d067 Display B1 Display B4 d068 d071 Display DIT Display D14 H091 S AX H092 S AY H095 S DistLight Gate H096 S Dist cut H097 S TopCut size H098 S Long format H100 X_Shear Norm H101 AX Angle H102 AY Angle H103 Edge point AZ H104 Reference Speed H105 Fsymech H106 Dist Light Gate H107 Dist Cut 74 Description Data Monitoring parameters integer type 16 bit signed Type W Par Source selection Factory setting assignment Chart 540 7 d056 L956 2302 PZD2 from CU speed actual value d057 L957 2809 PZD9 from CB d058 L958 2802 PZD2 from CB d059 L959 2806 PZD6 from CB Monitoring parameter BOOL type Type W Par Source selection Factory setting assignment Chart 540 7 d064 L964 0317 Enable synchronization d065 L965 0172 Enable format controller d066 L966 0567 Continuous sheet length d067 L967 0412 Knife speed negative Monitoring parameter double integer type 32 bit signed Type DI Par Source selection Factory setting assignment Ch
298. tion can not be canceled Software ld d001 Software version d002 Serial No d003 Hardware ld d004 SYMADYN D d998 SIMOVIS SW ID d999 Status EEPROM d985 AbsEncoder Type 0 L158 S Task AENC_T400 S Task TR encoder S Task CU encoder S Task cut curve L603 0168 B 200 8 Select the absolute encoder Enable TR encod c090 0 no absolute encoder 1 TR encoder 2 SSI EnDat T400 3 SBM2 encoder CU c093 Enable AbsEnc En T400 AbsEnc c091 c092 B0090 Enable TR encoder B0091 Enable T400 Abs enc B0092 Enable CU encoder B0093 Enable absolute encod En CU AbsEnc Disabling of special tasks Task AENC c610 L600 0091 B 50 8 chart 150 Task TR encoder c611 L601 0090 B 50 8 Task CU encoder c612 L602 0092 B 50 8 chart 160 Off delay cut 4 8 ms L614 Task cut curve c613 T400 absolute encoder TR encoder chart 140 Absolute encoder on CU lt a ES Constant Configuration setting V1 02 FPlan SPS450e vsd Function diagram 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length Shear constanst S AX AX Angle AX_fixed value H091 3101 20 0 KR3101 KR 60 2 H101 S AY AY Angle AY_fixed value H092 3102 ai 340 0 KR3102 KR 60 2 H102 Knife change position 180 0 H109 X_Shear Norm 360 0 H100 Reference constants Distance shear to light gate KR3106 S DistLightGate H095 3106 KR 60 2 Dist Ligh
299. tion is set to the synchronizing pulse angle This is only effective once for the position actual value when referencing e A maximum encoder pulse number is specified H409 A position maximum H400 is calculated from the encoder pulse number H409 4 H400 e As soon as the position maximum has been exceeded the position is reduced by the position maximum and a position maximum exceeded pulse generated This pulse is used as cutting Table 4 17 Parameters to simulate the cutting pulse new connection to the new cutting pulse source example Para Chart Quantity Significance in this application H173 200 S FormatChanged1 0417 New connection Enable condition for the format controller to position maximum exceeded H188 265 S Cutc_Int 0 0417 New connection Control signal for the cutting characteristic processing H400 Pulses Encoder1 1024 Pulses revolution of the knife position sensing H409 120 Max PulsesEnc 1 Defining the position maximum and activating the automation 7 position correction when the maximum is exceeded to one revolution 4096 4 1024 1 0 gt The knife position is reduced by 1 0 when the position actual value 1 0 is exceeded H414 S Pos SyncPuls 0417 New connection Synchronizing pulse extension L312 170 CoarseRef pos 0 5 Position setting value for the knife position position of the synchronizing pulse normalization is not in degrees In the example offset by 180 0 5
300. tion param d001 Software ld d002 Software version d003 Serial number d004 Hardware ld d005 Status BinInput d010 System status d012 Control Word1 CU d013 Control Word2 CU d014 Actual Faults d015 Actual Alarm 72 Description 0 German 1 English Software ID for the standard software package 450 Cross cutters 455 Closed loop shears control Software version number of the standard software package Plant system identification can be changed using H923 Module identification T400 144 Status of the digital inputs terminal 53 bit 0 to terminal 60 bit 8 The least significant 8 bits are the actual input level the upper 8 bits the inverse signal level Error status of the SIMADYN D system software 1 means Error Bit3 Error task administration Bit5 Hardware fault Bit6 Communications error Bit10 User error Control word1 for the basic drive BitO On main contactor 1 ON Bit1 OFF2 voltage free 0 OFF Bit2 OFFS fast stop O OFF Bit3 Pulse enable Bit4 Ramp function generator enable Bit5 Start ramp function generator Bit6 Setpoint enable 1 Enable Bit7 Acknowledge fault 1 Acknowledge Bit8 Jogging 1 Bit9 Jogging 2 Bit 10 Control requested this must be a 1 Bit 11 Enable positive direction of rotation Bit 12 Enable negative direction of rotation Bit 13 Motorized potentiometer raise Bit 14 Motorized potentiometer lower Bit15 Fault external 1
301. to Length SIMADYN D Manual 25 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Hardware components and interfaces Table 3 8 Synchronizing modes of the incremental encoder sensing factory setting highlighted TE Synchronization Via zero pulse Via trigger signal not for T400 Behavior for a zero pulse Position setting value Position position setting value za 4 Coarse pulse evaluation No coarse pulse evaluation Mode 1 no coarse pulse evaluation Modes refer to Fig 3 7 Modes refe g Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 E S OSS Coarse pulse Coarse pulses are used to suppress undesirable synchronizing signals evaluation For example faults disturoances can be suppressed or only certain synchronizing pulses evaluated by combining coarse and fine pulses 5 different cases are taken into account In the default setting the synchronizing pulses are used independently of the associated coarse pulses mode 1 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Coarse pulse ignored Y XG AND XF Y XGANDXF Y XGANDXF Y XG AND XF only 1st pulse only 1st pulse Coarse pulse l Coarse pulse l Coarse pulse Coarse pulse Coarse pulse Fine pulses Fine pulses Fine pulses Fine pulses Fine pulses m Evaluation signal valuation signal Evaluation signal Evaluation signal Evaluation signal Fig 3 7 Operating modes for the coarse pulse evaluation fine pulses
302. to re normalize a 16 bit process data in REAL floating point Default PZD3 from CU Normalization factor for the 2 actual value from the basic drive Calculation rule CU actual value2 H321 process data 16 bit 16768 2 actual value from the basic drive as floating point quantity 3 source to re normalize a 16 bit process data in REAL floating point Default PZD5 from CU Normalization factor for the 3 actual value from the basic drive Calculation rule CU actual value1 H324 process data 16 bit 16768 3 actual value from the basic drive as floating point quantity 4 source to re normalize a 16 bit process data in REAL floating point Default PZD6 from CU Normalization factor for the 4 actual value from the basic drive Calculation rule CU actual value1 H327 process data 16 bit 16768 4 actual value from the basic drive converter as floating point quantity Source to re normalize the low word of a 32 bit process data in REAL floating point Default PZD15 from CU Source to re normalize the high word of a 32 bit process data REAL floating point Default PZD16 from CU Normalization factor for the 32 bit word from the basic drive Calculation rule CU actual value DW1 H333 process data 32 bit 1073741824 1 double word from the basic drive as floating point quantity Source for the first value which should be store in the permanent memory of the T400 Factory setting position
303. to the actual closed loop control core In the closed loop core itself only a few adaptations have to be made Here the motion sequences for the different versions of the cutting device are defined The procedure is explained using examples in the Appendix of this documentation 6 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 1 3 1 Parameters Example Overview Parameters are used e to visualize internal quantities monitoring e to change fixed values e to change inter connections BICO parameters All of the parameters which refer to the functions and settings of the technology module are called technology parameters The technology parameters for the closed loop cut to length are described in Section 6 and appear in the function charts in the form of the following symbols Display text Rated speed id 1500 RPM f H123 pes Ele soning Knife position id a d097 Parameter number A Parameters which can be changed Monitoring parameters Fig 1 2 How parameters are shown in the function charts When changing parameters it should be taken into account that there are initialization parameters which only become effective after the T400 has re started In addition to the technology parameters there are so called basic drive parameters for the drive converters used These should be taken together with the associated charts from the documentation of the drive converter which is used It should
304. trol errors The sources are Type evaluated and signaled as user error 1 Chart BO 360 5 BO 360 5 BO 360 6 0666 370 1 1310 370 1 0600 370 1 1346 370 1 BO 370 4 0344 370 1 0660 370 1 0345 370 1 0001 370 1 BO 370 4 200 ms 370 2 200 ms 370 3 BO 370 4 470 1 1000 ms 470 2 BO 470 3 470 1 200 ms 470 2 BO 470 3 470 5 95 Parameters and Connectors Parameter H703 User Fault 1 Delay d704 User Fault 1 d705 User Fault 2 H706 User Fault 2 Delay H707 H709 S User Fault 4 S User Fault 6 H710 S User Fault Enable H715 Shear Pos Min H717 Shear Pos Max H718 Shear Pos Toler H719 S EnShearPosErr H721 H728 S PZD1 CU S PZD8 CU d731 d738 PZD1 to CU PZD8 to CU H740 H755 S ControlW 1 Bito S ControlW1 Bit15 H760 H775 S ControlW 2 Bito S ControlW 2 Bit15 H776 S Setpoint1A CU H777 S Setpoint1B CU H778 S Setp1_CU_sel d779 Setpoint CU H780 Setpoint CU Norm d781 Setpoint CU N2 H782 S Setpoint2A CU H783 S Setpoint2B CU 96 Description Delays an error message for user error 1 Error status for user error 1 Error status for user error 2 Delays an error message for user error 2 Selects 3 fault error sources to monitor operator control errors The sources are evaluated and signaled as user error 2 Source for the signal to enable user error messages Smal
305. ts Pulse encoder 1 HTL Zero pulse and coarse pulse input alternative to the terminals tracks A B and zero pulse can be taken from the backplane bus of the basic drive converter encoder emulation Pulse encoder 2 RS422 HTL bipolar HTL unipolar TTL Absolute value 2 synchronous serial encoders can be connected protocol SSI or EnDat encoder 2nd encoder uses the same terminals as the communications interface 2 this means that only one of the alternatives can be used Serial interface 1 Service functions e Download e Online operation in the CFC test mode basic start up Alternatively e USS OP1S Serial interface 2 Alternatives e USS e Peer to peer Diagnostic LEDs Red Internal T400 monitoring Green Data transfer to the communications module Yellow Data transfer to the basic drive 18 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 X8 80 HTL Pulse encoder HTL TTL RS422 Select with switch S2 X9 90 O TIa OD 92 5 analog inputs 2 differential inputs 11 bits sign 10V 10kQ 10V Hov Q 4 digital outputs bidirectional 24 V DC 8 mA input current 4 digital inputs interrupt capable 24V DC 8 mA input current TE 4 digital inputs 24V DC Commun f pua ications module port e g CB1 RAM Fig 3 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual Edition 10 00 6DD1903 0DB0 T15V 100MA Pulse encoder 2 E O 94
306. tting characteristic only rotary axis Extending beyond the synchronous range H605 1 task is always processed Any velocity change in the angular range a1 02 Version 2 Cutting characteristic Range 0 a2 values between 0 7 and 1 0 Range a2 a1 value 0 0 Range a1 360 values between 0 7 and 1 0 e g H105 750 mm H104 240 m min End cutting characteristic Version 1 Cutting characteristic N H i AY at 0 a2 AX i v_ref from the cutting characteristic c577 O sssssss Integral v ref X1 KR3159 FGEN sins Supplementary angle Knife ange Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 10 00 Version 2 Cutting characteristic AY AX Knife angle gt 155 Typical commissioning 7 2 Parameterizing the basic drive Purpose CUMC CUVC CUDC Status word 1 as PZD1 at T400 P734 1 32 P734 1 32 U734 1 32 Actual speed as PZD2 at T400 P734 2 91 P734 2 91 U734 2 40 Torque P734 5 241 P734 5 241 U734 5 142 Control type Closed loop speed control vector control P367 3 P100 4 P290 0 Main setpoint PZD2 from T400 for DC Master Bypass ramp P443 3002 P443 3002 P625 3002 function generator and speed setpoint limiting De activate ramp function generator P462 0s P462 0s refer to main P464 0s P464 0s setpoint P469 0s P469
307. ual cut pulse duration 436 2 Logic to initiate a cut logic2 L263 0665 l1 No enable factory setting 415 5 L264 0576 12 Cutting mode factory setting 415 5 L265 0455 I Starting condition cutting synchronism Chart 330 8 415 5 L266 0730 14 Cutting pulse OffDelay1_Q Chart 436 3 415 5 L267 0436 I5 Standstill material n Ref 0 Chart 130 8 415 5 L268 0237 l6 Material not cut Chart 430 2 415 5 L269 0644 I7 In the starting position Chart 340 4 415 5 L270 0935 18 Manual cut 415 5 L271 0x0026 MS1 Cutting mode AND start condition AND material not cut 415 6 L272 0x0A90 MS2 Standstill material AND manual cut request AND cut pulse_completed AND no_cut 415 6 operation L273 0x08D0 MS3 Standstill_material AND manual cut request AND cut pulse completed AND in starting 415 6 position L275 0x8010 MR1 Standstill_material AND no manual cut request 415 6 L276 0x0000 De activate factory setting 415 6 L278 0x0009 MR no_enable OR cut pulse 415 6 Pulse generation L876 1279 Clamping pulse from the output logic 2 436 4 L877 400 ms Clamping pulse duration 436 5 L728 0876 Derive the switch on delay for the cutting pulse from the clamping signal 436 1 L729 50 ms Duration of the switch on delay for the cutting pulse 436 2 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 161 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Typical commissioning Par L878 L879 L730 L731 L709 H269 H270 Par H933 H934 H935 H937 H938 H940 L19
308. ue Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 100 ms SD 436 2 430 6 0000 430 1 0000 430 1 0000 436 7 2 0 436 7 3000 436 7 20 ms 436 7 3000 436 7 3002 436 7 435 6 3001 435 1 3000 435 1 3000 435 1 3000 435 1 3001 435 1 0 1 435 2 3006 435 1 3000 435 1 0 0 435 2 3 121 Parameters and Connectors Parameter L756 L757 Character_X2 Character_Y2 L758 S OffDelay2 L759 T_OffDelay2 L760 S Free Word L761 L763 S DW_high S DW low DW Norm L764 L765 S Word Word Norm L766 L767 S Float Float Norm L768 L775 Testdata1_1 Testdata1 8 L776 S Testdata1 Sel L777 L784 Testdata2_1 Testdata2_8 L785 S Testdata2_Sel L786 L788 S ADD1 X11 S ADD1 X3 L789 L791 S ADD2 X11 S ADD2 X3 L792 L793 S SUB1 X1 S SUB1 X2 L794 L795 S SUB2 X1 S SUB2 X2 L796 L798 Q MUL1 X1 Q MUL1 X3 L799 L801 S MUL2 X1 S MUL2 X3 L802 L803 S DIV1 X71 S DIV1 X2 L804 L805 S DIV2 X1 S DIV2 X2 L806 L807 S OR3_I1 S OR3 l2 122 Description Value pair for the righthand characteristic point higher X coordinate Source for the 2 switch off d
309. ue Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart 0596 210 1 0595 210 1 3414 210 4 210 5 1 0 210 2 0 1 210 2 1 0 210 2 0 1 210 2 3707 210 4 3705 210 4 0671 210 4 0 0 210 4 0001 210 4 20 mm 80 1 210 8 210 6 2 5 210 5 6 ms 210 5 4 8 ms SD 210 7 3184 200 3 3435 200 3 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 09 00 Parameters and Connectors Parameter Description Data H152 Source for the normalized material position for the format generator Value 3197 S FGEN RefPos This is connected to the material position weighted with the overspeed factor as Type standard Chart 200 3 H153 Source for the overspeed factor For overspeed factor values greater than 1 0 the Value 3020 S Speedfactor knife moves faster than the material web when cutting Type Chart 200 3 H154 Selects the velocity profile for the knife movement Value 0 FGEN Curve Typ 0 Sinusoidal sections OE Sii 3 1 Linear ramps a 2 Linear ramps with rounding off d155 Error code format generator Type FGEN error code Bito FMT lt 0 Bit5 MOD not valid Chart 200 7 Bit1 AX not valid Bit 6 OVS not valid Bit 2 AY not valid Bit 7 Hardlock missing Bit 3 AZ not valid Bit 8 not enough mem
310. ue position in T3 Range2_OVF S optRange2_max L229 3162 6232 KR 200 8 S optRange2 L230 3438 Range1_Overflow B0232 Range2_Overflow KR 135 5 KR3230 Range2_limited L231 3163 7s B0233 Range2_Underflow KR 200 8 Out of Range3 c234 out of Range3 Range3_OVF C227 B0227 Range3_Overflow KR3221 Range3_limited B0228 Range3_Underflow c228 Range3_UF The monitoring and limitation function of this chart are for free usage EER Wt ee aa N ER ee Funcion diagram Control logic Range monitoring 3 c233 Range2_UF Compare3 Hyst S Compare3 Range 0 0 EN Compare3 X gt Y S Compare3 L591 3000 S Compare3 Mid L592 3000 KR 70 2 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length S CU ready 2 Run H654 0342 B 620 4 S CU ready 3 TR encoder inactive 0150 B 165 8 ale D oa a S CU ready 4 0001 B 70 2 ay D a D n m w o D v E O E gt D oa a 0843 B 680 4 S EnableLocal 0591 B 290 6 T D a Oo S Enable Ramp 0844 B 680 4 ale D a N S Start Ramp 0845 B 680 4 S Enable Setp 0846 B 680 4 T D a I D a N S CU ready 1 Flying restart H653 0320 B 620 8 EnableDelayLoc 10 s H659 Inverter ready d660 MT Enable Inverter d662 11 Enable from brake control 370 4 S optEnableCnitrl H661 0001 B 70 2 B0661 Inverter not ready B0660 Invert
311. ution of the measuring wheel Adjust the encoder at the knife so that the zero pulse lies in the center of the cutting range Via backplane bus from the encoder emulation of the basic drive Connection Terminal 83 onnection incremental encoder knife position Terminal 83 At terminals 81 82 Via backplane bus from the basic drive Connection synchronizing signal synchronizing signal y y AA y H407 0x7FC2 H407 0x7F42 H407 0x7F02 H407 Ox7F82 y A AA Referencing technique Zero pulse Zero pulse coarse pulse Absolute value encoder y AA y H408 0x0000 H408 0x0030 L542 0 0 Velocity reference y Ad Ad L542 Velocity when referencing referred to the rated velocity gt Absolute value generator lt 4 Pass mark synchronization Connect the zero pulse of the knife position encoder at terminal 64 H425 0317 synchronize with the knife zero pulse v Connect the light barrier at terminal 64 terminal 88 to ground H424 0413 for the zero pulse of the knife encoder material position material position cut format es no v H425 1360 sense the pass marks as a function of the position y H366 permissible deviation from the expected value refer to Fsymech H425 1 v y H446 permit
312. utting range Saw blade in the wait oe setting Acceleration range Fsymech 3 Xref_normalization Distance materil ER Fig 4 18 Principle of a flying saw system In the diagram above it can be clearly seen that the material and the saw slides move in different directions For the internal normalization operations the cosine of the angle is required In this case the position and velocity components of the knife motion are calculated in the material flow direction The knife coordinates count in the movement direction of the knife The knife position 0 in the waiting position starting position of the knife This example assumes that the knife is braked after cutting raised above the material and moved back to the starting position There it is lowered and waits for the next cut This starts when the material exceeds a certain position start length this is internally calculated Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Table 4 29 Special system specific parameters for the flying saw example Param Value Quanity __ Significance S S H102 110 0 mm AY The knife should run in synchronism with the material 20 mm OE NR before the end of the acceleration travel example H117 EER Feed Revolution Knife feed for one revolution of the motor for saw slides refer to Chart 80 H122 Distance material Distance between the
313. ve converter ready 0013 Ready to run only if no fault is present 0627 Acknowledge fault by withdrawing the enable signal at terminal 53 Ox30E0 Suppress non relevant faults error bits in the fault word Ox30E0 Suppress non relevant fault bits in the alarm word Diagnostics Value Assigning free bits in the shears status word 0876 Clamping pulse 1279 Positioning 0878 Cut pulse 0730 Extended cut pulse OffDelay1 0632 Automatic mode 0250 Chart 680 1 680 5 810 1 810 1 810 1 360 2 360 1 810 2 360 1 530 4 530 4 530 4 Chart 520 1 520 2 520 1 520 2 520 1 Light barrier material detection Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 520 2 163 Typical commissioning 7 5 Function flow PLC principle Inverter ready yes Enable inverter no Inverter active yes Format setpoint valid CB Shear control word Bit 4 1 no Cutting mode requested yes Shear calibrated no yes Stop referencing shear CB Shear control word Bit 6 0 Shear in no start position yes Stop moving to start position CB Shear control word Bit 8 0 Enable continuous cut CB Shear control word Bit 1 1 yes End continuous cut CB Shear control word Bit 1 0 164 Referencing shear CB Shear control word Bit 6 1 Move shear to start position CB Shear control word Bit 8 1 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD19
314. verter ready signal All of the 4 sources are ANDed All conditions which are not required must be connected to a logical 1 source 0001 Source for the control signal Enable ramp function generator Source for the start signal Start ramp function generator Delay time controller enable for local operation This is used to maintain motor magnetization when Jogging Referencing or Approach start position Status of the drive converter readiness Source for an optional controller enable Using this signal an additional condition can be established to enable the control closed loop Data Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Value Type Chart Type Chart Value Type Chart 425 3 425 3 3414 340 2 3161 340 2 0 01 340 2 0 003 340 3 BO 340 4 0460 340 4 500 ms 340 6 BO 340 7 3413 340 1 0 75 340 1 0591 360 1 0843 360 1 0846 360 1 360 1 3 0844 360 1 0845 360 1 10s SD 360 2 BO 360 5 0001 360 5 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DB0 Edition 09 00 Parameter d662 Enable Inverter d664 Enable Setpoint d666 En
315. vidually changed using parameters Generally control and standard word are available as 16 bit values The closed loop control related core of the closed loop cut to length operate with per unit quantities Table 4 1 Normalization of the process data Conversion into floating point values N2 16 bit 32768 32767 DES Normalization factor 16384 N4 32 bit 2147483648 2147483647 PEDO Normalization factor 1073741824 Table 4 2 Normalization for internal closed loop control quantities Quantity Reference quantity Knife velocity V_reference cos ii Velocity knife drive Reference speed 1 Speed at material velocity V_reference di19 Knife position Fsymech H105 Reference position Xref_normalization d114 material 4 2 Setpoints and actual values Table 4 3 Setpoints for the standard software package from the automation Significance Permissible range Cutting length Format to be cut 0 32767 mm Overspeed factor Percentage velocity increase when cutting 0 1 0 10 0 Practical range 0 100 gt 0 10 1mm 0 32767 mm Distance to the cut Supplementary value for the distance between the light barrier signal and the center axis of the knife if the cut doesn t directly coincide with the optical barrier mark Sum of the distance light barrier knife distance 36 Sheet Cutter Cut to Length SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0DBO Edition 10 00 Function description Permissible r
316. ware The standard software package can be purchased as a T400 technology configuration board with software which is ready to run The documentation is for this particular application Using parameters the software can be adapted to the special task Thus it is possible to change fixed values and connections within the configured software NOTE The control core all of the functions with the exception of inputs outputs is also available for other configurations for example the PM4 PM6 CPU modules with expansion module IT41 or the T400 in the SRT400 subrack In this case the software package is adapted to the particular application using the graphic CFC configuring tool 1 2 Order numbers The standard Sheet Cutter Cut to Length software package is available ready to run as T400 or as source code on floppy disk For the source code it involves a SIMADYN D software package All customer specific adaptation work can be executed and documented using the graphic CFC configuring interface The software is protected using a hardlock PAL which can be inserted on all SIMADYN D processor modules This PAL is required when operating the closed loop control Table 1 1 Components to adapt the configured software using CFC T400 with sheet High performance closed loop sheet cutter control loaded on 6DD1842 0ACO cutter cut to T400 with hardlock PAL ready to run length D7 ES SIMADYN D configuring software D7 ES This package comprises
317. which the Knife blocked signal should be transferred Status of the blockage protection monitoring 1 Knife is blocked This status signal indicates an error pulse encoder configuring refer to d412 d434 Source for the actual value of the knife speed from the basic drive for checking the plausibility of the pulse encoder parameterization Source for the actual value of the knife speed on the T400 for checking the plausibility of the pulse encoder parameterization Difference between the knife speed measured on the T400 and in the basic drive The difference must be 0 if the pulse encoder was correctly parameterized and speed normalization Maximum permissible speed deviation when checking the plausibility of the pulse encoder parameterization Result of the comparison between the knife speed measured values on the T400 and in the basic drive 1 Measured values deviate out of range Source for the enable checking the plausibility of the knife speed Factory setting The check is inhibited while the absolute position of a TR encoder is read in Delay time with which an error identified by the knife speed plausibility check is transferred Error status of the knife speed plausibility check 1 Error has been identified Source for the signal to acknowledge a TR encoder fault error Source for the load output of the TR encoder Using this signal the encoder signals that the absolute position is being transferred Sour
318. y EEPROM d985 Status EEPROM d986 d990 CPU load T1 CPU load T5 d998 d999 SIMADYN D SIMOVIS SW ID LOOO L015 S Status1CB BitO S Status1CB B15 L020 L035 S Status2CB BitO S Status2CB B15 L036 Cam Reset Mode L037 Cam deltaPos Max L038 L039 S Cam_X S Cam X L040 S ActpPos Cam L041 S Speed Cam Parameters and Connectors Description Status of the basic drive monitoring 1 Basic drive available and operational Source of the signal to inhibit synchronization of the T400 from the basic drive The function is only effective for the cross cutter version Delay with the synchronization of the T400 with the basic drive This synchronization is established H976 ms after the basic drive has been identified only for cross cutters Period of the clock signal which can be used to re synchronize the T400 with the basic drive This function is optional as a single synchronization after power on for the drive converters intended is sufficient Delay to power down the fan Defines the data transfer format for floating point values to the technology boards 0 As 32 bit integer standard 1 As floating point value reserved for special applications Defines the data transfer format for floating point values via the COMBOARD channel 0 As 32 bit integer standard 1 As floating point value reserved for special applications This means that the T400 can be used for special
319. zable logic 1 raise lower knife Parameterizable logic 2 Parameterizable logic 3 AND OR gates Miscellaneous functions Control functions Time dependent functions Type conversion Arithmetics Contents Diagrams KP adaption and cut polygon Friction and inertia Diagnostics CU CB and user faults Shear position and speed Blocking protection Pulse encoder fault detection System status and control logic status Status shear Faults and alarms Display parameters Inverter interface General settings Process data reception Inverter status words Control words Process data transmission COMBOARD General settings Process data reception Control words Status words Process data transmission Optional communication COMBOARD configuration USS slave Generel settings peer to peer Peer to peer process data Test operation Multiplexer selected fixed values Startup state machine Aa EEN EST General Contents V1 02 FPlan_SPS450e vsd Function diagram EA 10 01 01 Sheet cutter Cut to Length AEPA i setpoints arta om ee ear Controler es Io oe Chart 670 700 Chart 25 Chart 610 640 PEG Controlling shear mode Shear Control Words Priority handling switching between positioning format mode Chart 410 ff Communication board Chart 270 280 680 810 Chart 290 CB Inverter or Faults and Control Unit alarms Operation modes Diagnostics Enable fault signalling CU Chart 300 330 Chart 330

Display - Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents